Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 1.
Define the following terms:

  1. Electrical circuit
  2. Junction
  3. Loop
  4. Branch
  5. Electrical network.

Answer:

  1. Electrical circuit: An electrical circuit, in general, consists of a number of electrical components such as an electrical cell, a plug key (or a switch), a resistor, a current meter (a milliammeter or an ammeter), a voltmeter, etc., connected together to form a conducting path.
  2. Junction: A point in an electrical circuit where two or more conductors are joined together is called a junction.
  3. Loop: A closed conducting path in an electrical network is called a loop or mesh.
  4. Branch: A branch is any part of an electrical network that lies between two junctions.
  5. Electrical network: An electrical network consists of a number of electrical components connected together to form a system of inter-related circuits.

Question 2.
State Kirchhoff’s first law or current law or junction law.
Answer:
The algebraic sum of the currents at a junction is zero in an electrical network, i.e. \(\sum_{i=1}^{n}\) Ii = 0, where Ii is
the current in the ith conductor at a junction having n conductors.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 3.
What is the sign convention used for Kirchhoff’s first law? Explain with an example.
Answer:
A current arriving at a junction is considered positive while a current leaving a junction is considered negative.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 1
Consider a junction in a circuit where six current carrying conductors meet. Currents I1, I3 and I5 are considered positive as they arrive at the junction.
Currents I2, I4 and I6 are considered negative as they leave the junction.

Using Kirchhoff’s current law, \(\sum_{i=1}^{6}\) Ii = 0, we get,
I1 – I2 + I3 – I4 + I5 – I6 = 0
∴ I1 + I3 + I5 = I2 + I4 + I6
Thus the total current flowing towards the junction is equal to the total current flowing away from the junction.

[Note : As the current is the time rate of flow of charge, it follows that the net charge entering the junction in a given time equals the net charge leaving the junction in the same time. Thus, this law (current law/junction law) is based on the conservation of charge. ]

Question 4.
State Kirchhoff’s second law or voltage law or loop law.
Ans. The algebraic sum of the potential differences (products of current and resistance) and the electromotive forces (emf’s) in a closed loop is zero. Σ IR + Σ E = 0

Question 5.
What is the sign convention used for Kirchhoff’s second law ? Explain with an example.
Answer:
(1) While tracing a loop, if we traverse a resistor along the direction of conventional current, the potential difference across the resistor is considered negative. If we traverse the resistor opposite to the direction of conventional current, the potential difference across the resistor is considered positive.

(2) While tracing a loop within the source, if we travel from the negative terminal of the source (cell) to the positive terminal of the source (cell), the emf of the source (cell) is considered positive.

On the contrary, if we travel from the positive terminal of the source (cell) to the negative terminal of the source (cell), the emf of the source (cell) is considered negative.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 2
Consider the electrical network shown in above figure.
Tracing loop ABFGA in the clockwise direction, we get,
– I1R1 – I3R5 – I1R3 + E1 = 0
∴ E1 = I1R1 + I3R5 + I1R3
Tracing loop BFDCB in the anticlockwise direction, we get,
– I3R5 – I2R4 + E2 – I2R2 = 0
∴ E2 = I2R2 + I3R5 + I2R4

[Notes : (1) We may as well consider loop ABCDFGA and write the corresponding equation. (2) As the emf of a cell is the energy provided by the cell per unit charge in circulating the charge and the potential difference across a resistance is the work done per unit charge, it follows that this law (voltage law /loop law) is based on the conservation of energy.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 6.
What is the basis of Kirchhoff’s current law and voltage law?
Answer:
Kirchhoff’s current law is consistent with the conservation of electric charge while the voltage law is consistent with the law of conservation of energy.

7. Solve the following

Question 1.
Determine the current flowing through the galvanometer shown in the figure below.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 3
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 4
To find Ig we apply Kirchhoff’s voltage law.
Loop ABDA :
– 5I1 – 10Ig + 15I2 = 0
∴ – 5I1 + 15I2 = 10Ig
∴ -I1 + 3I2 = 2Ig ………….. (1)
Loop BCDB :
-10(I1 – Ig) + 20 (I2 + Ig) + 10Ig = 0
∴ – 10I1 + 10Ig + 20I2 + 20Ig + 10Ig = 0
∴ I1 – 2I2 = 4Ig …………. (2)
Adding Eqs. (1) and (2), we get, I2 = 6 Ig …………. (3)
Substituting for Z2 from Eq. (3) in Eq. (2).
∴ I1 = 12Ig + 4Ig = 16Ig
Now, I1 + I2 = 2 A by the data.
∴ 16Ig + 6Ig = 2A
∴ 22Ig = 2A
∴ Ig = \(\frac{2}{22}\) A = \(\frac{1}{11}\) A from B to D
This is the current flowing through the galvanometer.

Question 8.
State the factors on which the resistance Of a material depends.
Answer:
The resistance of a material depends upon tem-perature, strain, humidity, etc.

[Note : Depending upon the factors stated above, resistance may vary from near zero to thousands of megaohm.]

Question 9.
What are the applications of Wheatstone’s metre bridge?
Answer:

  1. Wheatstone’s metre bridge is used for measuring the values of very low resistance precisely.
  2. It can also be used to measure the quantities such as strain galvanometer, resistance, capacitance of a capacitor, inductance of an inductor, impedence of a combination of a resistor, capacitor and inductor and the internal resistance of a cell.

Question 10.
What is the balance point in Kelvin’s method to measure the resistance of a galvanometer?
Answer:
Kelvin’s method of determination of the galvanometer resistance is an equal deflection method. The balance point in Kelvin’s method is a point on the wire for which the bridge network is balanced and the galvanometer shows no change in deflection.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 11.
Why is Kelvin’s method to measure the resistance of a galvanometer called an equal deflection method?
Answer:
In Kelvin’s method of determination of the galvanometer resistance using a Wheatstone metre bridge, the galvanometer is connected in one gap of the bridge and a variable known resistance is connected in the other gap. The junction of the two gaps (say, B) is connected directly to a pencil jockey.

The jockey is tapped along the wire to locate the equipotential balance point D when the galvanometer shows no change in deflection.

Since the galvanometer shows the same deflection on making or breaking the contact between the jockey and the wire, the method is an equal deflection method.

12. Solve the following :

Question 1.
Four resistances 5 Ω, 10 Ω, 15 Ω and X (unknown) are connected in the cyclic order so as to form a Wheatstone network. Determine X if the network is balanced.
Solution:
Data : P = 5 Ω, Q = 10 Ω, R = 15 Ω
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 5
Since the network is balanced,
\(\frac{P}{Q}=\frac{X}{R}\)
∴ \(\frac{5}{10}=\frac{X}{15}\)
∴ X = 15 × \(\frac{5}{10}\) = 7.5 Ω

Question 2.
Resistances P = 10 Ω, Q = 15 Ω, S = 50 Ω and R = 25 Ω are connected in order in the arms AB, BC, CD and DA respectively of a Wheatstone network ABCD. A cell is connected between A and C. What resistance has to be connected in parallel to S to balance the network?
Solution:
Data : P = 10 Ω, Q = 15 Ω, S = 50 Ω and R = 25 Ω
Let x = resistance to be connected in parallel to S to balance the network. The resistance of the parallel combination of S and x is \(\frac{S x}{S+x}\) .
For the balanced network,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 6

Question 3.
Four resistances 4 Ω, 8 Ω, X and 6 Ω are connected in the cyclic order so as to form Wheatstone’s network. If the network is balanced, find X.
Solution:
Data : P = 4Ω, Q = 8 Ω, R = X and S = 6 Ω
Since the network is balanced,
∴ \(\frac{P}{Q}=\frac{S}{R}\)
∴ X = 6\(\frac{8}{4}\) = 12 Ω

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 4.
Four resistances 4 Ω, 4 Ω, 4 Ω and 12 Ω form a Wheatstone network. Find the resistance which connected across the 12 Ω resistance will balance the network.
Solution:
The resistance in each of the three arms of the network is 4 Ω. Hence, to balance the network, the resistance in the fourth arm must also be 4 Ω.

Hence, the resistance (R) to be connected across. i.e., in parallel to, the 12 Ω resistance should be such that their equivalent resistance is 4Ω.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 7

Question 5.
Four resistances 80 Ω, 40 Ω, 10 Ω and 15 Ω are connected to form Wheatstone’s network ABCD as shown in the following figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 8
What resistance must be connected in the branch containing 10 Ω to balance the network?
Solution:
Data : P = 80 Ω, Q = 40 Ω, 10 Ω and R = 15 Ω are connected as shown in above figure.
When the network is balanced,
\(\frac{P}{Q}=\frac{S}{R}\)
∴ \(\frac{80}{40}=\frac{S}{15}\)
∴ S = 15 × 2 = 30 Ω
Let X be the resistance to be connected in series with 10 Ω, so as to obtain 30 Ω.
∴ X + 10 = 30
∴ X = 20 Ω

Question 6.
An unknown resistance is placed in the left gap and resistance of 50 ohms is placed in the right gap of a meter bridge. The null point is obtained at 40 cm from the left end. Determine the unknown resistance.
Solution:
Data : R =50 C in the right gap, lX =40 cm
\(\)
Now, lR = 100 – lX = 100 – 40 = 60 cm
∴ \(\frac{X}{50}=\frac{40}{60}\)
∴ X = 50 × \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{100}{3}\) = 33.33 Ω
This is the unknown resistance.

Question 7.
Two resistances X and Y in the two gaps of a metre bridge give a null point dividing the wire in the ratio 2 : 3. If each resistance is increased by 30 Ω, the new null point divides the wire in the ratio 5 : 6, calculate each resistance.
Solution:
From the data, we have in the first case,
\(\frac{X}{Y}=\frac{l_{X}}{l_{Y}}=\frac{2}{3}\)
∴ 3X = 2Y ……….. (1)
and in the second case, \(\frac{X+30}{Y+30}=\frac{l_{X+30}}{l_{Y+30}}=\frac{5}{6}\)
∴ 6X + 180 = 5Y + 150
∴ 6X – 5Y = -30
∴ 6X = 5Y – 30
∴ 2(3X) = 5Y – 30 …………. (2)
Substituting the value of 3X from Eq. (1) in Eq. (2),
we get,
2(2Y) = 5Y – 30
∴ Y = 30 Ω
∴ X = \(\frac{2}{3}\)Y = 20 Ω

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 8.
In a metre bridge experiment, with a resistance R1 in the left gap and a resistance X in the right gap, the null point is obtained at 40 cm from the left end of the wire. With a resistance R2 in the left gap and the same resistance X in the right gap, the null point is obtained at 50 cm from the left end of the wire. Where will be the null point if R1 and R2 are connected first in series and then in parallel in the left gap, the right gap still containing X?
Solution:
From the data in the example, we have:
When R1 is connected in the left gap and X in the right gap, lR1 = 40 cm, and with R2 in the left gap, lR2 50 cm.
∴ In the first case,
lX = 100 – lR1 = 100 – 40 = 60cm
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 9

(i) When R1 and R2 are connected in series, the effective resistance is
RS = R1 + R2 = \(\frac{2 X}{3}\) + X = \(\frac{5 X}{3}\)
Let the corresponding null point be at a distance l1 from the left end of the wire.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 10

(ii) When R1 and R1 are connected in parallel, the effective resistance is
RP = \(\frac{R_{1} R_{2}}{R_{1}+R_{2}}=\frac{\frac{2 X}{3} \times X}{\frac{2 X}{3}+X}=\frac{2 X}{5}\)
Let the corresponding null point be at a distance l2 Erom the left end of the wire.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 11
With the same resistance X in the right gap, the null points will be at 62.5 cm and 28.6 cm from the left end of the wire for the series and parallel combinations respectively of R1 and R2 in the left gap.

Question 9.
A uniform wire is cut into two pieces such that one piece is twice as long as the other. The two pieces are connected in parallel in the left gap of a metre bridge. When a resistance of 20 Ω is connected in the right gap, the null point is obtained at 60 cm from the right end of the bridge wire. Find the resistance of the wire before it was cut into two pieces.
Solution:
Let Rw be the resistance of the wire before it was cut into two pieces. Let L1, L2 and X1, X2 be the lengths and resistance of the two pieces.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 12
∴ The original resistance of the wire is
Rw = X1 + X2 = 40 + 20 = 60 Ω

Question 10.
Two resistances, 20 Ω and 30 Ω, are connected across the two gaps of a metre bridge as shown in the following figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 13
The bridge wire has diameter 0.5 mm and resistance 2 Ω. The emf of the cell is 2 V. Assume that the internal resistance of the cell is zero. Calculate (I) the resistivity (specific resistance) of the material of the bridge wire (ii) the current provided by the cell when the bridge is balanced.
Solution:
Data: R1 = 20 Ω, R2 = 30 Ω. Ig = 0, R (wire) = 2 Ω,
r (wire) = 0.25 mm = 2.5 x iO m (as the diameter of the wire is 0.5mm), l = 1 m, E = 2V
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 14

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 11.
Two diametrically opposite points of a metal ring are connected to two tenninals of the left gap of a metre bridge. A resistance of 11 Ω is connected in the right gap. If the null point is obtained at 45 cm from the left end, find the resistance of the metal ring.
Solution:
Data: R = 11 Ω, LX = 45 cm
∴ LR = 100 – LX = 100 – 45 = 55cm
Let \(\frac{X}{2}\) be the resistance of each half of the metal ring. Therefore the resistance in the left gap is the effective resistance of the parallel combination of \(\frac{X}{2}\) and \(\frac{X}{2}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 15
The resistance of the metal ring is 36 Ω

Question 12.
In a metre bridge experiment, the resistances R and X are connected in the left and right gap, respectively, and the null point is obtained at 33.7 cm from the left end. When a resistance of 12 Ω is connected in parallel to X, the null point is obtained at 51.9 cm from the left end. Calculate R and X.
Solution:
(1) In the first case,
lR = 33.7 cm, lX = 100 – 33.7 = 66.3 cm
∴ \(\frac{X}{R}=\frac{l_{X}}{l_{R}}=\frac{66.3}{33.7}\) …………….. (1)

(2) In the second case,
lR = 51.9 cm, lX = 100 – 51.9 = 48.1 cm
X’ = X || 12 Ω = \(\frac{12 X}{12+X}\)
∴ \(\frac{X^{\prime}}{R}=\frac{48.1}{51.9}\) ……………. (2)
Dividing Eq. (1) by Eq. (2), we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 16
Then, from Eq. (1),
R = 13.48 × \(\frac{33.7}{66.3}\) = 6.852 Ω

Question 13.
What is the SI unit of potential gradient?
Answer:
The SI unit of potential gradient is the \(\frac{\text { volt }}{\text { metre }}\left(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{m}}\right)\).

Question 14.
Explain how two cells are connected so as to
(i) assist each other
(ii) oppose each other. Write the formulae for the corresponding effective emf.
Answer:
Consider two cells connected so that the positive terminal of the first cell is connected to the negative terminal of the second cell as shown in figure (a). The emf’s of the two cells are added up and the effective emf of the combination of the two cells is E1 + E2. This method of connecting two cells is called the sum method. Here, the cells assist each other.

Consider two cells connected so that their negative terminals are connected together or their positive terminals are connected together as shown in figure (b).

In this case their emf’s oppose each other and the effective emf of the combination of the two cells is E1 – E2(E1 > E2 assumed). This method of connecting two cells is called the difference method.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 17

Question 15.
What is the internal resistance of the cell ?
Answer:
The internal resistance of a cell is the resistance offered by the electrolyte and electrodes in the cell.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 16.
Explain how a potentiometer is used as a voltage divider.
Answer:
A potentiometer can be used as a voltage divider to continuously change the output voltage of a voltage supply. As shown in the below figure, potential difference V is set up between points A and B of a potentiometer wire. One end of a device is connected to positive point A and the other other end is connected to a slider that can move along wire AB. The voltage V divides in proportion of lengths l1 and l2 as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 18
By using the slider we can change the output voltage from 0 to V.

Question 17.
State the precautions which must be taken in using a potentiometer.
Answer:
Precautions to be taken in using a potentiometer:

  1. The potential difference across the potentiometer wire must be greater than the emf or potential difference to be balanced. Hence, in comparing emfs, the driver emf E > E1, E2 (direct method) or E > E1 + E2 (combination method).
  2. The positive terminal of the cell with emf E1 and that with emf E2, or their combination, must be connected to the higher potential terminal of the potentiometer.
  3. The potentiometer wire must be of uniform cross section and homogeneous.
  4. The potentiometer wire should be long and have a high resistivity and low temperature coefficient of resistance.

Question 18.
State the advantages of a potentiometer over a voltmeter.
Answer:
Advantages of a potentiometer over a voltmeter :
(1) The cell, whose emf is being measured, draws no current from the circuit at the null point. Thus, the potentiometer measures the open-circuit potential difference across its terminals, or the emf E. A voltmeter will measure the terminal potential difference, V, of the cell in a closed circuit. This is because the resistance of a voltmeter is high but not infinite and hence the voltmeter is not ideal.

(2) By setting up a suitably small potential gradient along a long potentiometer wire, any small voltage can be measured. Increasing the length of the wire effectively decreases the potential gradient, and increases both the precision and accuracy of measurement.

(3) The adjustment of a potentiometer is a ‘null’ method which does not, in any way, depend on the calibration of the galvanometer. The galvanometer is used only to detect the current, not to measure it. The accuracy of a voltmeter is limited by its calibration.

(4) Since a potentiometer can measure both the emf and terminal potential difference of a cell, the internal resistance of the cell can be found.

19. Solve the following

Question 1.
In a potentiometer circuit. E = 2 V, r = 2 Ω, Rwire = 10 Ω, Rext = 1988 Ω and L = 4 m (in the usual notation). What is the potential gradient along the wire ?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 19
The potential gradient along the wire is 2.5 × 10-3 V/m

Question 2.
A potentiometer wire has length 2 m and resistance 10 Ω. It is connected in series with a resistance 990 Ω and a cell of emf 2 V. Calculate the potential gradient along the wire.
Solution:
Data : L 10 m, R = 10 Ω, Rext = 990 Ω, E =2 V
The current in the circuit is
I = \(\frac{E}{R+R_{\text {ext }}}=\frac{2}{10+990}=\frac{2}{1000}\) = 2 × 10-3 A
The potential difference across the wire is
V = IR = 2 × 10-3 × 10 = 2 × 10-2 V
∴ The potential gradient along the wire
= \(\frac{V}{L}=\frac{2 \times 10^{-2}}{2}\) = 10-2 V/m

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 3.
A potentiometer wire 4 m long has a resistance of 4 Ω. What resistance must be connected in series with the wire and a cell of emf 2 V having internal resistance of 2 Ω to get a potential drop of 10-3 V/cm along the wire?
Solution:
Data: L = 4 m, R = 4 Ω, E = 2 V, r = 2 Ω
The required potential drop per unit length of the wire is
10-4 V/cm = \(\frac{10^{-3} \mathrm{~V}}{10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}}\) = 0.1 V/m
Let RS be the series resistance for which the desired potential drop is obtained.
The current in the circuit is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 20

Question 4.
A potentiometer wire of length 5 m is connected to a battery. For a certain cell having negligible internal resistance, the null point is obtained at 250 cm. If the length of the potentiometer wire is increased by 1 m, where will be the new position of the null point?
Solution:
Data : L1 = 5m, L2 = 6m, l1 = 250 cm
E = (\(\frac{V}{L}\))l
where V/L is the potential gradient and l is the balancing length.
∴ E1= (\(\frac{V}{L_{1}}\))l1 = (\(\frac{V}{L_{2}}\))2
l2 = (\(\frac{L_{2}}{L_{1}}\)) × l1 = \(\frac{6}{5}\) × 250 = 300 cm

Question 5.
A potentiometer wire, of length 4 m and resistance 8 Ω, is connected in series with a battery of emf 2 V and negligible internal resistance. If the emf of the cell balances against a length of 217 cm of the potentiometer wire, find the emf of the cell. When the cell is shunted by a resistance of 15 Ω, the balancing length is reduced by 17 cm. Find the internal resistance of the cell.
Solution:
Data: L = 4 m, R = 8 Ω, E = 2V, r = 0,
R(shunt) = 15 Ω, l = 217 cm = 2.17 m,
l1 = 217 – 17 = 200 cm = 2 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 21

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 6.
Two cells of emf’s E1 and E2 (E1 > E2) are connected in a potentiometer circuit so as to assist each other. The null point is obtained at 8.125 m from the high potential end of the potentiometer wire. When the cell with emf E2 is connected so as to oppose the emf E1, the null point is obtained at 1.25 m from the same end. Compare the emf’s of the two cells.
Solution:
Data : l1 = 8.125 m (cells assisting), l2 = 1.25 m (cells opposing)
E1 + E2 = Kl1 and E1 – E2 = Kl2
where K is the potential gradient.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 22

Question 7.
A cell balances against a length of 200 cm on a potentiometer wire when it is shunted by a resistance of 8 Ω. The balancing length reduces by 40 cm when it is shunted by a resistance of 4 Ω. Calculate the balancing length when the cell is in an open circuit. Also calculate the internal resistance of the cell.
Solution:
Data : Part I : R = 8 Ω, l2 = 200 cm;
Part II : R = 4 Ω, l2 = 160 cm
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 23
This is the balancing length when the cell is in open circuit. The internal resistance of the cell,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 24

Question 8.
When a resistance of 12 Ω is connected across a cell, its terminal potential difference is balanced by 120 cm of a potentiometer wire. When a resistance of 18 Ω is connected across the same cell, the balancing length is 150 cm. Find the balancing length when the cell is in open circuit. Also calculate the internal resistance of the cell.
Solution:
Data : Part I : R = 12 Ω, l2 = 120 cm;
Part II : R = 18 Ω, l2 = 150 cm
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 25
∴ \(\frac{l_{1}-120}{10}=\frac{6\left(l_{1}-150\right)}{50}\)
∴ 5 (l1 – 120) = 6(l1 -150)
∴ 5l1 – 600 = 6l1 – 900
∴ l1 = 300 cm
This is the balancing length when the cell is in open circuit.
∴ r = \(12\left(\frac{l_{1}-120}{120}\right)=\frac{300-120}{10}=\frac{180}{10}\) = 18 Ω
This is the internal resistance of the cell a unit

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 20.
What is a galvanometer?
Answer:
A galvanometer is a device used to detect weak electric currents in a circuit. The current may be of the order of a few microamperes, or even a few nanoamperes.

Question 21.
State the principle of working of a moving coil galvanometer.
Answer:
A current-carrying coil suspended in a magnetic field experiences a torque which rotates the plane of the coil and tends to maximize the magnetic flux through the coil. The torque due to the spring or the suspension fibre to which the coil is attached tends to restore the coil to its initial position. In equilibrium, the coil comes to rest and its deflection is proportional to the current through the coil.

Question 22.
Explain the basic construction of a galvanometer.
Answer:
A galvanometer consists of a coil of a large number of turns of fine insulated copper wire wound on a rectangular nonconducting, nonmagnetic frame. The coil is pivoted (or suspended) between cylindrically concave pole pieces of a horseshoe strong permanent magnet. The coil swings freely around a cylindrical soft iron core fitted between the pole pieces. The deflection of the coil can be read with a pointer attached to it. The position of the pointer on the scale provided depends on the current passing through the galvanometer (or the potential difference across it). A galvanometer can be used as an ammeter or a voltmeter with a suitable modification.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 26
[Note : A table galvanometer has a resistance of about 50 Ω and can carry a current up to about 1 mA.]

Question 23.
What are the modifications necessary to convert a moving-coil galvanometer (MCG) into an ammeter?
Answer:
To convert a moving-coil galvanometer (MCG) into an ammeter, the following modifications are necessary :

  1. The effective current capacity of the MCG must be increased to a desired higher value.
  2. A galvanometer when connected in series with a resistance, should not decrease the current through the resistance. Hence, the effective resistance of the galvanometer must be decreased by connecting an appropriate low resistance across it. An ideal ammeter should have zero resistance.
  3. It must be protected from the damages which are likely to occur due to the passage of an excess electric current.

Question 24.
State the function of the shunt in modifying a galvonometer to an ammeter.
Answer:
Functions of the shunt:

  1. It lowers the effective resistance of the ammeter
  2. It is used to divert to a large part of total current by providing an alternate path and thus it protects the instrument from damage.
  3. With a shunt of proper value, a galvanometer can be modified into an ammeter of practically any desired range.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 25.
Explain how a moving-coil galvanometer is converted into an ammeter. Derive the necessary formula.
Answer:
A moving-coil galvanometer is converted into an ammeter by reducing its effective resistance by connecting a low resistance S across the coil. Such a parallel low resistance is called a shunt since it shunts a part of the current around the coil, shown in below figure. That makes it possible to increase the range of currents over which the meter is useful.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 27
Let I be the maximum current to be measured and Ig the current for which the galvanometer of resistance G shows a full-scale deflection. Then, the shunt resistance S should be such that the remaining current I – Ig = Is is shunted through it.

In the parallel combination, the potential difference across the galvanometer = the potential difference across the shunt
∴ Ig G = Is S
= (I – Ig)S
∴ S = (\(\frac{I_{\mathrm{g}}}{I-I_{\mathrm{g}}}\)) C
This is the required resistance of the shunt. The scale of the galvanometer is then calibrated so as to read the current in ampere or its submultiples (mA. µA) directly.

[Notes :
(1) Thick bars of manganin are used for shunts because manganin has a very small temperature coefficient of resistivity.
(2) The fraction of the current passing through the galvanometer and shunt are, respectively,
\(\frac{I_{g}}{I}=\frac{S}{S+G}\) and \(\frac{I_{g}}{I}=\frac{G}{S+G}\)
(3) On the right hand side of Eq. (1), dividing both the numerator and denominator by Ig, we get,
S = \(\frac{1}{\left(I / I_{\mathrm{g}}\right)-1}\) ∙ G = \(\frac{G}{p-1}\)
where p = I/Ig is the range-multiplying factor, i.e., the current range of the galvanometer can be increased by a factor p by connecting a shunt whose resistance is smaller than the galvanometer resistance by a factor p – 1.
∴ p = \(\frac{G+S}{S}\)
If RA is the resistance of the ammeter,
RA = \(\frac{G S}{G+S}=\frac{G}{p}\)]

Question 26.
How do you calculate the shunt required to increase the range p times?
Answer:
The value of shunt resistance required to convert a galvanometer into an ammeter is given by,
S = (\(\frac{I_{\mathrm{g}}}{I-I_{\mathrm{g}}}\)) G
If the current I is p times the current Ig, then I = pIg. Using this in the above expression, we get,
S = \(\frac{G I_{\mathrm{g}}}{p I_{\mathrm{g}}-I_{\mathrm{g}}}\) OR S = \(\frac{G}{p-1}\)
This is the required shunt resistance to increase the range p times.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 27.
What is the current flowing through the shunt resistance?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 28
If IS is the current through the shunt resistance, then the remaining current (I – IS) will flow through the galvanometer.

Now, the potential difference across the galvanometer = the potential difference across the shunt
∴ G(I – IS) = S IS
∴ GI – GIS = S IS
∴ SIS + GIS = G I
∴ IS = (\(\frac{G}{S+G}\))I
This is the current flowing through the shunt resistance.

Question 28.
What are the modifications required to convert a moving-coil galvanometer into a voltmeter?
Answer:
The modifications required to convert a moving- coil galvanometer into a voltmeter are as follows :

  1. The effective resistance of the galvanometer should be very high. This is because a voltmeter requires a very small current to deflect its pointer. If a larger current than this flows through the voltmeter, the voltmeter is said to load the circuit and it will record a much smaller voltage drop.
  2. The voltage measuring capacity (range) should be increased to a desired value.
  3. It must be protected from damages which are likely to occur due to an excess applied potential difference.

Question 29.
Explain how a moving-coil galvanometer is converted into a voltmeter. Derive the necessary formula.
Answer:
A moving-coil galvanometer is converted into a voltmeter by increasing its effective resistance by connecting a high resistance Rs in series with the galvanometer, shown in figure. The series resistance is also useful for changing the range of any given voltmeter.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 29
Let G be the resistance of the galvanometer coil and Ig the current required for a full-scale deflection.

Let V be the maximum potential difference to be measured. The value of the series resistance RS should be such that when the potential difference applied across the instrument is V, the current through the galvanometer is Ig.

In the series combination, the potential difference V gets divided across the galvanometer (resistance, G) and the resistance RS :
V = IgG + IgRS = Ig(G + RS)
∴ RS = \(\frac{V}{I_{\mathrm{g}}}\) – G
This is the required value of the series resistance. The scale of the galvanometer is then calibrated so as to read the potential difference in volt or its submultiples, e.g., mV, directly.

[Notes :
(1) A series multiplier is made of manganin wire because manganin has a very small temperature coefficient of resistivity.
(2) The maximum potential difference Vg that can be dropped across the galvanometer is Vg = Ig G. Therefore, the above expression for the series resistance may be rewritten as
Rs = \(\frac{V G}{I_{\mathrm{g}} G}\) – G
= \(\frac{V G}{V_{\mathrm{g}}}\) – G = G(p – 1)
where p = V/Vg is the range-multiplying factor, i.e., the voltage range of the galvanometer can be increased by a factor of p by connecting a series resistance which is (p – 1) times the galvanometer resistance.
∴ p = \(\frac{V}{V_{g}}=\frac{\left(R_{\mathrm{S}}+G\right) I_{\mathrm{g}}}{G I_{\mathrm{g}}}=\frac{R_{\mathrm{S}}+G}{G}\)
Since the resistance of the voltmeter is Rv = RS + G,
p = \(\frac{R_{\mathrm{V}}}{G}\)
∴Rv = Gp]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 30.
State the functions of the series resistance in modifying a galvanometer into a voltmeter.
Answer:
Functions of the series, resistance:

  1. It increases the effective resistance of the voltmeter.
  2. It drops off a larger fraction of the measured potential difference thus protecting the sensitive meter movement of the basic galvanometer.
  3. With resistance of proper value, a galvanometer can be modified to a voltmeter of desired range. .

Question 31.
Distinguish between an ammeter and a voltmeter
Answer:

Ammeter

Voltmeter

1. It measures current. 1. It measures potential difference.
2. It is connected in series with a resistance. 2. It is connected in parallel to a resistance.
3. An ammeter should have very low resistance (ideally zero). 3. A voltmeter should have very high resistance (ideally infinite).
4. Its range can be increased by decreasing the value of shunt resistance. 4. Its range can be increased by increasing the value of series resistance.
5. The resistance of an ammeter is RA = 5. The resistance of a voltmeter is Rv = G + Rs = Gp.

32. Solve the following

Question 1.
Calculate the value of the shunt which when connected across a galvanometer of resistance 38 Ω will allow 1/20th of the current to pass through the galvanometer.
Solution:
Data : G = 38 Ω, Ig / I = \(\frac{1}{20}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 30
∴ S + 38 = 20 S
∴ 19 S = 38
∴ S = 2 Ω
This is the required value of the shunt.

Question 2.
A galvanometer is shunted by 1/r of its resistance. Find the fraction of the total current passing through the galvanometer.
Solution:
Let G be the resistance of the galvanometer, I the total current and Ig the current through the galvanometer when it is shunted. The resistance of the shunt is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 31
The fraction \(\frac{1}{1+r}\) of the total current passes through the galvanometer.
[Note : The fraction of the current through the shunt = \(\frac{I_{\mathrm{S}}}{I}=1-\frac{I_{\mathrm{g}}}{I}=\frac{r}{1+r}\)]

Question 3.
A resistance of 3 Ω is connected in parallel to a galvanometer of resistance 297 Ω. Find the fraction of the current passing through the galvanometer.
Solution:
Data : G = 297 Ω, S = 3 Ω
Ig = \(\frac{S}{S+G}\) ∙ I
∴ \(\frac{I_{\mathrm{g}}}{I}=\frac{S}{S+G}=\frac{3}{3+297}=\frac{3}{300}\) = 0.01
This is the fraction of the current through the galvanometer.

[Note: The fraction of the current through the shunt
= \(\frac{I_{\mathrm{S}}}{I}\) = 1 – 0.01 = 0.99]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 4.
The combined resistance of a galvanometer of resistance 1000Ωand its shunt is 25 Ω. Calculate the value of the shunt.
Solution:
Data: G = 1000 Ω, RA =25 Ω
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 32
This is the value of the shunt.

Question 5.
A galvanometer with a coil of resistance 40 Ω gives a full scale deflection for a current of 5 mA. How will you convert it into an ammeter of range 0 – 5 A?
Solution:
Data: G = 40 Ω, Ig = 5 mA = 5 × 10-3 A, I = 5 A
To convert a galvanometer into an ammeter, a shunt (i.e., low resistance in parallel) should be connected with the galvanometer coil. The required shunt resistance,
S = (\(\frac{I_{\mathrm{g}}}{I-I_{\mathrm{g}}}\)) G = (\(\frac{5 \times 10^{-3}}{5-5 \times 10^{-3}}\)) × 40
= \(\frac{200}{4995}\) = 0.04 Ω

Question 6.
A galvanometer has a resistance of 16 Ω and gives a full scale deflection when a current of 20 mA is passed through it. The only shunt resistance available is 0.04 Ω which is not sufficient to convert the galvanometer to an ammeter to measure up to 10 A. What resistance should be connected in series with the coil of the galvanometer so that the range of the ammeter is 10 A ?
Solution:
Data: G =16 Ω, Ig = 20 mA = 0.02 A,
S = 0.04 Ω, I = 10 A
Let X be the resistance to be connected in series with the coil of the galvanometer.
The fraction of the current through the galvanometer is \(\frac{I_{\mathrm{g}}}{I}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 33
\(\frac{I_{\mathrm{g}}}{I}=\frac{S}{(G+X)+S}\)
∴ (G + X) + S = \(\frac{I}{I_{\mathrm{g}}}\) × S = \(\frac{10}{0.02}\) × 0.04 = 20
∴ X = 20 – (16 + 0.04) = 3.96 Ω
Alternate method:
Let G’ = G + X = 16 + X
The range multiplying factor,
p = \(\frac{I}{I_{\mathrm{g}}}=\frac{10}{0.02}\) = 500
Then, S = \(\frac{G^{\prime}}{p-1}\)
∴ G’= 16 + X = S(p – 1)
= 0.04(500 – 1) = 19.96 Ω
∴ X = 19.96 – 16 = 3.96 Ω

Question 7.
A galvanometer of resistance 100 C gives a full scale deflection for a current of 2 mA. How will you use it to measure (i) current up to 2 A (ii) voltage up to 10 V?
Solution:
Data : G = 100 Ω, Ig = 2 mA = 2 × 10-3 A, I = 2 A, V = 10 V
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 34
A resistance of 0.1001 Ωshould be connected in parallel to the coil of the galvanometer to measure current up to 2 A.

(ii) Rs = \(\frac{V}{I_{\mathrm{g}}}\) – G
= \(\frac{10}{2 \times 10^{-3}}\) – 100 = 5000 – 100 = 4900 Ω
A resistance of 4900 Ω should be connected in series with the coil of the galvanometer to measure voltage up to 10 V.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 8.
Calculate the value of resistance needed to convert a moving-coil galvanometer of 60 Ω which gives a full scale deflection for a current of 50 mA into (i) an ammeter of range 0 – 5 A (ii) a voltmeter of range 0 – 50 V.
Solution:
Data : G = 60 Ω, Ig = 50 mA = 5 × 10-2 A, I = 5 A, V = 50 V
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 35
A resistance of 0.6061 Ω should be connected in parallel to the coil of the galvanometer to measure current up to 5 A.

(ii) Rs = \(\frac{V}{I_{\mathrm{g}}}\) – G
= \(\frac{50}{5 \times 10^{-2}}\) – 60
= 1000 – 60 = 940 Ω
A resistance of 940 Ω should be connected in series with the coil of the galvanometer to measure voltage up to 50 V.

Question 9.
A voltmeter of resistance 500 Ω can measure a maximum voltage of 5 V. How can it be made to measure a maximum voltage of 100 V? Solution:
Data : G = 500 Ω, Vg = 5 V, V = 100 V
To increase the range of the voltmeter by a factor p = \(\frac{V}{V_{\mathrm{g}}}\), a resistance R should be connected in series with it.
Rs = G(p – 1) = 500(\(\frac{100}{5}\) – 1) = 9500 Ω

Question 10.
A moving-coil galvanometer of resistance 200 ohms gives a full scale deflection of 100 divisions for a current of 50 milliamperes. How will you convert it into an ammeter to read 2 amperes for 20 divisions?
Solution:
Data : G = 200 Ω, Ig = 50 mA = 50 × 10-3 A
The total number of scale divisions is 100. The ammeter has to read 20 divisions for a current of 2 A. Hence, for 100 divisions, the current must be I = 10 A.

To convert the galvanometer into an ammeter, a shunt must be connected in parallel to the galvanometer coil. The required shunt resistance,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 36

Question 11.
A galvanometer of resistance 50 Ω has a current sensitivity of 5 div/mA. The instrument has 25 divisions. How will you convert it into a voltmeter of range 0 – 50 V ?
Solution:
Data : G = 50 Ω, V = 50 V
For a current of 1 mA, the galvanometer shows a deflection of 5 divisions. Hence, for a full scale deflection (i.e. deflection of 25 divisions), the current passing through the galvanometer should be 5 mA.

∴ Ig = 5mA = 5 × 10-3 A

To convert the galvanometer into a voltmeter, a high resistance must be connected in series with the galvanometer coil. This series multiplier,
Rs = \(\frac{V}{I_{\mathrm{g}}}\) – G = \(\frac{50}{5 \times 10^{-3}}\) – 50
= 9950 Ω

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
For a Wheatstone network shown in the following figure, Ig = 0 when .
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 37
(A) E = 0
(B)VB = VD
(C) VB > VD
(D) VB < VD
Answer:
(B)VB = VD

Question 2.
A potentiometer wire is 100 cm long and a constant potential difference is maintained across it. Two cells are connected in series, first to support one another and then in opposite direction. The balance points are obtained at 50 cm and 10 cm from the positive end of the wire in the two cases. The ratio of emfs is
(A) 5 : 4
(B) 3 : 4
(C) 3 : 2
(D) 5 : 1
Answer:
(C) 3 : 2

Question 3.
When the current in a potentiometer wire decreases, the potential gradient
(A) decreases
(B) increases
(C) remains the same provided the resistance and the length of the wire remain the same
(D) remains the same, irrespective of the resistance . of the wire and its length.
Answer:
(A) decreases

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 4.
In the circuit given below the current through the 6 Ω resistor will be
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 38
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{2}{3}\) A

Question 5.
The accuracy of a potentiometer wire can be increased by
(A) increasing its length
(B) decreasing its length
(C) using a cell of higher emf
(D) using a cell of lower emf.
Answer:
(A) increasing its length

Question 6.
A cell of emf 1.1 V and internal resistance r is connected across an external resistor of resistance R = 10 r. The potential difference across the resistor is
(A) 0.1 V
(B) 0.9 V
(C) 1.0 V
(D) 1.1 V.
Answer:
(C) 1.0 V

Question 7.
When a metal conductor connected in the left gap of a metre bridge is heated, the null point
(A) will shift towards right
(B) will shift towards left
(C) will remain unchanged
(D) will shift towards right or left depending upon the resistivity of the metal.
Answer:
(A) will shift towards right

Question 8.
In using a Wheatstone’s bridge to accurately measure an unknown resistance, a calibrated known variable resistor is varied until
(A) the change in the galvanometer reading is zero
(B) a change in the value of the variable resistor produces no change in the galvanometer reading
(C) the potential difference across the unknown resistance is zero
(D) the potential difference across the galvanometer is zero.
Answer:
(D) the potential difference across the galvanometer is zero.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 9.
In a Wheatstone network, the resistances in cyclic order are P = 10 Ω, Q = 5 Ω, S = 4 Ω and R = 4 Ω. Then, for the bridge to balance,
(A) 5 Ω should be connected in parallel to Q = 5 Ω
(B) 10 Ω should be connected in series with Q = 5 Ω
(C) 5 Ω should be connected in series with P = 10 Ω
(D) 10 Ω should be connected in parallel to P = 10 Ω
Answer:
(D) 10 Ω should be connected in parallel to P = 10 Ω

Question 10.
Two resistors, R1 and R, are connected in the left gap and the right gap of a metre bridge, and the balancing length is obtained at 20 cm from the left. On inter-changing the resistors in the two gaps, the balancing length shifts by
(A) 20 cm
(B) 40 cm
(C) 60 cm
(D) 80 cm.
Answer:
(C) 60 cm

Question 11.
An instrument which can measure terminal potential difference as well as electromotive force (emf) is
(A) Wheatstone’s metre bridge
(B) a voltmeter
(C) a potentiometer
(D) a galvanometer
Answer:
(C) a potentiometer

Question 12.
A 10 m long wire of resistance 2012 is connected in series with a resistance of 10 Ω and a battery of emf 3 V and negligible internal resistance. The potential gradient, in µV / mm, along the wire is
(A) 2
(B) 20
(C) 200
(D) 2000
Answer:
(C) 200

Question 13.
A 10 m long potentiometer wire has a resistance of 20 Ω. If it is connected in series with a resistance of 55 Ω and a cell of emf 4 V and internal resistance 5 Ω, the potential gradient along the wire is
(A) 0.1 V/m
(B) 0.08 V/m
(C) 0.01 V/m
(D) none of these.
Answer:
(A) 0.1 V/m

Question 14.
A potential gradient of 6 × 10-3 V/ mm is set up on a potentiometer wire which has a resistance of 2 Ω/m. Two emfs 2.5 V and 1.3 V, once assisting and then opposing each other, are balanced on the wire. The balancing lengths in the two cases are in the ratio
(A) 19 : 2
(B) 19 : 6
(C) 25 : 13
(D) 2:1.
Answer:
(B) 19 : 6

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 15.
A potentiometer wire, having a resistance of 5 Ω and length 10 m, is connected in series a cell of emf 5 V and an external resistance of 495 Ω. A potential difference of 1.5 mV will balance against a length of
(A) 3 cm
(B) 30 cm
(C) 3 m
(D) none of these.
Answer:
(B) 30 cm

Question 16.
A load resistance R is connected across a cell of emf E and internal resistance r. If the closed-circuit p.d. across the terminals of the cell is V, the internal resistance of the cell is
(A) (E – V) R
(B) (V – E)R
(C) \(\frac{E-V}{V} R\)
(D) \(\frac{E-V}{V}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{E-V}{V} R\)

Question 17.
The open-circuit potential difference across the terminals of a cell balances on 150 cm of a potentiometer wire. When the cell is shunted by a 4.9 Ω resistor, the balancing length reduces to 147 cm. The internal resistance of the cell is
(A) 0.01 Ω
(B) 0.05 Ω
(C) 0.1 Ω
(D) 1 Ω
Answer:
(C) 0.1 Ω

Question 18.
To convert a galvanometer into an ammeter
(A) a high resistance is connected in parallel to the galvanometer
(B) a high resistance is connected in series with the galvanometer
(C) a low resistance is connected in parallel to the galvanometer
(D) a low resistance value is connected in series with the galvanometer.
Answer:
(C) a low resistance is connected in parallel to the galvanometer

Question 19.
To convert a galvanometer into a voltmeter
(A) a high resistance is connected in parallel to the galvanometer
(B) a high resistance is connected in series with the galvanometer
(C) a low resistance is connected in parallel to the galvonometer
(D) a low resistance is connected in series with the galvonometer.
Answer:
(B) a high resistance is connected in series with the galvanometer

Question 20.
An ideal ammeter has
(A) a moderate resistance
(B) a high resistance
(C) an infinite resistance
(D) zero resistance
Answer:
(D) zero resistance

Question 21.
An ideal voltmeter has
(A) a low resistance
(B) a high resistance
(C) an infinite resistance
(D) zero resistance
Answer:
(C) an infinite resistance

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 22.
The fraction of the total current passing through the galvanometer is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 39
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{S}{S+G}\)

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Small Scale Industry and Business

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Organisation of Commerce and Management 11th Textbook Solutions Chapter 3 Small Scale Industry and Business Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Organisation of Commerce and Management Solutions Chapter 3 Small Scale Industry and Business

1. (A) Select the Correct option and rewrite the sentence

Question 1.
The problem of ……………….. is becoming more serious in India.
(a) employment
(b) unemployment
(c) pollution
Answer:
(b) unemployment

Question 2.
India is ………………… abundant country.
(a) labour
(b) money
(c) material
Answer:
(a) labour

Question 3.
…………….. cost of power acquisition, frequent power cuts, irregular supply of power affect the productivity of SSI.
(a) Higher
(b) Lower
(c) Average
Answer:
(a) Higher

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Small Scale Industry and Business

Question 4.
Before setting up business, it is essential to study prevailing ………………. environment.
(a) business
(b) natural
(c) political
Answer:
(a) business

Question 5.
Small Scale Business are ………………… intensive.
(a) money
(b) power
(c) labour
Answer:
(c) labour

Question 6.
Occurring obscured idea in mind of entrepreneur is ……………….. stage of establishing business.
(a) first
(b) second
(c) third
Answer:
(a) first

Question 7.
Small scale industries contribute nearly ……………….. to the industrial exports of the country.
(a) 40%
(b) 60%
(c) 20%
Answer:
(a) 40%

1. (B) Match the pairs

Group A Group B
(a) Micro Manufacturing Sector (1) Handloom
(b) Traditional Small Scale business (2) Unskilled
(c) Registration (3) Does not exceed Rs. 25 lakhs
(d) Labour (4) 40% of exports of India
(e) Bicycle Parts (5) Does not exceed Rs. 1 lakhs
(6) DIC
(7) Marketing Problem
(8) Modern Small Scale business
(9) Project Appraisal
(10) Cost-efficiency

Answer:

Group A Group B
(a) Micro Manufacturing Sector (3) Does not exceed Rs. 25 lakhs
(b) Traditional Small Scale business (1) Handloom
(c) Registration (6) DIC
(d) Labour (2) Unskilled
(e) Bicycle Parts (8) Modern Small Scale business

1. (C) Give one word/phrase/term

Question 1.
A sector which is back bone of rural India.
Answer:
Small Scale Sector

Question 2.
An industry using power with less than 50 employees.
Answer:
Small Scale Industry

1. (D) State True or False

Question 1.
Small Scale industries should be developed in order to maintain, economic balance in a country.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Majority Small Scale Industry uses advanced technology.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Small Scale Industry and Business

Question 3.
Small business easily get access to low interest rates.
Answer:
False

Question 4.
Small business cannot survive in the competition.
Answer:
True

1. (E) Find the odd one

Question 1.
Coir, Handicraft, Spare Parts, Hand-loom
Answer:
Spare Parts

Question 2.
Bicycle Parts, Sericulture, Electronic Appliances, Sewing Machine
Answer:
Sericulture

1. (F) Complete the sentences

Question 1.
…………….. industries plays an important role in developing countries.
Answer:
Small Scale

Question 2.
SSI is …………….. largest industry which creates huge employment opportunities.
Answer:
second

Question 3.
SSI enjoys the advantage of ……………… cost of the produce.
Answer:
low

Question 4.
SSI are ……………… intensive.
Answer:
labour

Question 5.
SSI requires ………………….. capital as compared to large scale industries.
Answer:
less

Question 6.
SSI produces consumer goods as well as …………………. components.
Answer:
industrial

1. (G) Select the correct option

(Small Manufacturing Sector, Micro Manufacturing Sector, Micro Services Sector, Medium Manufacturing Sector, Small Services Sector)

Group A Group B
(1) More than Rs 25 lakhs but does not exceed Rs 5 Crores —————-
(2) —————- Does not exceed Rs 25 lakhs
(3) More than Rs 5 crores but does not exceed Rs 10 crores —————
(4) —————- Does not exceed Rs 10 lakhs
(5) More than Rs 10 lakhs but does not exceed Rs 2 crores —————-

Answer:

Group A Group B
(1) More than Rs 25 lakhs but does not exceed Rs 5 Crores Small Manufacturing sector
(2) Micro Manufacturing sector Does not exceed Rs 25 lakhs
(3) More than Rs 5 crores but does not exceed Rs 10 crores Medium Manufacturing sector
(4) Micro Services Sector Does not exceed Rs 10 lakhs
(5) More than Rs 10 lakhs but does not exceed Rs 2 crores Small Services Sector

1. (H) Answer in one sentences

Question 1.
What is SSI?
Answer:
Traditionally the industries in India which are organised on a Small Scale and produces goods with the help of machines, labour and power are considered as Small Scale Industries.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Small Scale Industry and Business

Question 2.
State the example of Traditional Small Scale Industry.
Answer:
Hand-loom, Handicraft, Coir, Sericulture, Khadi and Village Industries are the examples of Traditional Small Scale Industries.

Question 3.
Give examples of Modern Small Scale Industry.
Answer:
Bicycle Parts, Sewing Machines, Blades, Razors, Electric Appliances, Spare Parts are examples of Modern Small Scale Industries.

1. (I) Correct the underlined word and rewrite the following sentences.

Question 1.
The problem of employment has been becoming more serious in India.
Answer:
The problem of unemployment has been becoming more serious in India.

Question 2.
India is material abundant country.
Answer:
India is labour abundant country.

Question 3.
Small scale Industry uses advanced technology.
Answer:
Small scale Industry uses outdated technology.

Question 4.
SSI begin with large amount of capital.
Answer:
SSI begin with small amount of capital.

Question 5.
Business proposal is the first step in setting up of a small scale business.
Answer:
Decision of Business area is the first step in setting up of a small scale business.

1. (J) Arrange in proper order.

(a) Selection of a place
(b) Selection of a product
(c) Business proposal
(d) Selection of technology
Answer:
(a) Selection of a product
(b) Selection of a place
(c) Selection of technology
(d) Business proposal

2. Explain the following terms/concepts.

Question 1.
Small Scale Industry.
Answer:
Any Industrial Unit is regarded as Small Scale Industry, if the following condition is satisfied.
“Investment in fixed assets like plant and equipment either held on ownership terms or on lease or hire purchase should not be more than Rupees one crore. However, the unit in no way can be owned or controlled or auxiliary for any other industrial unit.”

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Small Scale Industry and Business

Question 2.
Service Sector.
Answer:
According to MSMED on the basis of investment Micro Service Sector ‘does not exceed Rs 10 lakhs’, Small Service Sector, ‘more than 10 lakhs but does not exceed 2 crores’ and Medium Service Sector ‘more than Rs 2 crores but does not exceed Rs 5 crores’.

Question 3.
Micro Small Scale Business.
Answer:
Micro small scale business is classified as Manufacturing sector and Services Sector. According to MSMED, Micro Manufacturing sector does not exceed Rs 25 lakhs and Micro Services sector does not exceed Rs 10 lakhs.

Question 4.
Traditional Industrial Sector.
Answer:
Small Scale Industries are further classified as Traditional Small Scale Industries and Modern Small Scale Industries. Handloom, Handicraft, Coir, Sericulture, Khadi and Village Industries are the examples of traditional SSI Industries.

Question 5.
Modern Industrial Sector.
Answer:
Small Scale Industries are further classified as Traditional Small Scale Industries and Modern Small Scale Industries. Bicycle Parts, Sewing Machines, Blades, Razors, Electric Appliances, Spare Parts are the examples of Modern Small Scale Industries.

3. Study the following case/situation and express your opinion.

1. Mr. Ram wants to start Small Scale business of manufacturing parts of bicycle or machinery.

Question 1.
Identify the first step or stage of setting up his Small Scale business.
Answer:
Ram has to first decide whether the setup will be corporation, proprietorship or partnership. He has to identify his strength and weaknesses which can help him to decide what type of business would be most suitable. He has to study the amount of capital requirement needed to start his business. Once he gets the idea of total capital requirement he can decide what type of business to start.

Question 2.
State the different ways of raising the capital for his business.
Answer:
If Ram decides to start as proprietorship than he has to raise all the capital by himself. He can get it from his own savings or borrow money form bank, financial institutions. He can also study the different government schemes and raise capital through those schemes.

If Ram decides to start partnership firm than he will have to find a person who is ready to invest in his partnership firm as well as he has knowledge about manufacturing parts of bicycle. They can raise capital by investing their savings, borrowing through financial institutions and friends. They can also take help from various government schemes and institutions set-up to help SSI.

If Ram decides to start corporation i.e. Pvt. Ltd. Company than he can raise capital by issuing equity shares privately. He has to sell the shares to his friends and relatives. He can also study of various government schemes and raise capital through those schemes. Ram can also borrow money from bank, financial institutes, etc. He can also accept deposits from public in the further stage of his business.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Small Scale Industry and Business

Question 3.
‘Marketing is a necessary step of running a business.’ Comment on it.
Answer:
Goods are ultimately manufactured for consumers. There is competition among many manufacturers and traders to sale goods in the market.
Without selling the goods, manufacturer cannot earn profit. Profit is main motto of business.

To sale goods in market, advertising and publicity is required. To make your brand image in market, advertising with quality of goods is required. Branded goods are easily sold in the market. Marketing can be done through many ways like TV, Radio, Bill Boards, Internet, Websites, Salesman, etc.
Thus, marketing is a necessary step of running a business.

4. Answer in brief.

Question 1.
State any four points of importance of Small Scale Industry/Business.
Answer:
Importance of Small Scale Industry:
Job Opportunities
Regional Balance
Maximum use of Natural Resources
Reduces Migration

1. Job Opportunities : SSI is second largest industry which creates huge employment opportunities, because it can be operated with minimum amount of capital. SSI can be run with basic and potential skills. This is a boost for a labour surplus country like India.

2. Regional Balance : In India, all regions are not developed due to lack of industrialization. SSI can be setup with minimum amount of capital. Small industries manufactures product using simple technologies, local available resources, material and labour. Thus, they contribute significantly to the balanced development of the country.

3. Maximum use of Natural Resources : Small scale industries are labour intensive. They utilize available natural resources and raw materials from local areas. Such use of local natural resources minimizes the cost of production which result into reasonable price of goods.

4. Reduces Migration : Small Scale industries can create a large number of employment in rural area. SSI is also a best example of self-employment. Therefore, migration of people from rural to urban can be reduced or minimized.

Question 2.
Write any four advantages of Small Scale Industry.
Answer:
Advantages of Small Scale Industries:
1. Large Employment
2. Less Capital Requirement
3. Contribution to Export
4. Opportunities for Entrepreneurship

1. Large Employment: Small Scale Industries has huge potential to create employment opportunities. They are labour intensive and use more labour than other factors of production. Their gestation period is also low and can provide employment opportunities to large number of people.

2. Less Capital Requirement : SSI requires less capital as compared to large scale industries. SSI can be started by small entrepreneurs with limited capital resources.

3. Contribution to Export : Nearly 40% of the industrial exports are contributed by SSI. Product such as hosiery, knitwear, gems and jewellery, handicraft, coir products, woolen garments, processed food, chemical and allied products and a large number of engineering goods contribute substantially to India’s exports. Products produced by SSI are used in the manufacturing of products by large scale industries which are exported. It contributes directly and indirectly to exports and helps to earn valuable foreign exchange.

4. Opportunities for Entrepreneurship : Small Scale Industries provide opportunities for entrepreneurs with limited capital as it requires less capital and lower investment in technology and machines as compared to large scale enterprises. Therefore, small entrepreneurs can start small scale industries easily.

Question 3.
State any four challenges before Small Scale Industries.
Answer:
Challenges before Small scale industries:

  1. Inadequate Finance
  2. Problem of Raw Material
  3. Labour Problem
  4. Marketing Problem

1. Inadequate Finance : SSI generally begins with a small amount of capital. Many of the units in the small sector raise funds from capital market. These units frequently suffer from lack of adequate working capital.

2. Problem of Raw Material : Another major problem of Small Scale Industries is inadequate supply of raw materials. Due to that SSI have to compromise on the quantity and quality of raw material, or pay more, price for good quality of raw material.

3. Labour Problem : Small industries generally appoint unskilled and semi skilled worker on daily wages, This creates the problem of low labour productivity, higher absenteeism and poor job commitment. The wages are low due to financial limitations. This leads to labour dissatisfaction and increase the problem of labour turnover. Improper shifts and lack of job security makes employment in small industries unattractive and the talented work force does not opt for such job.

4. Marketing Problem : Marketing is a weaker part of small industries. SSI have to depend excessively on middlemen who at times exploit them by paying low prices and delayed payments. Further, direct marketing may not be feasible for small business firms as they lack the necessary infrastructure.

5. Justify the following statements.

Question 1.
Generally Small Scale Industries are sick.
Answer:

  1. There are many problems faced by Small Scale Industries. These problems may be internal problems or external problems.
  2. Internal Problems are like unskilled labour or untrained labour, lack of managerial skills and marketing skills, lack of modernisation, etc.
  3. External problems like shortage of working capital, inadequate loans, delayed payments, shortage of raw material, etc.
  4. According to RBI a sick unit is that which has incurred a cash loss for one year, is likely to continue it for current year as well as following year.
  5. Thus, mainly due to financial problem, industrial units are unable to sustain themselves and are called as sick units.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Small Scale Industry and Business

Question 2.
Small Scale Industry require less amount of capital.
Answer:

  1. The production of Small Scale Industries is less.
  2. General unskilled labours are employed.
  3. As production is less raw material requirement is also less.
  4. In a place like India, where capital formation is low, small business is suitable.
  5. Due to small in size, such form of business can easily adapt to changing atmosphere. This promotes flexibility. It can easily change their working style without much loss as compared to large businesses.
  6. Thus, SSI requires less amount of capital.

Question 3.
Small Scale Industries have problems.
Answer:
Small scale industries have to face many problems:

  1. Lack of Adequate Finance : Due to small scale of production and sale, Banks and Financial Institutions are afraid to give loans.
  2. Problem of Raw material : Due to inadequate finance they cannot purchase raw material at a time. Thus, the cost of raw material increases.
  3. Labour Problem : Due to inadequate finance, they cannot employ skilled labour which affects the production.
  4. Marketing Problem: The goods manufactured if not marketed properly can be risky as it will affect the sales,
  5. Problem of Transport: Transportation cost increases the cost of the product which hampers the sale as large scale industries cost may be less.
  6. Sickness : Due to financial problem industrial units are unable to sustain themselves and finally turn to sick units.
  7. Thus, Small Scale Industries have problems

6. Attempt the following.

Question 1.
Explain the meaning of Small Scale Industries.
Answer:
Small Scale Industries are those industries where fixed assets i.e. plant and machinery which is owned or hired or taken on lease basis, does not exceed more than one crore.

MSMED has classified Small Scale Industries into Manufacturing sector and Services sector, and further into three categories of business i.e. Micro business, Small business and Medium business.
Subsequently over a period of time, a new definition was introduced by MSMED Act, 2006 (Micro Small and Medium Enterprises Development) is as follows
(A) Manufacturing Enterprises:

  1. A micro enterprise, where the investment in plant and machinery is less than Rs 25 lakh.
  2. A small enterprise, where the investment is more than Rs 25 lakh but less than Rs 5 crore.
  3. A medium enterprise, where the investment in plant and machinery is more than Rs 5 crore but less than Rs 10 crore.

(B) Service Enterprises:

  1. A micro enterprise, where the investment in equipment is less than Rs 10 lakh.
  2. A small enterprise, where the investment in equipment is more than Rs 10 lakh but less than Rs 2 crores.
  3. A mediuiri enterprise where the investment in equipment is more than Rs 2 crore but less than Rs 5 crores.
  4. An industrial unit can be categorised as small business if it fulfills the above capital investment criteria.

Question 2.
State importance of small business.
Answer:
Following are the importance of Small Business:
(i) Supply of Raw Materials to Large Industries : Finished goods of Small Scale Industries is raw material – for large scale industries. E.g., head lights supplied to automobile industries. Small Scale Industries supply raw materials to large scale industries and they get easy market available to their product.

(ii) Balanced Development between Rural and Urban Areas : With the help of locally available raw materials and labour, more and more Small Scale Business can be started in rural areas. This helps to reduced regional imbalance between urban and rural areas.

(iii) Opportunities to Young Generation : Young generations by using their creative skills make product unique in the market. Small scale business gives an opportunity to youngster to show their creativity and abilities to prove themselves and achieve success in development.

(iv) Large Employment : India is second largest populated country after China, which faced problem of unskilled and semi skilled labour. Small Scale Industries operate with more labour and less capital, which can accommodate more man power to solve employment problem.

(v) Utilisation of Domestic Resources : Small farmers can start their own unit of small industry by using locally available raw materials. He can get self employment and involve his family members too.

Question 3.
Explain in brief the impact of capital, on Small Scale industries.
Answer:
Major problem faced by small scale industries is insufficient capital, which creates following difficulties with them.
(i) Borrowings of Capital from Landlords and Money Lenders : Nationalised and Co-operative banks are not ready to finance Small Scale Industries without security. Thus, they are forced to borrow from money lenders, where they have to pay very high rate of interest.

(ii) Storage of Raw material: Small Scale Industries are agro based. Raw material is available seasonally. To stock goods they required huge finance. Due to lack of finance, they run industry only in seasons.

(iii) Lack of Skilled Labour : Only unskilled and semi skilled labourer are available. Small Scale Industries cannot afford labour cost of skilled labourer which affect quality and quantity of production and profitability.

(iv) Outdated technology : Due to insufficient capital, production methods used by SSI are old, which results in poor quality and quantity of output.

(v) Weaker Marketing Skill : In todays world marketing plays an important role. Rural area is facing marketing problem due to lack of facilities and knowledge and they are exploited by middlemen too.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Small Scale Industry and Business

Question 4.
State the problem faced by Small Scale industries.
OR
Explain in detail the challenges faced by Small Scale Industries.
Answer:
Problems faced by Small Scale Industries:
(i) Outdated Technology : Traditional methods of productions are used due to lack of finance and knowledge about latest technology. This results in poor quality of production with low output.

(ii) Problems of Infrastructure: Problems of infrastructure faced by small business are power cuts, improper transport facility, problem like congestions, bottlenecks, strikes, rise in freight charges, inadequate space, bad repair of premises, unsuitable location, high rent, etc. These problems definitely affects smooth working of small business.

(iii) Underutilization of Capacity : Small Scale Industries cannot utilize optimum resources and capacity due to lack of marketing skills, lack of demand, etc. This lead to increase the cost of product and wastage of resources.

(iv) Lack of Capital: Nationalised and Co-operative banks are not ready to provide finance without securities. Owners of Small Scale Industries don’t have any option other than borrowings funds from landlords and money lenders where they have to pay very high rate of interest.

(v) Problem of Skilled Labourers : Mostly unskilled and semi skilled labourers are available to Small Scale Industries as they cannot afford the wages to highly skilled labourer. This affect quality and quantity of output which result in less price for sales.

Question 5.
Explain the role of Small Scale Industries in employment generation.
Answer:
Small Scale Industries play very important role in generation of employment as follows:

  1. Small Scale Industries are Labour Intensive : There is shortage of capital with small scale industries. They are labour intensive. They use more man power than machines, they creates more opportunities for rural employment.
  2. Employment to Unskilled and Semiskilled Labourer : Small Scale Industries are using old and traditional method of production where they need unskilled and semi-skilled labourer.
  3. Employment of Rural Land Less Labourer : Small Scale Industries are set-up in rural areas. They provide employment to local labourers. They have potential to create opportunities to large scale employment to mass population in villages.
  4. Decrease in Migration of Labourers : Migration means movement of labourers from village to city in search of job. Due to increase in small scale industries in village areas migration of labour is reduced. Labourers are getting good employment at their own villages.

7. Answer the following

Question 1.
Explain the challenges before Small business.
Answer:
Small scale business are playing very important role in development of developing countries. They faced following challenges / difficulties:
(i) Problems of Marketing : Small business organizations depend excessively on middlemen who many times exploit them by paying low price and delayed payment. Further direct marketing may not be possible for them as they lack necessary infrastructure. Major marketing problem are lack of advertising, non-branding of products, poor quality, transportation problem, local difficulties, competition, etc.

(ii) Infrastructural Problem : Problems of infrastructure faced by small business are power cuts, improper transport facility, problem like traffic congestions, bottlenecks, strikes, rise in freight charges, inadequate space, bad repair of premises, unsuitable location, high rent, etc. These problems definitely affects smooth working of small business.

(iii) Credit and Finance : Lack of finance is the major problem faced by small business. Artisans or Craftsmen running cottage industry take credits from mahajans or traders who charge large amount of interest from them. For small scale industries, institutional source of finance (e.g. banks) is also available, but the funds allocated to this sector are inadequate.

(iv) Delayed Payment: They face problem of delayed payment by large firms and Government departments.

(v) Sickness Problem: According to RBI a sick unit is that which has incurred a cash loss for one year, is likely to continue it for current year as well as following years and unit has an imbalance in financial structure. Sickness is generally seen in small business industries like cotton, jute, sugar, textile, etc. Internal causes of sickness are lack of skill labour, faulty planning, problem of recovery, etc. External causes of sickness are shortage of capital, inadequate loans, shortage of raw material, etc. However, rehabilitation of sick unit is a costly affair.

(vi) Personal Problems : Personal problems like spending long hours to work and less time with family and the rewards have not been favourable.

(vii) Shortage of Raw Material : Shortage of raw material often take place due to reasons like natural calamities, transport problem, industrial strikes, poor quality of raw material, exploitation done by traders, etc. Traders or agents who supply raw material often exploit the owner by charging higher prices. They also insist on buying finished products at lower rate. Thus, small business owners are subject to double exploitation.

(viii) Outdated Technology : Use of low-grade technical know-how and skills have resulted in low productivity in small business industries. Many units in small business make use of primitive methods of production, this leads to increase in cost of production, whereas productivity is low. Small units often do not care about the changing tastes and fashions of customers.

(ix) Underutilization of Capacity : Small business units cannot utilize optimum resources and capacity due to lack of marketing skills, lack of demand, they work below full capacity, etc. This lead to increase the cost and wastage of resources.

(x) Labour Problem : It includes highly demanding employees, absenteeism, lack of skilled workers and transportation of workers, strikes, high wage rates, inefficiency, etc.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Small Scale Industry and Business

Question 2.
Write down the benefits or advantages of small business.
Answer:
Small scale business plays very important role in the economic development of the country.
The following are the benefits or advantages of small business:
(i) Cost Savings : Small scale business used micro production method which results into quality product at low cost of production. Production cost of small business is much more less compared to large scale industries due to low cost of operation.

(ii) Adaptability : Small scale business can change themselves as per the market requirement. They can change product, line of product as per market changes, like fashions, new product, demand, etc.

(iii) Limited Capital : As small business is labour intensive they requires very small amount of capital for plant and equipments.

(iv) Low Gestation Period : To start a new business requires very short period as compared to large scale industries. Small scale business can start production of good in very short period of time and can increase the scale of production.

Labour Intensive : Small business units use less machines and more labours. Absorption of local labour helps to solve problem of absolute poverty and control inequality of income.

(vi) Opportunities to Rural Youth : New generation youth has smart creativity. With available technology and raw materials, rural youth can start their own business unit. Small business unit plays very important role in developing countries.

(vii) Upliftment of Economy : Majority of small scale business used traditional method of productions. Rural craftsman and artisans do have their own talents and skills which they have learnt from their forefathers. Such products are very much demanded in market which results in high income.

(viii) Decentralised Economy : Small scale business prevents concentration of economic power in the few hands. Income is divided equally among large number of people.

(ix) Export Earning : Small business contributes remarkable to country’s export. 40% of India’s exports are contributed by small business like textiles, handicraft, handloom, embroidery, etc.

(x) Regional Balance : There is wide gap between urban and rural India. Small scale business helps to reduce gap between developed and underdeveloped or developing areas.

Question 3.
Explain the process of establishment of Small Scale Industries.
Answer:
In todays world, youth are more attracted towards business opportunities rather than employment.
To start a small scale industries following stages to be followed:
(i) Idea to Setup a Business : This is a first step to start a small scale industry. The prospective entrepreneur with his own capacity decide the sized and type of business like sole proprietorship, partnership or corporation.

(ii) Analysis of Business Surrounding : It is necessary to understand different business surrounding and policies before starting any business. They are competitors, legal, economical, industrial, technological, etc.

(iii) Choice of Product : Entrepreneurs has to decide his sector of production i.e. Manufacturing or Service sector. After doing market survey and understanding advantages and disadvantages one should decide line of product or services.

(iv) Location for Business : Entrepreneur has to select location to start business. It plays very important role in success of business while selecting location many factors are to be taken into consideration like availability of labour, raw materials, power supply, transportation, etc.

(v) Technology Selection : An entrepreneur has to select available and suitable technology for his business. He should select technology he is familiar to use.

(vi) Project Appraisal : It means the study and assessment of a project. One should study the project very carefully from the point of view regards to economy, finance, marketing and profitability.

(vii) Capital Requirement : The entrepreneur has to plan for capital requirement and sources available for capital. It can be self finance, loan from relatives or banks.

(viii) Incorporation / Registration : It is compulsory for every small scale industry to registered with the respective Government Authorities. A printed application form is available with District Industries Centre (DIC). Entrepreneur has to duly filled the information with his signature in the form and submit to DIC.

(ix) Implementation of Resources : After registration of business entrepreneur has to start with production process:

  • Financial Resources : The entrepreneur has to collect finance and make necessary arrangement for capital.
  • Factor Set up : The entrepreneurs has to allocate space for various operations, purchase of machinery and tools and installation of it.
  • Electric power and water supply : The entrepreneur has to calculate total electric power requirement in KW (Kilowatt) and get connection from the authority and supply for water connection.
  • Appointment of staff : Small scale industries are labour, intensive. One has to appoint unskilled and semi-skilled staff as per requirement to start production.

(x) Manufacturing and Selling of Product : After assembling all financial and physical resources goods are manufactured and send to market for sale. Advertising and publicity plays very important role in marketing and selling of product.

(xi) Customer’s Feedback : Customer satisfaction is very important in business. Regular feedback from customers is helping to make qualitative changes in product.

Question 4.
Explain the importance of small business.
Answer:
Following are the importance of Small Business:
(i) Supply of Raw Materials to Large Industries : Finished goods of Small Scale Industries is raw material – for large scale industries. E.g., head lights supplied to automobile industries. Small Scale Industries supply raw materials to large scale industries and they get easy market available to their product.

(ii) Balanced Development between Rural and Urban Areas : With the help of locally available raw materials and labour, more and more Small Scale Business can be started in rural areas. This helps to reduced regional imbalance between urban and rural areas.

(iii) Opportunities to Young Generation : Young generations by using their creative skills make product unique in the market. Small scale business gives an opportunity to youngster to show their creativity and abilities to prove themselves and achieve success in development.

(iv) Large Employment : India is second largest populated country after China, which faced problem of unskilled and semi skilled labour. Small Scale Industries operate with more labour and less capital, which can accommodate more man power to solve employment problem.

(v) Utilisation of Domestic Resources : Small farmers can start their own unit of small industry by using locally available raw materials. He can get self employment and involve his family members too.

Question 5.
It is clear that the absence of capital and raw material is the main reason for the short term sickness. Explain it.
Answer:
Industrial sickness means the industry which has financial losses over period of time. Short term sickness is a temporary phenomenon.
Followings are the main capital and raw material reasons for short term sickness:
Financial / Capital:
(i) Non availability of Finance from Banks : Nationalised and Co-operative banks are not ready to finance SSI as there is less possibility of recovery of loans. Banks demand securities against loans, which is difficult to arrange for the small businessman.

(ii) Loans from Money lenders : As bank finance is difficult to raise, small businessman borrow capital from money lenders who charged very high rate of interest.

(iii) Shortage of Working Capital : Majority of small scale industries are depend on local source of raw material which is seasonal. They have to buy large quantity of raw materials to be used through out the years which needs large finance.

(iv) Unawareness of various Government Schemes : Due to lack of awareness among the owners of SSI about various Government Scheme for capital marketing, subsidies, etc. suffer capital problems.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Small Scale Industry and Business

Raw Material:
(i) Local source of raw material : Majority of small scale industries are depends on local supply of raw materials. Local suppliers of raw materials make artificial scarcity for supply of raw materials which make increase in product cost for the businessman.

(ii) Seasonal supply of raw materials : Small scale industries are using local supply of raw materials. The supply of raw material is seasonal. They don’t have huge capital to stock large quantity of raw materials due to this they have to stop production of goods after season ends and face problem of short term sickness.

(iii) Shortage of raw material : There may be short supply of raw materials due to natural calamities, transport strike, etc. affect the running of small scale industries.

(iv) Poor quality of raw material : There is no grading or standardizing of raw materials supply to small scale industry. This affect product quality and quantity.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 1.
What is the magnetic effect of electric current?
Answer:
An electric current produces a magnetic field around it. This phenomenon is known as the magnetic effect of electric current. It was discovered by Hans Christian Oersted.

It was Ampere who first speculated that all magnetic effects are attributable to electric charges in motion (electric current). It takes a moving electric charge to produce a magnetic field, and it takes another moving electric charge to “feel” a magnetic field.

[Note : Hans Christian Oersted (1777-1851), Danish physicist, discovered electromagnetism in 1820. The oersted, the CGS unit of magnetic field strength, is named after him.]

Question 2.
Describe the magnetic field near a current in a long, straight wire. State the expression for the magnetic induction near a straight infinitely long current-carrying wire.
Answer:
Suppose a point P is at a distance a from a straight, infinitely long, wire carrying a current I, as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 1
It can be shown that the magnitude of the total magnetic induction at P is given by the expression
B = \(\left(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{2 I}{a}\)
That is, the magnitude B is inversely proportional to the distance from the wire. Because of the axial symmetry about the straight wire, the magnetic induction has the same magnitude B at all points on a circle in a transverse plane and centred on the conductor; the direction of \(\vec{B}\) is everywhere tangential to such a circle. Thus, the magnetic field lines around the current in the straight wire is a family of circles centred on the wire. The magnitude of the field B depends only on the current and the perpendicular distance a of the point from the wire.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 3.
Explain the use of right hand grip rule to give the direction of magnetic field in the vicinity of a straight current-carrying conductor.
OR
State the right hand rule for the direction of the magnetic field due to a straight current-carrying wire.
Answer:
Right hand [grip] rule : If a straight current-carrying wire is grasped by the right hand, so that the extended thumb points in the direction of the current, the direction of the magnetic induction is the same as the direction of the fingers which are curled around the wire.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 2

Question 4.
State the factors which the magnetic force on a charge depends upon. Hence state the expression for the Lorentz force on a charge due to an electric field as well as a magnetic field.
Hence discuss the magnetic force on a charged particle which is
(i) moving parallel to the magnetic field
(ii) stationary.
Answer:
A charge q moving with a velocity \(\vec{v}\) through a magnetic field of induction \(\vec{B}\) experiences a magnetic force perpendicular both to \(\vec{B}\) and \(\vec{v}\) . Experimental observations show that the magnitude of the force is proportional to the magnitude of \(\vec{B}\), the speed of the particle, the charge q and the sine of the angle θ between \(\vec{v}\) and \(\vec{B}\). That is, the magnetic force, Fm = qvB sin θ
∴ Fm = q(\(\vec{v}\) × \(\vec{B}\))
Therefore, at every instant \(\vec{F}_{\mathrm{m}}\) acts in a direction perpendicular to the plane of \(\vec{v}\) and \(\vec{B}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 3
If the moving charge is negative, the direction of the force \(\vec{F}_{\mathrm{m}}\) acting on it is opposite to that given by the right-handed screw rule for the cross-product \(\vec{v}\) × \(\vec{B}\).

If the charged particle moves through a region of space where both electric and magnetic fields are present, both fields exert forces on the particle.

The force due to the electric field \(\vec{E}\) is \(\vec{F}_{\mathrm{e}}=q \vec{E}\).

The total force on a moving charge in electric and magnetic fields is called the Lorentz force :
\(\vec{F}=\vec{F}_{\mathrm{e}}+\vec{F}_{\mathrm{m}}=q(\vec{E}+\vec{v} \times \vec{B})\)
Special cases :
(i) \(\vec{v}\) is parallel or antiparallel to \(\vec{B}\): In this case, Fm = qvB sin 0° = 0. That is, the magnetic force on the charge is zero.
(ii) The charge is stationary (v = 0) : In this case, even if q ≠ 0 and B ≠ 0, Fm = q(0)B sin θ = 0. That is, the magnetic force on a stationary charge is zero.

Question 5.
Explain why the magnetic force on a charged particle cannot change the linear speed and the kinetic energy of the particle.
OR
One implication of the Lorentz force law is that magnetic force does no work. Justify.
Answer:
The magnetic force on a particle carrying a charge q and moving with a velocity \(\vec{v}\) in a magnetic field of induction \(\vec{B}\) is \(\vec{F}_{\mathrm{m}}=q \vec{v} \times \vec{B}\). At every instant, \(\vec{F}_{\mathrm{m}}\) is perpendicular to the linear velocity \(\vec{v}\), and \(\vec{B}\). Therefore, a non-zero magnetic force may change the direction of the velocity and the dot product
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 4
But \(\vec{F}_{\mathrm{m}} \cdot \vec{v}\) is the power, i.e., the time rate of doing work. Hence, the work done by the magnetic force in every short displacement of the particle is zero. The work done by a force produces a change in kinetic energy. Zero work means no change in kinetic energy. Thus, although the magnetic force changes the direction of the velocity \(\vec{v}\), it cannot change the linear speed and the kinetic energy of the particle.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 6.
Define the SI unit of magnetic induction from Lorentz force.
Answer:
The SI unit of magnetic induction is the tesla.
We can define the unit from the velocity-dependent part of the Lorentz force that acts on a charge in motion parallel to a magnetic field.

Definition : The magnitude of magnetic induction is said to be 1 tesla when a charge of 1 coulomb experiences a force of 1 N when it moves at 1 m/s in a magnetic field in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the field.

1 tesla (T) = 1 N’s/Gm = 1 N/A-m.
[Notes : (1) Since the ampere and not the coulomb is the fundamental unit, the tesla is defined from the expression for the force on a current-carrying conductor in a magnetic field when placed perpendicular to the direction of the field (see Unit 10.5, Q. 29): The magnitude of magnetic induction is said to be 1 tesla when a conductor of length 1 metre and carrying a current of 1 ampere experiences a force oflN when it is placed with its length perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic field. (2) The unit is named after Nikola Tesla (1870 -1943), Croatia-born US electrical engineer, inventor of the AC induction motor.]

Question 7.
Name a non-SI unit of magnetic induction. State its relation to the SI unit of magnetic induction.
Answer:
A CGS unit of magnetic induction of historical interest is the gauss, symbol G. However, since the magnetic flux and the magnetic flux density (magnetic induction, B) are defined by similar equations in the CGS system and the SI, this non-SI unit is accepted for use with SI.

1 G = 10-4 T

[Note : The unit gauss is named after Karl Friedrich Gauss (1777 -1855), German mathematician, who strongly promoted in 1832 the use of the French decimal or metric system, with the metre and the kilogram and the astronomical second, as a coherent system of units for physical sciences. Gauss was the first to make absolute measurements of the Earth’s magnetic field in terms of a decimal system based on the three mechanical units millimetre, gram and second for, respectively, the quantities length, mass and time.]

Question 8.
Explain cyclotron motion and cyclotron formula.
Answer:
Suppose a particle of mass m and charge q enters a region of uniform magnetic field of induction \(\vec{B}\). In below figure, \(\vec{B}\) points into the page. The magnetic force \(\vec{F}_{\mathrm{m}}\) on the particle is always perpendicular to the velocity of the particle, \(\vec{v}\). Assuming the charged particle started moving in a plane perpendicular to \(\vec{B}\), its motion in the magnetic field is a uniform circular motion, with the magnetic force providing the centripetal acceleration.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 5
where p = mv is the linear momentum of the particle. Equation (1) is known as the cyclotron formula because it describes the motion of a particle in a cyclotron-the first of the modern particle accelerators.

Question 9.
Explain the condition under which a charged particle will travel through a uniform magnetic field in a helical path.
OR
Describe the general motion of charged particle in a uniform magnetic field.
Answer:
Suppose a particle of mass m and charge q starts in a region of uniform magnetic field of induction \(\vec{B}\) with a velocity \(\vec{v}\) which has a non-zero component v|| in the direction of \(\vec{B}\), From below figure. The magnetic force \(\vec{F}_{\mathrm{m}}\) on the particle is always perpendicular to \(\vec{v}\) and provides a centripetal acceleration such that
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 6
The parallel component of the motion \(\vec{v}_{\|}\) is unaffected by the magnetic field, so that the motion of the particle is a composite motion: an UCM with speed v -the speed perpendicular to \(\vec{B}\) and a translation with a constant speed v||. Therefore, the particle moves in a helix. Thus, the perpendicular component v determines the radius of the helix while the parallel component v|| determines the pitch x of the helix, i.e., the distance between adjacent turns. x = v||/ T.

[Notes : (1) At non-relativistic speeds (v much less than the speed of light), the period T is independent of the speed of the particle. For all particles with the same charge-to-mass ratio (q/ m), faster particles move in larger circles than the slower ones, but all take the same time T to complete one revolution. (2) Looking in the direction of \(\vec{B}\), a positive charge always revolves anticlockwise, and a negative charge always clockwise.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 10.
State under what conditions will a charged particle moving through a uniform magnetic field travel in
(i) a straight line
(ii) a circular path
(iii) a helical path.
Ans.
(i) A charged particle travels undeviated through a magnetic field \(\vec{B}\), if its velocity \(\vec{v}\) is parallel or antiparallel to \(\vec{B}\). In this case, the magnetic force on the charge is zero.
(ii) A charged particle travels in a circular path within a magnetic field \(\vec{B}\), if its velocity \(\vec{v}\) is perpendicular to \(\vec{B}\).
(iii) A charged particle travels in a helical path through a magnetic field \(\vec{B}\), if its velocity \(\vec{v}\) is inclined at an angle θ to \(\vec{B}\), 0 < θ < 90°. In this case, the component of \(\vec{v}\) parallel to \(\vec{B}\) is unaffected by the magnetic field. The radius and pitch of the helix are determined respectively by the perpendicular and parallel components of \(\vec{v}\).

Question 11.
A particle of charge q enters a region of uniform magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) (pointing into the page). The field deflects the particle a distance d above the original line of flight, as shown in below figure. Is the charge positive or negative ? Find the momentum of the particle in terms of a, d, B and q.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 7
Answer:
Since \(\vec{v} \times \vec{B}\) points upward, and that is also the direction of the magnetic force \(\vec{F}_{\mathrm{m}}\), q must be positive.
Using the Pythagorean theorem to find R in terms of a and d,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 8
[Note: A similar solved question in the textbook, Example 10.2, is wrong. The acceleration qvB/m is the centripetal acceleration whose magnitude remains constant but direction changes continuously. Hence, it cannot be used in a kinematical equation to calculate s. The final expression for p arrived at in the textbook is therefore not correct.]

Question 12.
An ion of mass re and charge q is accelerated from rest through a potential difference V and enters a region of uniform magnetic field of induction B. Within the region, the ion moves in a semidrcle and strikes a photographic plate which lies along the diameter of the semicircle at a distance D from the point of entry. Show that the mass of the ion is given by m = \(k \frac{q D^{2} B^{2}}{V}\)
Answer:
Consider positive ions of charge q and mass m accelerated from rest to a speed r’ by an accelerating potential V. Then, the kinetic energy of the ions is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 9
On entering a region of uniform magnetic field of induction B (see above figure for reference), the Ions travel in a semicircular path in a plane normal to the field with a radius
R = \(\frac{m v}{q B}\)
∴ m2v2 = q2B2R2 ………….. (2)
From Eq. (1) m2v2 = 2qVm ………….. (3)
Equating the right hand sides of Eqs. (2) and (3),
2qVm = q2B2R2
∴ m = \(\frac{q B^{2} R^{2}}{2 V}\)
Since R = \(\frac{D}{2}\),
m = \(\frac{q B^{2} D^{2}}{8 V}\) = k\(\frac{q B^{2} D^{2}}{V}\)
where k = \(\frac{1}{8}\), Equation (4) Is the required expression.

[Note : This is especially the working of a mass spectrometer which Is used to measure the mass of an ion. A mass spectrometer is so sensitive it is used to measure isotopic masses. If the isotopes of an element carry the same charge, they acquire the same energy when accelerator through the same pd. But within the magnetic field, they travel in different semicircles depending on their masses and strike a detector or photographic plate at different D.]

Question 13.
A particle of charge q and momentum p enters a region of uniform magnetic field B travelling at right angles to the field, and is deflected through a right angle as shown. Obtain an expression for the length of the particle’s path In terms of q, p and B.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 10
Answer:
A particle of charge q and momentum p enters a region of uniform magnetic field B travelling at right angles to the field. Within the field, the particle travels in a circular path of radius
R = \(\frac{p}{q B}\) ………. (1)
From the diagram, the length s of the particle’s path in the field is one quarter of the circumference,
∴ s = \(\frac{2 \pi R}{4}=\frac{\pi}{2} \frac{p}{q B}\) ………….. (2)
This is the required expression.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 14.
What is a cyclotron? State its principle of working.
Answer:
A cyclotron is a cyclic magnetic resonance accelerator in which an alternating potential difference of a few kV is used to accelerate light positive ions such as protons, deuterons, α-particles, etc., but not electrons, to very high energies of the order of a few MeV. It was developed by E. O. Lawrence and M. S. Livingston in 1932.

Principle: The cyclotron employs the principle of synchronous acceleration to accelerate charged particles which describe a spiral path at right angles to a constant magnetic field and make multiple passes through the same alternating p.d., whose frequency is the same as the frequency of revolution of the particles. .

Question 15.
Describe the construction of the cyclotron with a neat labelled diagram.
Answer:
Construction of the cyclotron: Two hollow D-shaped chambers that are open at their straight edges form the electrodes. They are called the dees. The dees are separated by a small gap, as shown in below figure, and a high-frequency (106 Hz to 107 Hz) alternating p.d. (of the order of 104 V to 105 V) is applied between them. The whole system is placed in an evacuated chamber between the poles of a large and strong electromagnet (B ≡ ≅ 1 T to 2T).

The ions to be accelerated are produced in an ion source; a hydrogen tube gives protons, heavy hydrogen or deuterium gives deuterons while helium gives x-particles, etc. The positive ions are injected near the centre and are accelerated each time they
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 11
cross the gap between the does. At the edge of one of the does, an electrostatic deflector deflects the spiralling particles out of the system to strike a target.

Question 16.
Explain the working of the cyclotron with a neat labelled diagram.
Answer:
The dees of the cyclotron are separated by a small gap and a high-frequency alternating p.d. is applied between them. Light positive ions are injected into the system near the centre.

Suppose a positive ion of charge q and mass m is injected when D1 is positive and D2 is negative. The positive ion will accelerate towards D2. Inside the dees there is no electric field. Hence, inside D2 it has a constant speed v. The magnetic force of magnitude qvB makes it move in a semicircular path through D2. The radius r of its orbit is given by equating the centripetal force to the magnetic force.

Let t be the time spent by the ion to describe the semicircular path.

If t is also half the period of oscillation T of the alternating p.d., the ion will be in resonance with the electric field in the gap. That is, the ion will emerge from D2 at the instant D1 becomes negative and will be accelerated towards D1. As the ion gains speed in the gap, its path in D1 has greater radius. This process repeats after every half cycle of the alternating p.d. and the ion is accelerated each time it crosses the gap between the dees.

The radius of the path of the charged particles increases proportionately with their speed, the period of revolution remains constant.

After a large number of revolutions, the ion reaches the edge of the system where a negatively charged electrostatic deflector plate deflects it out of the system towards the target.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 17.
State the functions of the electric and magnetic fields in a cyclotron.
Answer:
The function of the electric field in the gap between the dees of a cyclotron is to accelerate the positively charged particles while that of the magnetic field in the dees is to deflect the particles in semicircular paths so that they return to the gap in a fixed time interval to reuse the alternating electric field.

Question 18.
Show that for a given positive ion species in a cyclotron,
(i) the radius of their circular path inside a dee is directly proportional to their speed
(ii) the time spent in a dee (or the cyclotron frequency or the magnetic resonance frequency) is independent of the radius of their path and speed
(iii) the maximum ion energy obtainableis directly proportional to the square of the magnetic induction.
Answer:
Consider positive ions of charge q and mass m injected in a cyclotron. In the electric-field-free region inside a dee, the ions are acted upon only by the uniform magnetic field. Hence, inside a dee the ions travel in a semicircular path with a constant speed y, in a plane normal to the field. If B is the induction of the magnetic field, the magnetic force of magnitude qvB provides the centripetal force.
∴\(\frac{m v^{2}}{r}\) = qvB
∴ r = \(\frac{m v}{q B}\) …………. (1)
Thus, for given q, m and B,
r ∝ v
If t be the time spent in a dee by the ion to describe a semicircular path of radius r,
t = \(\frac{\pi r}{v}=\frac{\pi}{v} \times \frac{m v}{q B}\)
∴ t = \(\frac{\pi m}{q B}\) …………. (2)
Thus, t is independent of r and y, i.e., it takes the ions exactly the same time t to travel the semicircular paths inside the dees irrespective of the radius of the path and the speed of the ions so long a the mass in is constant. This is the critical characteristic of operation of the cyclotron.

The periodic time of an ion in its circular path is
T = 2t = \(\frac{2 \pi m}{q B}\) ………….. (3)

The frequency of revolution,
f = \(\frac{1}{T}=\frac{q B}{2 \pi m}\) …………. (4)
is called the cyclotron frequency or the magnetic resonance frequency. The frequency is independent of r and y for a given ion species and remains constant so long as the mass m is constant.

If R is the maximum radius of the path, the same as the radius of the dee, just before the ions are deflected out of the accelerator,
Vmax = \(\frac{q B R}{m}\) …………. (5)
so that KEmax = \(\frac{q^{2} B^{2} R^{2}}{2 m}\) (in joule)
= \(\frac{q^{2} B^{2} R^{2}}{2 e m}\) (in eV) …………… (6)
Thus, for a given ion species and dees of given radius,
KEmax ∝ B2

Question 19.
What is meant by cyclotron frequency?
Answer:
The cyclotron frequency, or the magnetic resonance frequency, is the frequency of revolution of a charged particle of charge per unit mass \(\frac{q}{m}\) in a magnetic field of induction B inside a cyclotron. The cyclotron frequency, f = \(\frac{q B}{2 \pi m}\). The frequency of the alternating voltage applied to the dees of the cyclotron should be equal to the cyclotron frequency.

Question 20.
What is resonance condition in a cyclotron ?
OR
What should be the frequency of the alternating voltage applied between the dees of a cyclotron?
Answer:
The frequency of the alternating voltage between the dees of a cyclotron should be equal to the cyclotron frequency so that a positive ion exiting a dee always sees an accelerating potential difference to the other dee. This equality of the frequencies is called the resonance condition.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 21.
State any two limitations of a cyclotron.
Answer:
Limitations of a cyclotron :

  1. It cannot be used to accelerate electrons. Because electrons have a very small mass, they quickly achieve relativistic speeds, i.e., speeds at which their mass increases significantly with increase in speed. Then they cannot remain synchronous with the alternating electric field between the dees.
  2. For higher energies, with a given magnetic field strength, the exit radius and thus the dees must be large. It is difficult to produce a uniform magnetic field over a large area.
  3. Even protons, deuterons, a-particles, etc., cannot be accelerated to very high energy, say of the order of 500 MeV, using a cyclotron with a fixed cyclotron frequency.
  4. No particle accelerator can accelerate uncharged particles, such as neutrons.

Question 22.
Does the time spent by a charged particle inside a dee of a cyclotron depend upon its speed and the radius of its path ? Why ?
Answer:
The time spent by a charged particle to describe a semicircular path of radius r inside a dee of a cyclotron is independent of the radius of the path and the speed v so long as the mass m of the particle is constant. This is true for any charged particle of mass m and carrying a charge q, and is the critical characteristic of operation of the cyclotron.
r = \(\frac{m v}{q B}\)
So that the time spent in a dee,
t = \(\frac{\pi r}{v}=\frac{\pi}{v} \times \frac{m v}{q B}=\frac{\pi m}{q B}\)
which is independent of r and v.

Question 23.
The frequency of revolution of the charged particles in a cyclotron does not depend upon their speed. Why?
Answer:
The time t spent by a charged particle, of mass m and carrying a charge q, inside a dee of a cyclotron is independent of the radius of the path and the speed of the particle so long as m is constant. Then, the periodic time of the charged particle in its nearly circular path is T = 2t, and the frequency of revolution,
f = \(\frac{1}{T}=\frac{1}{2 t}=\frac{q B}{2 \pi m}\)
are also independent of the radius and the speed.

Question 24.
What are the factors on which the cyclotron frequency depends?
Answer:
The cyclotron frequency depends upon

  1. the magnetic induction and
  2. the specific charge (the ratio charge/mass) of the charged particles.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 25.
What are the factors on which the maximum kinetic energy acquired by a charged particle in the cyclotron depends?
Answer:
The maximum kinetic energy acquired by a charged particle in the cyclotron depends upon

  1. the magnetic induction
  2. the specific charge (the ratio charge/mass) of the charged particles and
  3. the radius of the dees.

Question 26.
In a certain cyclotron, the cyclotron frequency for acceleration of protons is 108 Hz. What will be its value if the magnetic induction is doubled ?
Answer:
As the cyclotron frequency is directly proportional to the magnetic induction, the new frequency will be 2 × 108 Hz. .

27. Solve the following :

Question 1.
An alpha particle (carrying a positive charge q = 3.2 × 10-19 C) enters a region of uniform magnetic field of induction \(\vec{B}=(0.5 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}-\hat{\mathrm{k}})\) T with a velocity \(\vec{v}=(4 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+4 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}})\) × 102 m/s. What is the force \(\vec{F}\) on the alpha particle?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 12

Question 2.
The magnetic field and electric field in a region in space are \(\vec{B}=B \hat{\mathrm{i}}\) and \(\vec{E}=E \hat{\mathrm{i}}\). A particle of charge q moves into the region with velocity \(\vec{v}=v \hat{\mathrm{j}}\). Find the magnitude and direction of the Lorentz force on the charged particle if q = 1 C,B = 1 T,E = 3 V/m and v = 4 m/s,
Solution:
Data : q = 1 C, B = 1 T, E = 3 V/m, v = 4 m/s
The Lorentz force on the charged particle is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 13
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 14

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 3.
An electron is accelerated from rest through 86 V and then enters a region of uniform magnetic induction of magnitude 1.5 T. What is the maximum value of the magnetic force the electron can experience?
[me = 9.11 × 10-31 kg, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C]
Solution:
Data : V= 86 V, B = 1.5 T, me = 9.11 × 10-31 kg, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
Since the electron is accelerated from rest, the kinetic energy acquired by it is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 15
The maximum value of the magnetic force on the electron is
Fm = evB
= (1.6 × 10-19 C) (5.496 × 106 m/s) (1.5 T)
= 1.319 × 10-12 N or 1.319 pN

Question 4.
A cosmic ray proton enters the Earth’s magnetic field in a direction perpendicular to the field. If the speed of the proton is 2 × 107 m/s and B = 1.6 × 10-6 T, find the force exerted on the proton by the magnetic field. [Charge on a proton, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C]
Solution :
Data : v = 2 × 107 m/s, B = 1.6 × 10-6 T, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
The magnetic force on the proton is
Fm = evB (∵ \(\vec{v} \perp \vec{B}\))
= (1.6 × 10-19 C)(2 × 107 m/s)(1.6 × 10-6 T)
= 5.12 × 10-18 N

[Note : The Earth’s magnetic field traps the charged particles in doughnut-shaped regions outside the atmosphere. These regions are called Van Allen radiation belts. Near the poles, charged particles from these belts enter the atmosphere and produce the awesome shimmering curtains of light called the aurora borealis (northern ! lights) and aurora australis (southern lights).]

Question 5.
A charged particle moves with velocity 3 × 106 m/s at right angles to a uniform magnetic field of induction 0.005 T. Find the magnitude of the charge if the particle experiences a force of 2 × 10-2 N.
Solution:
Data : v = 3 × 106 m/s, B = 5 × 10-3 T,
Fm = 2 × 10-2 N
Fm = qvB (∵ \(\vec{v} \perp \vec{B}\))
∴ The charge on the particle,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 16

Question 6.
An electron in a TV picture tube moves horizontally with a speed 2 × 107 m/s. It is deflected upward by a horizontal magnetic field of induction 10-3 T. Find the magnitude of the force acting on the electron due to the action of the magnetic field.
Solution:
Data : e = 1.6 × 10-19 C, v = 2 × 107 m/s,
B = 10-3 T
The magnitude of the magnetic force,
Fm = evB (∵ \(\vec{v} \perp \vec{B}\))
= (1.6 × 10-19 C)(2 × 107 m/s) (10-3 T)
= 3.2 × 10-15 N = 3.2 fN

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 7.
The first practical cyclotron developed by Lawrence and Livingston in 1932 had dees of radius 12 cm and produced protons of about 1 MeV energy.
Calculate (i) the applied magnetic induction
(ii) the frequency of the accelerating electric field.
[mp = 1.67 × 10-27 kg, q = 1.6 × 10-19 C
Solution:
Data: R = 0.12 m, mp = 1.67 × 10-27 kg,
q = 1.6 × 10-19 C,
KEmax = 1 MeV =(1 × 106)(1.6 × 10-19)
= 1.6 × 10-13 J
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 17

Question 8.
In a cyclotron, for the same B and R, show that the maximum kinetic energy of α-particles is twice that of deuterons.
Solution:
Data: Let Eα and Ed denote the maximum kinetic energies of α-particIes (He++ ions) and deuterons
(D+ ions). For an α-partic1e,
q = +2e and m ≅ 4mp and for a deuteron,
q = +e and m ≅ 2mp
where e is the elementary charge and mp is the proton mass.
In a cyclotron, the maximum kinetic energy of the ions obtainable with dec radius R and magnetic field induction B is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 18

Question 28.
Derive an expression for the magnetic force experienced by a straight current-carrying conductor placed in a uniform magnetic field.
Discuss the cases when the force is maximum and minimum.
State the expressions for the force experienced by a current-carrying
(i) conductor of arbitrary shape
(ii) closed circuit (conducting loop).
Answer:
Consider a straight current-carrying conductor placed in a region of uniform magnetic field of induction \(\vec{B}\) pointing out of the page, as shown in below figure by the evenly placed dots. Let the length of the conductor inside the field be l and the current in it be I.

In metallic conductors, electrons are the charge carriers. The direction of conventional current is, however, taken to be that of flow of positive charge which is opposite to the electron current.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 19
Let dq be the positive charge passing through an element of the conductor of length dl in time dt.
\(\overrightarrow{d l}\) has the same direction as that of the current.
Then, I = \(\overrightarrow{d l}\)/dt ………….. (1)
and drift velocity,\(\overrightarrow{v_{\mathrm{d}}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{d l}\)/dt ……….. (2)
The magnetic force on the charge dq is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 20
The charge dq is constrained to remain within the conductor. Hence, the conductor itself experiences this force. The force on the entire part of the conductor within the region of the magnetic field is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 21
Case 1 : When the conductor is parallel to the magnetic field, \(\vec{l}\) is parallel or antiparallel to \(\vec{B}\) according as the current is in the direction of \(\vec{B}\) or opposite to it; then θ = 0° or θ = 180°, so that sin θ = 0. Hence, in either of these two cases, F = 0.

Case 2 : The maximum value of the force is Fmax = IlB, when sin θ = 1, that is, when the conductor lies at right angles to \(\vec{B}\) (θ = 90°).
(i) For a current-carrying wire of arbitrary shape in a uniform field,
\(\vec{F}=\int \vec{f}_{\mathrm{m}}=I\left(\int \overrightarrow{d l}\right) \times \vec{B}\) …………. (5)
(ii) For a current-carrying conducting loop (closed circuit) in a uniform field,
\(\vec{F}=\int \vec{f}_{\mathrm{m}}=I(\oint \overrightarrow{d l} \times \vec{B})\) ………….. (6)
But for a closed loop of arbitrary shape, the integral is zero.
∴ \(\vec{F}\) = 0
[Notes : (1) While the direction of \(\vec{F}\) can be found from the cross product of \(\vec{l}\) and \(\vec{B}\), there is a handy rule due to Sir John Ambrose Fleming (1849-1945), British physicist and electrical engineer.

Fleming’s left hand rule : If the forefinger and the middle finger of the left hand are stretched out to point in the directions of the magnetic field and the current, respectively, then the outstretched thumb indicates the direction of the magnetic force on the current-carrying straight conductor, from below figure.]
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 22
(2) Equation (3) is usually used to define the unit of magnetic field induction, the tesla. See the note to Q. 6. (3) B cannot be taken out of the integral in Eq. (6).]

Question 29.
A straight conductor of length 0.5 m and carrying a current of 2 A is placed in a magnetic field of induction 2 Wb/m2 at right angles to the length of the conductor. What is the magnetic force on the conductor?
Answer:
F = IlB
= (2A) (0.5m) (2 Wb/m2)
= 2 N is the force on the conductor.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 30.
A rectangular loop of wire hanging vertically with one end in a uniform magnetic field \(\vec{B}\), supports a small block of mass m. \(\vec{B}\) points into the page in the shaded region of below figure. For what current I in the loop would the magnetic force exactly balance the downward gravitational force?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 23
Answer:
The magnetic force on the horizontal segment of the loop inside the field must be upward to balance the downward gravitational force. With \(\vec{B}\) pointing into the page, the current in that segment must be toward the right so that \(\vec{F}=\vec{L} \times \vec{B}\) on that segment points upward. That is, the current in the loop must be clockwise.
Taking L = a, F = IaB
∴ IaB = mg
∴ I = \(\frac{m g}{a B}\)
is the required expression for the current.

Question 31.
Explain with a neat labelled diagram how the magnetic forces on a current loop produce rotary motion as in an electric motor.
Answer:
Consider a current-carrying rectangular loop ABCD, within a uniform magnetic field \frac{m g}{a B}, from below figure. Lead wires and commutator are not shown for simplicity. The coil is free to rotate about a fixed axis. Suppose the sides AB and CD are perpendicular to the field direction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 24
The magnetic force on each segment act at the centre of mass of that segment. The direction of the force on each segment can be found using the right hand rule for the cross product or from Fleming’s left hand rule.

The magnetic forces on the short sides AD and CB are, in general, equal in magnitude, opposite in direction and have the same line of action along the rotation axis. Hence, these forces cancel out and does not produce any torque. The magnetic forces on the long sides AB and CD are also equal in magnitude and opposite in direction but their lines of action are different. Hence, these forces constitute a couple and tend to rotate the coil about the central axis.

A commutator (not shown) reverses the direction of the current through the loop every half-revolution so that the torque always acts in the same direction.

Question 32.
Derive an expression for the net torque on a rectangular current-carrying loop placed in a uniform magnetic field with its rotation axis
perpendicular to the field.
Answer:
Consider a rectangular loop ABCD of length l, breadth b and carrying a current I, placed in a uniform magnetic field of induction \(\vec{B}\) with its rotation axis perpendicular to \(\vec{B}\), from figure (a). To define the orientation of the loop in the magnetic field, we use a normal vector \(\hat{n}\) that is perpendicular to the plane of the loop. The direction of \(\hat{n}\) is given by a right hand rule: If the fingers of right hand are curled in the direction of current in the loop, the outstretched thumb is the direction of \(\hat{n}\). Suppose the normal vector \(\hat{n}\) of the loop makes an arbitrary angle with \(\vec{B}\), as shown in figure (b).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 25
In the side view, Fig. 10.15 (b), the sides CD, DA, AB and BC have been labelled as 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively. In this view, the current in side 1 (CD) is out of the page as shown by a ⊙ while that in side 3 (AB) is into the page shown by a ⊗.

For side 2 (AD) and side 4 (BC), the length of the conductor \(|\vec{L}|\) = b and the angle between \(\vec{L}\) and \(\vec{B}\) is (90° – θ). Hence, the forces on sides 2 and 4 are equal in magnitude :

F2 = F4 = IbB sin(90° – θ) = IbB cosθ

However, \(\vec{F}_{2}\) is directed out of the page while \(\vec{F}_{4}\) is into, and because their common line of action is through the centre of the loop, their net torque is zero. For side 1 (CD) and side 3 (AB), \(|\vec{L}|\) = I and \(\vec{L}\) is perpendicular to \(\vec{B}\). Hence, the forces \(\vec{F}_{1}\), and F\(\vec{F}_{3}\) have the same magnitude : F1 = F3 = IlB

But their lines of action being different, they constitute a couple.

Moment arm of the couple = b sin θ
∴ Torque exerted by the couple = force of the couple x moment arm of couple
∴ τ = (IlB)(b sin θ)
in the clockwise sense in figure (b). The torque tends to rotate the loop so as to align its normal vector h with the direction of the magnetic field.
∴ τ = I(lb)B sin θ = MB sinθ
where A = lb is the area of the loop. For a rectangular coil of N turns in place of a single-turn loop,
τ = NIAB sin θ
This is the required expression for the net torque. The torque has maximum magnitude for θ = 90°, that is when \(\hat{n}\) is perpendicular to \(\vec{B}\) or, in other words, the plane of the coil is parallel to the field.
τmax = NIAB

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 33.
Describe the construction of a suspended-type moving-coil galvanometer with a neat labelled diagram.
Answer:
A permanent fixed-magnet, suspended-type moving-coil galvanometer is shown in below figure. It consists of a coil of a large number of turns of fine insulated copper wire wound on a rectangular, nonconducting, non-magnetic frame. The coil is suspended between the cylindrically concave pole pieces of a horseshoe permanent magnet by a fine phosphor-bronze wire F from an adjustable screw- head. The other terminal of the coil is connected to a loosely-wound wire helix H. The coil swings freely around a cylindrical soft-iron core CS fitted between the pole pieces.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 26
The suspension F and the helix H serve as the two current leads to the coil. The suspension fibre also provides the restoring torque when the coil is rotated from its normal position. The cylindrically concave pole pieces together with the soft-iron core make the magnetic field radial in the annular region in which the vertical sides of the coil move. The soft-iron core also concentrates the magnetic field (i.e., increases the magnetic induction) in the annular region.

The angle of deflection is observed with a beam of light reflected from a small mirror M fixed to the suspension fibre. The reflected beam is observed on a ground-glass scale arranged about a metre from the instrument, the light beam serving as a weightless pointer.

[Note : The diagram given in the textbook (Fig. 10.13) has serious errors, notably, the missing suspension fibre by which the coil is hung. The metal fibre (made of phosphor bronze), which bears the weight of the coil, is also the current lead to the coil and provides the restoring torque. The Tower suspension shown in the textbook is actually a loose wire which merely provides an exit lead to the current but does not exert any torque on the coil.]

Question 34.
State the principle of working of a moving- coil galvanometer (suspended-coil type).
Answer:
Principle : A current-carrying coil suspended in a magnetic field experiences a torque which rotates the plane of the coil and tends to maximize the magnetic flux through the coil.

The deflection of the coil in a moving-coil gal-vanometer is linearly related to the current through it and, therefore, can be used to measure current in terms of the deflection.

Question. 35.
With the help of neat diagrams, describe the working of a moving-coil galvanometer.
Answer:
Consider a rectangular coil-of length Z, breadth b and N turns – carrying a current I suspended in a uniform magnetic field of induction \(\vec{B}\).

The magnetic forces on the horizontal sides of the coil have the same line of action and do not exert any torque. The magnetic forces on the vertical sides constitute a couple and exert a deflecting torque. If the plane of the coil is parallel to \(\vec{B}\), the magnitude of the deflecting torque is maximum equal to
τd = NIAB …………… (1)
where A = lb is the area of each turn of the coil. This torque rotates the coil.

In a moving-coil galvanometer, the coil swings in a radial magnetic field produced by the combination of the cylindrically concave pole pieces and the soft-iron core. Hence, the plane of the coil is always parallel to the field lines, as shown in Fig. 10.18. Therefore, the deflecting torque is constant and maximum as given by Eq. (1).

The rotation of the coil twists the suspension fibre which exerts a restoring torque on the coil. The restoring torque is proportional to the angle of twist θ.
τr = Cθ …………… (2)
where C is the torque constant, i.e., torque per unit angle of twist. C depends on the dimensions and the elasticity of the suspension fibre.

The coil eventually comes to rest in the position where the restoring torque equals the deflecting torque in magnitude. Therefore, in the equilibrium position,
τr = τd
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 27
since N, A, B and C are constant. Thus, the deflection of the coil is directly proportional to the current in it.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 36.
A coil suspended freely in a radial magnetic field rotates through 30° when a current of 30 /(A is passed through it. Through what angle will it rotate if the current is doubled and the magnetic induction is halved?
Answer:
The angle of rotation, θ ∝ IB (in the usual notation)
As I2B2 = (2I1)\(\left(\frac{B_{1}}{2}\right)\) = I1B1, the angle of rotation will be the same, i.e., 30°.

Question 37.
What is the advantage of a radial magnetic field in a moving-coil galvanometer and how is it produced?
Answer:

  1. Advantage of radial magnetic field in a moving- coil galvanometer:
    • As the coil rotates, its plane is always parallel to the field. That way, the deflecting torque is always a maximum depending only on the current in the coil, but not on the position of the coil.
    • The restoring torque is proportional to the deflection so that a radial field makes the deflection proportional to the current. The instrument then has a linear scale, i.e., the divisions of the scale are evenly spaced. This makes it particularly straight forward to calibrate and to read.
  2. Producing radial magnetic field :
    • The pole pieces of the permanent magnet are made cylindrically concave, concentric with the axis of the coil.
    • A soft iron cylinder is centred between the pole pieces so that it forms a narrow cylindrical gap in which the sides of the coil can move. Together, they produce a radial magnetic, field; that is, the magnetic lines of force in the gap are along radii to the central axis.

Question 38.
What will happen if the magnetic field in a moving-coil galvanometer is not radial?
Answer:
Suppose the magnetic field is uniform but not radial. Then, when the coil comes to rest after rotation through an angle θ, NIAB cos θ = Cθ (in usual notations).
∴ I ∝ \(\frac{\theta}{\cos \theta}\)
as N, A, B and C are constants in a particular case. Thus, the current is not directly proportional to the deflection. Hence, we cannot have a linear scale for measurement.

Question 39.
Explain the use of a soft iron core in a moving- coil galvanometer.
Answer:
In a moving-coil galvanometer, the pole pieces of the permanent magnet are made cylindrically concave, coaxial with the coil. A soft iron core is fixed centrally between the pole pieces so that it partly fills the space inside the coil and forms a narrow cylindrical gap in which the sides of the coil can move.
(1) The soft iron core, together with the concave pole pieces produces a radially uniform magnetic field, i.e., the magnetic lines of force in the gap are along radii to the central axis. This makes the deflection of the coil proportional to the current in it. The instrument then has a linear scale which is particularly straightforward to calibrate and to read.

(2) The permeability of iron being more than that of air, the magnetic lines of force pass through the soft iron core. By making the cylindrical gap as narrow as possible then increases the magnetic induction in the gap. This increases the deflecting torque on the coil and the sensitivity of the instrument.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 40.
Why does not the Earth’s magnetic field affect the working of a moving-coil galvanometer?
Answer:
The coil of a moving-coil galvanometer rotates in the magnetic field of a permanent magnet. The magnetic induction of the permanent magnet is many orders of magnitude (typically 104 times) stronger than that of the Earth. Hence, the Earth’s magnetic field does not affect the working of the galvanometer.

Question 41.
Explain the magnetic dipole moment of a current loop. State its magnitude and direction.
Answer:
The responses of a current-carrying coil to an external magnetic field is identical to that of a magnetic dipole (or a bar magnet). Like a magnetic dipole, a current-carrying coil placed in a magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) experiences a torque. In that sense, the coil is said to be a magnetic dipole. To account for a torque τ on the coil due to the magnetic field, we assign a magnetic dipole moment \(\vec{\mu}\) to the coil, such that
\(\vec{\tau}=\vec{\mu} \times \vec{B}=N I \vec{A} \times \vec{B}\)

where \(\vec{\mu}=N I \vec{A}\). Here, N is the number of turns in the coil, I is the current through the coil and A is the area enclosed by each turn of the coil. The direction of \(\vec{\mu}\) is that of the area vector \(\vec{A}\), given by a right hand rule shown in below figure. If the fingers of right hand are curled in the direction of current in the loop, the outstretched thumb is the direction of \(\vec{A}\) and \(\vec{\mu}\). In magnitude, μ = NIA.
The torque tends to align \(\vec{\mu}\) along \(\vec{B}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 28

Question 42.
State if the following statement is true : “The magnetic dipole moment of a current-carrying coil of given geometry is constant.” Justify your answer.
Answer:
The given statement is false.
Consider a coil of N turns, each of area A. If the current through the coil is I, the magnetic dipole moment of the coil is, in magnitude, μ = NIA. That is, μ ∝ I, for given N and A. Thus, for a coil of given geometry, its magnetic dipole moment varies with the current through it.

Question 43.
In analogy with an electric dipole, state an expression for the magnetic potential energy of an magnetic dipole in a uniform magnetic field. Discuss the orientations of the dipole moment for the maximum and minimum of potential energy.
Answer:
Consider an electric dipole of dipole moment \(\vec{p}\) placed in a uniform electric field \(\vec{p}\) making an angle Φ with \(\vec{p}\). The torque \(\vec{\tau}=\vec{p} \times \vec{E}\) tends to rotate the dipole and align it with \(\vec{E}\).

If the dipole was initially parallel to \(\vec{E}\), its potential energy is minimum. We arbitrarily assign U0 = 0 to the minimum potential energy for this position. Then, at a position where \(\vec{p}\) makes an angle θ with \(\vec{E}\), the potential energy of the dipole is
Uθ = -pE cos θ = –\(\vec{p} \cdot \vec{E}\).
A current-carrying coil placed in a magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) experiences a torque,
\(\vec{\tau}=\vec{\mu} \times \vec{B}\) …………. (1)
where \(\vec{\mu}\) is the magnetic dipole moment of the coil. In analogy with an electric dipole, the potential energy of a magnetic dipole is
Uθ = – μB cos θ = – \(\vec{\mu} \cdot \vec{B}\) ……….. (2)
Uθ is also known as orientation energy.
A magnetic dipole has its lowest energy ( = – μB cos 0 = – μB) when its dipole moment is lined up with the magnetic field, and has its highest energy ( = – μBcos 180° = + μB) when is directed opposite the field.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 29

44. Solve the following :
Question 1.
A straight current-carrying conductor 30 cm long carries a current of 5 A. It is placed in a uniform magnetic field of induction 0.2 T, with its length making an angle of 60° with the direction of the field. Find the force acting on the conductor.
Solution:
Data : l = 30 cm = 0.3 m, I = 5 A, B = 0.2 T, θ = 60°
The magnitude of the force on the conductor,
F = I\(|\vec{l} \times \vec{B}|\) = IlB sin θ
= (5 A) (0.3 m) (0.2 T) sin 60°
= 0.3 × 0.866 = 0.2598 N
The direction of the force is given by the cross product rule.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 2.
A conductor of length 25 cm is placed (i) parallel (ii) perpendicular (iii) inclined at an angle 30°, to a uniform magnetic field of induction 2 T. If 1 C of charge passes through it in 5 s, calculate the force experienced by the conductor in each case.
Solution:
Data : l = 25 cm = 0.25 m, θ1 = 0°, θ2 = 90°, θ3 = 30°, B = 2 T, q = 1 C, f = 5 s
The current in the conductor,
I = \(\frac{q}{t}=\frac{1 \mathrm{C}}{5 \mathrm{~s}}\) = 0.2 A
The magnitude of the force on the conductor,
F = I\(|\vec{l} \times \vec{B}|\) = IlB sin θ
(i) θ1 =0° A ∴ sin θ1 = 0 ∴ F = 0 N
(ii) θ2 = 9O° ∴ sin θ2 = 1
∴ F = IlB = (0.2 A)(0.25 m)(2 T)
= 0.1 N
(iii) θ3 = 30° ∴ sin θ3 = 0.5
∴ F = IlB sin θ3 = (0.1 N) (0.5) = 0.05 N
The direction of \(\vec{F}\) in each case is given by the cross product rule.

Question 3.
A horizontal straight wire is in a uniform magnetic field which is horizontal and at right angles to the length of the wire. The part of the wire that lies in the field has a length 2 m and mass 1 gram. If the magnetic induction is 1 mT, find the current that should be passed through the wire to balance it.
Solution:
Data : l = 2 m, m = 1 g = 10-3 kg, g = 9.8 m/s2,
B = 1 mT = 10-3 T
To balance the wire, the upward magnetic force must be equal in magnitude to the downward force due to gravity.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 30

Question 4.
A circular loop of radius 10 cm is carrying a current of 0.1 A. Calculate its magnetic moment.
Solution:
Data : R = 10 cm = 0.1m, N = 1, I = 0.1 A
The magnetic moment,
μ = NIA = NI(πR2)
= (1) (0.1 A) (3.142) (0.1 m)2
= 3.142 × 10-3 A∙m2

Question 5.
An electron in an atom revolves around the nucleus in an orbit of radius 0.53 Å. If the frequency of revolution of an electron is 9 × 109 MHz, calculate the equivalent magnetic moment. [e = 1.6 × 10-19 C]
Solution : .
Data : r = 0.53 Å = 0.53 × 10-10 m,
f = 9 × 109 MHz = 9 × 1015 Hz, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
Magnetic moment, M0 = IA = efπr2
= 1.6 × 10-19 × 9 × 1015 × 3.142 × (0.53 × 10-10)2
= 14.4 × 3.142 × (0.53)2 × 10-19 × 1015 × 10-20
= 1.272 × 10-23 A∙m2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 6.
A rectangular coil of 10 turns, each of area 0.05 m2, is suspended freely in a uniform magnetic field of induction 0.01 T. A current of 30 /(A is passed through it.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 31
(i) What is the magnetic moment of the coil?
(ii) What is the maximum torque experienced by the coil?
(iii) What is the minimum torque experienced by the coil?
SoLution:
Data: N = 10, A = 0.05 m2, B = 0.01 T, I = 30 μA = 3 × 10-5 A
(i) The magnetic moment,
μ = NIA = 10(3 × 10-5 A)(0.05 m2)
=1.5 × 10-5 A∙m2 = 15 μA∙m2

(ii) The maximum torque experienced by the coil (when its plane is parallel to \(\vec{B}\)) is
τmax = MB
= (1.5 × 10-5 A∙m2)(0.01 T)
= 1.5 × 10-7 N∙m

(iii) The minimum torque experienced by the coil (when its plane is perpendicular to \(\vec{B}\)) is
τmin = 0

Question 7.
A coil has 300 turns, each of area 0.05 m2. (i) Find the current through the coil for which the magnetic moment of the coil will be 4.5 A-m2. (ii) It is placed in a uniform magnetic field of induction 0.2 T with its magnetic moment making an angle of 30° with \(\vec{B}\). Calculate the magnitude of the torque experienced by the coil. (3 marks)
Solution:
Data : N = 300, A = 0.05 m2, M = 4.5 A ∙ m2, B = 0.2 T, θ = 30°
(i) M = NIA
∴ The current in the coil,
I = \(\frac{M}{N A}=\frac{4.5}{300 \times 0.05}\) = 0.3 A

(ii) The magnitude of the torque,
τ = MB sin θ = 4.5 × 0.2 × sin 30°
= 0.9 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 0.45 N∙m

Question 8.
A rectangular coil of 10 turns, each of area 0.05 m2, is suspended freely in a radial magnetic field of 0.01 Wb/m2. If the torsional constant of the suspension fibre is 5 × 10-9 N∙m per degree, find the angle through which the coil rotates when a current of 30 μA is passed through it.
Solution:
Data : A = 0.05 m2, B = 0.01 Wb/m2, N = 10, C = 5 × 10-9 N∙m per degree,
I = 30 μA = 30 × 10-6 A,
I = \(\left(\frac{C}{N A B}\right) \theta\)
∴ The deflection of the coil,
θ = \(\frac{N I A B}{C}=\frac{10 \times 30 \times 10^{-6} \times 0.05 \times 0.01}{5 \times 10^{-9}}\) = 30°

Question 9.
A moving-coil galvanometer has coil of area 10 cm2 and 100 turns. It is suspended by a fibre of torque constant 10-8 N∙m/degree in a radial magnetic field of induction 0.05 Wb/m2. Find the angle through which the coil will be deflected when a current of 16 μA passes through it.
Solution:
Data ; A = 10-3 m2, N = 100, C = 10-8 N∙m/degree, B = 0.05 Wb/m2, 7 = 1.6 × 10-5 A
I = \(\left(\frac{C}{N A B}\right) \theta\)
∴ The deflection of the coil,
θ = \(\frac{N I A B}{C}=\frac{(100)\left(1.6 \times 10^{-5}\right)\left(10^{-3}\right)(0.05)}{10^{-8}}\) = 8

Question 10.
A bar magnet of moment 7.5 A∙m2 experiences a torque of magnitude 1.5 × 10-4 N∙m when placed inclined at 30° in a uniform magnetic field. Find the magnitude of the magnetic induction of the field.
Solution:
Data : μ = 7.5 A∙m2, τ = 1.5 × 10-4 N∙m, θ = 30° T = μB sin θ
∴ The magnitude of the magnetic induction,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 32

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 11.
A circular coil, having 200 turns each of area 2.5 × 10-4 m2, carries a current of 200 μA. Initially, the coil is at rest in a magnetic field of induction 0.8 T, with its magnetic dipole moment aligned with the field. Find the work an external agent has to do to rotate the coil through (i) 90° from its initial position (ii) further 90°.
Solution:
Data : N = 200, A = 2.5 × 10-4 m2, B = 0.8T,
I = 200 μA = 2 × 10-4 A, θ = 90°
W = ∆U =Uθ – U0
(i) The work done to rotate through 90°,
W = U90° – U = – μB cos 90° – (- μB cos 0°)
= 0 + μB = (NIA)B (∵ μ = NIA)
= (200)(2 × 10-4)(2.5 × 10-4)(0.8)
= 8 × 10-6 J = 8 μJ

(ii) The work done to rotate further through 90°, so that the dipole moment is antiparallel to the field,
W = U80° – U90° = – μB cos 180° – (- μB cos 90°)
= μB + 0 = (NIA)B = 8 μJ

Question 12.
A magnetic dipole of moment 0.025 J/T is free to rotate in a uniform magnetic field of induction 50 mT. When released from rest in the magnetic field, the dipole rotates to align with the field. At the instant the dipole moment is parallel to the field, its kinetic energy is 625 μJ. What was the initial angle between the dipole moment and the magnetic field?
Solution:
Data: μ = 0.025J/T, B = 50mT = 5 × 10-2 T,
∆K = 625 pJ = 6.25 × 10-4 J
Change in potential energy,
∆U =Uθ – U0 = – μB cos 0° – (- μ8 cos θ)
= – μB(1 – cos θ)
By the principle of conservation of energy,
∆K + ∆U = 0
∴ ∆K = – ∆U = μB(1 – cos θ)
∴ (2.5 × 10-2)(5 × 10-2)(1 – cos θ) = 6.25 × 10-4
∴ (1 – cos θ) = 0.5 ∴ cos θ = 0.5
The initial angle between the dipole moment and the magnetic field,
θ = 60° .

Question 45.
State the Bio-Savart law (Laplace law) for the magnetic induction produced by a current el-ement. Express it in vector form.
Answer:
Consider a very short segment of length dl of a wire carrying a current I. The product I\(\overrightarrow{d l}\) is called a current element; the direction of the vector \(\overrightarrow{d l}\) is along the wire in the direction of the current.

Biot-Savart law (Laplace law) : The magnitude of the incremental magnetic induction \(\overrightarrow{d B}\) produced by a current element I\(\overrightarrow{d l}\) at a distance r from it is directly proportional to the magnitude Idl of the current element, the sine of the angle between the current element I \(\overrightarrow{d l}\) and the unit vector \(\hat{r}\) directed from the current element toward the point in question, and inversely proportional to the square of the distance of the point from the current element; the magnetic induction is directed perpendicular to both I \(\overrightarrow{d l}\) and \(\hat{r}\) as per the cross product rule.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 33
of free space. Equations (1) and (2) are called Biot-Savart law.

The incremental magnetic induction \(\overrightarrow{d B}\) is given by the right-handed screw rule of vector crossproduct I\(\overrightarrow{d l} \times \hat{\mathbf{r}}\). In below figure, the current element I \(\overrightarrow{d l}\) and \(\hat{r}\) are in the plane of the page, so that \(\overrightarrow{d B}\) points out of the page at point P shown by ⊙; at the point Q, \(\overrightarrow{d B}\) points into the page shown by ⊗.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 34
The magnetic induction \(\vec{B}\) at the point due to the entire wire is, by the principle of superposition, the vector sum of the contributions \(\overrightarrow{d B}\) from all the current elements making up the wire.
From Eq. (2),
\(\vec{B}=\int \overrightarrow{d B}=\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \int \frac{I \vec{d} \times \hat{\mathrm{r}}}{r^{2}}\)
[Notes : (1) The above law is based on experiments by Jean Baptiste Biot (1774-1862) and Felix Savart (1791-1841), French physicists. From their observations Laplace deduced the law mathematically. (2) The Biot- Savart law plays a similar role in magnetostatics as Coulomb’s law does in electrostatics.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 46.
Using Biot-Savart’s law, obtain the expression for the magnetic induction near a straight infinite ly long current-carrying wire.
Answer:
Suppose a point P is at a distance a from a straight, infinitely long, wire carrying a current I, as shown in below figure. The incremental magnetic induction \(d \vec{B}\) at the point P due to a current element, \(I \overrightarrow{d l}\) is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 35
At the point P, \(d \vec{B}\) is directed perpendicular to the plane of the figure and into of the page as given by the right hand rule for the direction of \(\overrightarrow{d l} \times \hat{\mathbf{r}}\).

At point P, \(d \vec{B}\) has this same direction for all the current elements into which the wire can be divided. Thus, we can find the magnitude of the magnetic field produced at P by the current elements in the lower half of the infinitely long wire by integrating dB in Eq. (2), from 0 to ∞.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 36
Now consider a current element in the upper half of the wire, one that is as far above P as I\(\overrightarrow{d l}\) is below P. By symmetry, the magnetic field produced at P by this current element has the same magnitude and direction as that from I \overrightarrow{d l} in above figure. Thus, the magnetic field produced by the upper half of the wire is exactly the same as that produced by the lower half. Hence, the magnitude of the total magnetic field at P is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 37
That is, the magnitude B is inversely proportional to the distance from the wire. Because of the axial symmetry about the straight wire, the magnetic induction has the same magnitude B at all points on a circle in a transverse plane and centred on the conductor; the direction of \(\vec{B}\) is everywhere tangential to such a circle. Thus, the magnetic field lines around the current in the straight wire is a family of circles centred on the wire.

[Notes : (1) The magnetic field at P due to either only the lower half or the upper half of the infinite wire in figure is half the value in Eq. (5); that is, for a semi-infinite wire,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 38

Question 47.
Show that currents in two long, straight, parallel wires exert forces on each other. Derive the expression for the force.
OR
Derive an expression for the force per unit length between two infinitely long parallel conductors carrying current and hence define the ampere.
Answer:
When two currents pass in adjacent parallel straight conductors, we may think of each of the currents as being situated in the magnetic field caused by the other current. This results in a force on each conductor.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 39
Consider two infinitely long, straight, parallel wires, each of length ¡ a distance s apart in vacuum, as shown in figure (a). The magnetic field around the wire 1, carrying a current I1 has an induction of magnitude
B1 = \(\left(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{2 I_{1}}{s}\)
Wire 2, with a current I2 in the same direction as I1, is situated in this field. The direction of the field
with induction \(\overrightarrow{B_{1}}\) at the position of wire 2, given by the right hand Igripi rule, is perpendicular to the plane of the two conductors, as shown. Hence, the force \(\overrightarrow{F_{2}}\) on wire 2 has a magnitude
F2 = I2lB1 = \(\left(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{2 I_{1} I_{2} l}{s}\) ……………… (1)
and is, by Fleming’s left hand rule, towards wire 1. Similarly, the magnetic induction \(\overrightarrow{B_{2}}\) at the position of wire 1 has a magnitude
B2 = \(\left(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{2 I_{2}}{s}\)
and is also directed perpendicular to the plane of the wires. Hence, the force on wire 1 has a magnitude
F1 = I1lB2 = \(\left(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{2 I_{1} I_{2} l}{s}\) ……………… (2)
directed towards wire 2. Thus, the two currents attract each other. \(\vec{F}_{1}=-\vec{F}_{2} \), i.e., they are equal in magnitude and opposite in direction.

Ampere found that the wires attracted each other when the currents in them were in the same direction [from figure (a )], and repelled each other when they were in the opposite directions [from figure (b)].

From the Eq. (2), the force per unit length acting on each wire is
\(\frac{F}{l}=\left(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{2 I_{1} I_{2}}{s}\)
Using SI units, μ0/4π = 10-7 N / A2 and, if I1 = I2 = 1 A and s = 1 m, then
\(\frac{F}{l}\) = 2 × 10-7 N / m
In SI, this equation is the defining relation for the ampere.

Definition: The ampere is that constant current which if maintained in two infinitely long straight parallel wires, and placed one metre apart in vacuum, would cause each conductor to experience a force per unit length of 2 × 10-7 newton per metre. [Note : 1 Wb/A∙m = 1 T∙m/A = l N/A2.]

Question 48.
Two very long and straight parallel conductors separated by 0.5 m in vacuum carry currents 2 A and 3 A respectively. What is the force per unit length of a conductor? [\(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\) = 10-7 Wb/A∙m]
Answer:
The force per unit length on each conductor,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 40

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 49.
Obtain an expression for the magnetic induction produced by a current in a wire in the shape of a circular arc at its centre of curvature. Hence obtain an expression for the magnetic induction at the centre of a circular coil carrying a current.
Answer:
Consider a wire in the shape of a circular arc of radius of curvature R and carrying a current I. The unit vector \(\hat{\mathrm{r}}\) from each current element I\(\overrightarrow{d l}\) towards
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 41
the centre of the loop is perpendicular to I\(\overrightarrow{d l}\), i.e., the angle θ between them is 90°. The direction of the incremental magnetic induction \(\overrightarrow{d B}\) due to each current element is in the same direction, viz., perpendicular to the plane of the loop, and out of the plane of the figure for the sense of the current shown in above figure.

Since every current element is equidistant from the centre of curvature C, the magnetic field at C due to each current element in the arc by Biot-Savart’s law is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 42
If the arc subtends an angle 0 at its centre of curvature C, the total field at C due to all the elements on the arc is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 43
where Φ is in radian.
The magnitude of the total induction \(\vec{B}\) at the centre of a circular coil is, from Eq. (3),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 44
If a circular coil has N turns, each of radius r and carries a current I, the magnetic induction at its centre has a magnitude
B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} N I}{2 R}\) …………… (6)

Question 50.
Derive an expression for the magnetic induction at a point on the axis of a circular coil carrying a current.
OR
A circular coil of N turns, each of radius R, carries a current I. Derive the expression for the magnitude of the magnetic induction on the axis of the coil at a distance z. Hence obtain the expression for the magnitude of the magnetic induction for z » R.
Answer:
Consider a circular, conducting loop of radius R in the xy-plane, whose centre is at the origin. For any point P on the z-axis (which is also the axis of the loop), the current element I \(\overrightarrow{d l}\) is perpendicular to the unit vector \(\hat{\mathbf{r}}\) directed from the current element to point P. The incremental magnetic induction, \(\overrightarrow{d B}\), due to a current element at Q lies in the plane QOP, in the direction of I \(\overrightarrow{d l} \times \vec{r}\), as shown in below figure. In magnitude,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 45
Each element of the loop has its diametrically opposed companion I \(\overrightarrow{d l}\) on the other side of the loop, both of equal segment length dl. Point P is equidistant from the two elements, that is, r = r’. Therefore, the two contributions \(\overrightarrow{d B}\) and \(\overrightarrow{d B}^{\prime}\) have equal magnitudes, and their vertical components, dB cos α and dB’cos α, are oppositely directed. Thus, they will add to zero when all the \(\overrightarrow{d B}\) contributions are summed, and there can be no vertical component of the resultant induction \(\vec{B}\). However, the horizontal components are of like direction and will sum to a definite value and hence \(\vec{B}\) will have only a horizontal z-component. For the magnitude of \(\vec{B}\), we need to add only the z-components of the \(\overrightarrow{d B}\) vectors :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 46
For values of z that are much larger than the radius R, we may ignore the value of R in the denominator above and write
B = \(\left(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{2 I A}{z^{3}}\) (for z >> R) …………… (2)
For a circular coil of N turns Eqs. (1) and (2) are, respectively,
B = \(\left(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{2 N I A}{\left(R^{2}+z^{2}\right)^{\frac{3}{2}}}\) and B = \(\left(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{2 N I A}{z^{3}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 51.
How is the magnetic field of a small current loop identical to that of a short magnetic dipole? Explain.
OR
Explain the equivalence of the fields of a current-carrying circular coil and a magnetic dipole.
Answer:
An electric current in a circular loop establishes a magnetic field similar in every respect to the field of a magnetic dipole (or a bar magnet).

Consider a circular conducting ioop of radius R, axis along the x-axis and carrying a current I. The area of the loop is A = πR2and \(\vec{A}\) has the direction given by right hand rule. The axial magnetic induction of the current loop at a distance x from its centre is
\(\vec{B}=\left(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{2 I \vec{A}}{\left(R^{2}+x^{2}\right)^{3 / 2}}=\left(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{2 \vec{\mu}}{\left(R^{2}+x^{2}\right)^{3 / 2}}\)
where \(\vec{M}=I \vec{A}\) is the magnetic moment of the current loop and μ0 is the permeability of free space. For x >> R, ignoring R2 in comparison with X2,
\(\vec{B}=\left(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{2 \vec{\mu}}{x^{3}}\)
This equation also gives the magnetic induction on the axis of a short magnetic dipole (or a bar magnet) of magnetic moment \(\vec{\mu}\).

For a magnetic dipole, the dipole moment is directed from the south pole of the dipole to its north pole. For a current loop, the magnetic dipole moment has the direction of the axial field of the current loop as given by the right-hand rule.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 47
When an observer looking at a current carrying circular loop finds the direction of the current anticlockwise, the face of the loop towards the observer acts as the north pole. When an observer looking at a current-carrying circular loop finds the direction of the current clockwise, the face of the loop towards the observer acts as the south pole. This rule is known as the clock rule.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 48

Question 52.
State the expressions for the axial fields of an electric dipole and a small current-loop.
Answer:
The axial far field of an electric dipole of electric dipole moment \(\vec{p}\) at an axial point r is
\(\vec{E}=\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{2 \vec{p}}{r^{3}}\)
The axial magnetic field far from a small current-loop is
\(\vec{B}=\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{2 \vec{\mu}}{r^{3}}\)
where \(\vec{\mu}=I \vec{A}\) is the magnetic dipole moment of the loop, I is the current in the loop and \(\vec{A}\) is the area vector given by the right-hand rule. The axial field of an electric dipole, \(\vec{E}\) is in the direction of the dipole moment \(\vec{p}\). On the axis of a current loop, the magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) is in the direction of the dipole moment \(\vec{\mu}\).

53. Solve the following
Question 1.
(1) Two long parallel current-carrying conductors are 0.4 m apart in air and carry currents 5 A and 10A. Calculate the force per metre on each conductor, if the currents are in the same direction and in the opposite direction.
Solution:
Data: s = 0.4 m, I1 = 5A, I2 = 10A
μ0/4π = 10-7 N/A2
The force per unit length acting on each conductor is
\(\frac{F}{l}=\left(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\right) \frac{2 I_{1} I_{2}}{s}\)
= (10-7 N/A2) \(\frac{2(5 \mathrm{~A})(10 \mathrm{~A})}{0.4 \mathrm{~m}}\)
= 2.5 × 10-5 N/m (= 25 μN/m)
This force is attractive if the currents are in the same direction and repulsive if the currents are in the opposite directions.

Question 2.
Two wires 12 m long and 10 cm apart carry the same current. Find the current through each wire if the force per unit length on each wire is 0.001 N/m.
Solution:
Data : l = 12 m, s = 10 cm = 0.1 m,
I1 = I2 = I, \(\frac{F}{l}\) = 0.001 N/m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 49
The current through each wire is 10\(\sqrt {5}\) A.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 3.
The wire shown below carries a current of 2 A. The curved segment is a quadrant of radius 10 cm while the straight segments are along radii. Find the magnitude and direction of the magnetic induction at the centre O of the quadrant by the entire wire.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 50
Solution:
Data : I = 2 A, R = 10 cm = 10-1 m
The point O lies along the straight segments AB and CD. Hence, the magnetic induction \(\vec{B}\) produced by each of them is zero.

Since θ = 90°, the magnitude of the magnetic induction due to the current in quadrant BC is \(\frac{1}{4}\)th of that produced at the centre of a loop.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 51

Question 4.
A flat coil of 70 turns has a diameter of 20 cm and carries a current of 5 A. Find the magnitude of the magnetic induction at (a) the centre of the coil (b) a point on the axis 20 cm from the centre of the coil.
Solution:
Data : N = 70, R = 10 cm = 0.1 m, I = 5 A, z = 0.2 m, μ0 = 4π × 10-7 T∙m/A
(a) At the centre of the coil:
The magnitude of the magnetic induction,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 52

Question 5.
(12) A current of 10 A passes through a coil having 5 turns and produces a magnetic field of magnitude 0.5 × 10-4 T at the centre of the coil. Calculate the diameter of the coil.
Solution:
Data: I = 10A, N = 5, B = 5 × 10-5 T,
μ0/4π = 10-7 T∙m/A
B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} N I}{2 R}\)
∴ The diameter of the coil,
2R = \(\frac{\mu_{0} N I}{B}=\frac{\left(4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~T} \cdot \mathrm{m} / \mathrm{A}\right)(5)(10 \mathrm{~A})}{5 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~T}}\)
= 4 × 3.142 × 10-1 = 1.257 m

Question 6.
Calculate the magnitude of the magnetic induction due to a circular coil of 400 turns and radius 0.05 m, carrying a current of 5 A, at a point on the axis of the coil at a distance 0.1 m.
Solution:
Data : N = 400, R = 0.05 m = 5 × 10-2 m,
I = 5 A, z = 0.1 m, μ0/4π = 10-7 T∙m/A
The magnitude of the magnetic induction,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 53
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 54

Question 7.
A circular coil of wire has 100 turns. The radius of the coil is 50 cm. It is desired to have a magnetic induction of 80 μT at the centre of the coil. What should be the current through the coil ?
Solution:
Data: N = 100, R = 50 cm = 0.5 m,
B = 80 μT = 8 × 10-5 T, μ0/4π = 10-7 T∙m/A
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 55

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 54.
State and explain Ampere’s circuital law.
OR
State Ampere’s circuital law.
Answer:
Ampere’s circuital law : In free space, the line integral of magnetic induction around a closed path in a magnetic field is equal to p0 times the net steady current enclosed by the path.
In mathematical form,
\(\oint \vec{B} \cdot \overrightarrow{d l}\) = μ0I …………. (1)
where \(\vec{B}\) is the magnetic induction at any point on the path in vacuum, \(\overrightarrow{d l}\) is the length element of the path, I is the net steady current enclosed and p0 is the permeability of free space.

Explanation : Below figure shows two wires carrying currents I1 and I2 in vacuum. The magnetic induction \(\vec{B}\) at any point is the net effect of these currents.

To find the magnitude B of the magnetic induction :
(i) We construct an imaginary closed curve around the conductors, called an Amperian loop, and imagine it divided into small elements of length dl. The direction of \(\overrightarrow{d l}\) is the direction along which the loop is traced.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 56
(ii) We assign signs to the currents using the right hand rule : If the fingers of the right hand are curled in the direction in which the loop is traced, then a current in the direction of the outstretched thumb is taken to be positive while a current in the opposite direction is taken to be negative.

For each length element of the Amperian loop, \(\vec{B} \cdot \overrightarrow{d l}\) gives the product of the length dl of the element and the component of \(\vec{B}\) parallel to \(\overrightarrow{d l}\). If θ is the angle between \(\overrightarrow{d l}\) and \(\vec{B}\),
\(\vec{B} \cdot \overrightarrow{d l}\) = (B cos θ) dl
Then, the line integral,
\(\oint \vec{B} \cdot \overrightarrow{d l}=\oint\) Bcosθ dl ……………(2)
For the case shown in figure, the net current I through the surface bounded by the loop is
I = I2 – I1
∴ \(\oint\) Bcosθ dl = μ0 I
= μ0(I2 – I1) ……………. (3)
Equation (3) can be solved only when B is uniform and hence can be taken out of the integral.

[Note : Ampere’s law in magnetostatics plays the part of Gauss’s law of electrostatics. In particular, for currents with appropriate symmetry, Ampere’s law in integral form offers an efficient way of calculating the magnetic field. Like Gauss’s law, Ampere’s law is always true (for steady currents), but it is useful only when the symmetry of the problem enables B to be taken out of the integral \(\oint \vec{B} \cdot \overrightarrow{d l}\). The current configurations that can be handled by Ampere’s law are infinite straight conductor, infinite plane, infinite solenoid and toroid.]

Question 55.
Using Ampere’s law, obtain an expression for the magnetic induction near a current-carrying straight, infinitely long wire.
Answer:
Consider a point P at a distance a from a straight, infinitely long wire carrying a current I in free space, from figure (a). Because of the axial symmetry about the straight wire, the magnetic induction has the same magnitude B at all points on a circle in a transverse plane and centred on the wire. We, therefore, choose an Amperian loop a circle of radius a centred on the wire with its plane perpendicular to the wire, as shown in from figure (b).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 57
since cos θ = 1 and B has the same value around the path. \(\oint\) dl gives the circumference of the circular loop.

In the figure, the Amperian loop is traced in the anticlockwise sense, so that the current I is taken as positive in accordance with the right hand rule.
By Ampere’s law,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 58
This is the required expression.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 56.
What is a solenoid? With a neat labelled diagram, describe the magnetic field produced by a current-carrying solenoid.
Answer:
A solenoid is a long wire wound in the form of a helix. An ideal solenoid is tightly wound and infinitely long, i.e., its turns are closely spaced and the solenoid is very long compared to its crosssectional radius.

Each turn of a solenoid acts approximately as a circular loop. Suppose the solenoid carries a steady current I. The net magnetic field due to the current in the solenoid is the vector sum of the fields due to the current in all the turns. In the case of a tightly- wound solenoid of finite length, Fig. 10.39, the magnetic field lines are approximately parallel only near the centre of the solenoid, indicating a nearly uniform field there. However, close to the ends, the field lines diverge from one end and converge at the other end. This field distribution is similar to that of a bar magnet. Thus, one end of the solenoid behaves like the north pole of a magnet and the opposite end behaves like the south pole. The field outside is very weak near the midpoint.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 59
For an ideal solenoid, the magnetic field inside is reasonably uniform over the cross section and parallel to the axis throughout the volume enclosed by the solenoid. The field outside is negligible in this case.

Question 57.
Using Ampere’s law, derive an expression for the magnetic induction inside an ideal solenoid carrying a steady current.
Answer:
An ideal solenoid is tightly wound and infinitely long. Let n be the number of turns of wire per unit length and I be the steady current in the solenoid.

For an ideal solenoid, the magnetic induction \(\vec{B}\) inside is reasonably uniform over the cross section and parallel to the axis throughout the volume enclosed by the solenoid; \(\vec{B}\) outside is negligible.

As an Amperian loop, we choose a rectangular path PQRS of length l parallel to the solenoid axis, from below figure. The width of the rectangle is taken to be sufficiently large so that the side RS is far from the solenoid where \(\vec{B}\) = 0. The line integral of the magnetic induction around the Amperian loop in the sense PQRSP is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 60
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 61
Thus, from Eqs. (1), (2), (3) and (4),
\(\oint \vec{B} \cdot \overrightarrow{d l}\) = Bl ……….. (5)
The total current enclosed by the Amperian loop is
Iencl = current through each turn × number of turns enclosed by the loop
= I × nl = nlI ……… (6)
By Ampere’s law,
\(\oint \vec{B} \cdot \overrightarrow{d l}\) = μ0Iencl (in vacuum)
Therefore, from Eq.s (5) and (6),
Bl = μ0 nlI
∴ B = μ0nI …………. (7)
This is the required expression.

[Notes : (1) The field inside an ideal solenoid is uniform-it doesn’t depend on the distance from the axis. In this sense, the solenoid is to magnetostatics what the parallel-plate capacitor is to electrostatics; a simple device for producing strong uniform fields. (2) At an axial point at the end of a long solenoid, B = \(\frac{1}{2}\) μ0nI]

Question 58.
What is the magnetic field (i) outside (ii) inside a long air-cored current-carrying solenoid ?
Answer:
For an ideal solenoid, the magnetic field induction outside is negligible, nearly zero. Inside the solenoid, the field lines are parallel to the axis of the solenoid and the magnitude of the magnetic induction, B = μ0nI, where μ0 is the permeability of free space, n is the number of turns of wire per unit length and I is the steady current in the solenoid.

Question 59.
What is a toroid? With a neat diagram, describe the magnetic field produced by a toroid carrying a steady current.
Answer:
A toroid is a toroidal solenoid. An ideal toroid consists of a long conducting wire wound tightly around a torus, a doughnut-shaped ring, made of a nonconducting material.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 62
In an ideal toroid carrying a steady current, the magnetic field in the interior of the toroid is tangential to any circle concentric with the axis of the toroid and has the same value on this circle (the dashed line in above figure). Also, the magnitude of the magnetic induction external to the toroid is negligible.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 60.
Using Ampere’s law, derive an expression for the magnetic induction inside an ideal toroid carrying a steady current.
Answer:
An ideal toroid consists of a long conducting wire wound tightly around a torus made of a non-conducting material. When a steady current is passed through it, the magnetic induction \(\vec{B}\) in the interior of the toroid is tangent to any circle concentric with y the axis of the toroid and has the same value on this circle.

Suppose the toroid has N turns of wire and I is the current in its coil. As our Amperian loop, we choose a circle of radius r concentric with the axis of the toroid, as shown in figure. Since \(\vec{B}\) has the same value on this circle and is tangential to it, we go around this path in the direction of \(\vec{B}\) so that \(\vec{B}\) and \(\overrightarrow{d l}\) are parallel. Then, the line integral of the magnetic induction around the Amperian loop is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 63
The net current enclosed by the Amperean loop is
Iencl = current through each turn × number of turns enclosed by the loop
= I × N = NI …………….. (2)
By Ampere’s law,
\(\oint \vec{B} \cdot \overrightarrow{d l}\) = μ0 Iencl (in free space)
Therefore, from Eqs. (1) and (2),
B (2πr) = μ0NI
∴ B = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{2 \pi} \frac{N I}{r}\) …………… (3)
This is the required expression.

61. Solve the following

Question 1.
Four long parallel wires are arranged at the four comers of a square ABCD of side 20 cm. Each wire carries a current of 5 A. Currents in the conductors 1 and 2, at comers A and B, are out of the page while those in the conductors 3 and 4, at comers C and D, are into the page. What is the magnitude of the magnetic induction at the centre of the square?
Solution:
Data : 2l = 20 cm = 0.2 m, I = 5 A
If each side of the square array is 2l, then from geometry, the centre of the square O is a distance \(\sqrt {2}\)l from each corner. Since each wire carries the same current, B1 = B2 = B3 = B4. Using the right hand [grip] rule, the directions of the magnetic inductions due to conductors 1 and 3 are along OB, while those due to conductors 2 and 4 are along OC, as shown.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 64
This is also the magnitude of the magnetic induc-tion along OC, B2 + B4.

Their components parallel to AD (or BC) are oppositely directed and cancel out. Therefore, the total induction at the centre of the square has a magnitude equal to the sum of the components parallel to AB (or DC).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 65
The magnitude of the magnetic induction at the centre of the square is 2 × 10-5 T.

Question 2.
Two long straight parallel wires in vacuum are 4 m apart and carry currents of 2 A and 6 A in the same direction. Find the neutral point, i.e., the point at which the resultant magnetic induction is zero.
Solution:
Data: I1 =2 A, I2 = 6 A, a =4 m
The currents through the wires are in the same direction. Therefore, the two magnetic inductions \(\overrightarrow{B_{1}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{B_{2}}\) will have opposite directions at any point between the two wires. Hence, the point must lie between the two wires. For the resultant magnetic induction to be zero, we must have B1 = B2. Let the corresponding point (the neutral point) be at a distance a1 from the first wire and a2 from the second wire.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 66
The neutral point lies at a distance of 1 m from the wire carrying a current of 2 A.

Question 3.
A solenoid 1.5 m long and 4 cm in diameter has – 10 turns/cm. A current of 5 A is passing through it. Calculate the magnetic induction (i) inside (ii) at one end on the axis of the solenoid.
Solution:
Data : L = 1.5 m, r = 2 cm, n = 10 turns/cm = 103 turns/metre, I = 5 A, μ0 = 4π × 10-7 T∙m/A
Since the diameter is very small compared to its length, we approximate the solenoid to be long, i.e., an ideal solenoid.

(i) At an axial point well inside a long solenoid,
B = μ0nI
= (4π × 10-7 )(103)(5) = 2 × 3.142 × 10-3
= 6.284 × 10-3 T

(ii) At an axial point at the end of a long solenoid,
B = \(\frac{1}{2}\) μ0nI
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) (6.284 × 10-3) = 3.142 × 10-3 T

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 4.
A toroidally wound coil has an inner radius of 15 cm, an outer radius of 20 cm and is wound with 1500 turns of wire. What is the magnitude of the magnetic induction at the centre of the coil when the current in the winding is 10 A ?
Solution:
Data : Central radius, r = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (15 + 20) = 17.5 cm
= 0.175 m, N = 1500, I = 10 A, \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\) = 10-7 T∙m/A
The magnetic induction,
B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} N I}{2 \pi r}=\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{2 N I}{r}=10^{-7} \times \frac{2 \times 1500 \times 10}{0.175}\)
= 1.714 × 10-2 T

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
A doubly ionized helium nucleus (charge = 3.2 × 10-19 C) enters a region of uniform magnetic field with a velocity (103 m/s)\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\). The magnetic induction in the region is 20 mT directed towards the positive x-axis. The force on the ion is
(A) (6.4 × 10-18 N) \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\)
(B) (6.4 × 10-18 N) \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
(C) zero
(D) none of these.
Answer:
(C) zero

Question 2.
In a cyclotron, charged particles are accelerated by
(A) the electrostatic deflector plate
(B) the electric field in the dees
(C) the magnetic field in the dees
(D) the p.d. across the gap between the dees.
Answer:
(D) the p.d. across the gap between the dees.

Question 3.
Cyclotron cannot accelerate
(A) protons
(B) neutrons
(C) α-particles
(D) deuterons.
Answer:
(B) neutrons

Question 4.
If R is the radius of the dees and B the magnitude of the magnetic field induction in which positive charges (q) of mass m escape from the cyclotron, then their maximum speed vmax is
(A) \(\frac{q R}{B m}\)
(B) \(\frac{q m}{B R}\)
(C) \(\frac{q B R}{m}\)
(D) \(\frac{m}{q B R}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{q B R}{m}\)

Question 5.
A charged particle moving with a velocity \(\vec{v}\) enters a region of uniform magnetic field \(\vec{B}\). If the velocity has a component parallel to \(\vec{B}\), which of the following quantities is independent of \(\overrightarrow{\mid v} \mid\)?
(A) Period T of its circular motion
(B) Pitch p of its helical path
(C) Radius r of its helical path
(D) Both p and T
Answer:
(A) Period T of its circular motion

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 6.
A charged particle moving with a velocity \(\vec{v}\) enters a region of uniform magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) such that the pitch of the resulting helical motion is equal to the radius of the helix. The angle between \(\vec{v}\) and \(\vec{B}\) is
(A) tan-1
(B) sin-1
(C) tan-1 \(\frac{1}{2 \pi}\left(\frac{q B}{m}\right)^{2}\)
(D) tan-1 2π\(2 \pi\left(\frac{q B}{m}\right)^{2}\).
Answer:
(A) tan-1

Question 7.
The following four cases show a positive charge moving into a magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) with velocity \(\vec{v}\). In which of the cases are the forces opposite in direction?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 67
(A) (iii) and (iv)
(B) (i) and (ii)
(C) (i) and (iii)
(D) (ii) and (iv)
Answer:
(B) (i) and (ii)

Question 8.
A charged particle enters a uniform magnetic field initially travelling perpendicular to the field lines and is bent in a circular arc of radius R. If the particle had the same charge but double the mass and were travelling twice as fast, the radius of its circular arc would be
(A) 2R
(B) 4R
(C) R
(D) \(\frac{1}{4}\)R.
Answer:
(B) 4R

Question 9.
A straight wire along the y-axis carries a current of 4 A. The wire is placed in a uniform magnetic field (0.02 T) \((\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}})\). If the current in the wire is directed towards the negative y-axis, the force per unit length on the wire is
(A) zero
(B) – (0.08 N/m) \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
(C) (0.08 N/m) \((\hat{\mathrm{i}}-\hat{\mathrm{j}})\)
(D) (0.08 N/m) \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
Answer:
(D) (0.08 N/m) \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)

Question 10.
A 30-turn coil of diameter 2 cm carries a current of 10 mA. When it is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.05 T, the magnitude of the maximum torque that could be exerted on the coil by the magnetic field is
(A) 1.88 × 10-5 N∙m
(B) 4.7 × 10-6 N∙m
(C) 4.7 × 10-7 N∙m
(D) 1.88 × 10-8 N∙m.
Answer:
(B) 4.7 × 10-6 N∙m

Question 11.
A circular loop of area \(\sqrt{2}\) cm2 and carrying a current of 10 μA is placed in a magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) with its plane parallel to \(\vec{B}\) (B = 15 mT). When the loop has rotated through an angle of 45°, the magnitude of the torque exerted on this loop is
(A) zero
(B) 15 × 10-12 N∙m
(C) 15 × 10-8 N∙m
(D) 15 × 10-2 N∙m
Answer:
(B) 15 × 10-12 N∙m

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 12.
A current loop of magnetic dipole moment 0.1 A-m2 is oriented with the plane of the loop perpendicular to a uniform 1.50 T magnetic field, as shown. The torque that the magnetic field exerts on the current loop is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 68
(A) 0.15 N∙m
(B) 0.075 N∙m
(C) -0.075 N∙m
(D) -0.15 N∙m.
Answer:
(B) 0.075 N∙m

Question 13.
A rectangular coil of dipole moment fi, free to rotate, is placed in a uniform magnetic field B with its plane parallel to the magnetic lines of force. Then, the coil will
(A) rotate to maximize the magnetic flux through its plane
(B) rotate to minimize the magnetic flux through its plane
(C) not experience any torque
(D) experience a constant torque equal to μB.
Answer:
(C) not experience any torque

Question 14.
When a current is passed through a suspended moving-coil galvanometer, the deflection of the coil is arrested by
(A) the elastic torsion of the suspension fibre
(B) the elastic winding of the helical spring
(C) the friction at the point of suspension
(D) the changing magnetic flux through the coil.
Answer:
(A) the elastic torsion of the suspension fibre

Question 15.
When a current is passed through a suspended moving-coil galvanometer, the deflection of the coil is 9. Then, in the usual notation, the expression \(\frac{\mu B}{\theta}\) is
(A) the torsion constant of the helical spring
(B) the magnetic dipole moment of the current-carrying coil
(C) the current through the coil
(D) the torsion constant of the suspension fibre.
Answer:
(D) the torsion constant of the suspension fibre.

Question 16.
The magnetic potential energy of a coil of dipole moment \(\vec{\mu}\) and area vector \(\vec{A}\) placed in a magnetic \(\vec{B}\) is maximum for which of the following cases ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 69
Answer:
(C) \(\vec{B} \uparrow \downarrow \vec{A}\)

Question 17.
Two points, A and B, are at distances rA and rB from a long, straight, current-carrying conductor. If rB = 2 rA, the magnitudes of the magnetic inductions at the two points are related by
(A )BA = BB
(B) BA = 2BB
(C) BA = 4BB
(D) BB = 2BA
Answer:
(B) BA = 2BB

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 18.
Two long, straight, parallel wires are 5 cm apart and carry currents I1 and I2 in the same direction. If 2I1 = 3I2, then at a point P, 2 cm from wire 2,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 70
Answer:
(B) \(\overrightarrow{B_{1}}=-\overrightarrow{B_{2}}\)

Question 19.
A wire of length L is first formed into a loop of one turn and then as a loop of two turns. The same current I is passed through the wire in the two cases. The ratio of the magnitude of the magnetic field induction at the centre of the single-turn loop to that at the centre of the double-turn loop is
(A) 4
(B) 2
(C) \(\frac{1}{2}\)
(D) \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 20.
Two circular coils 1 and 2 have both their radii and number of turns in the ratio 1 : 2. If the currents in them are in the ratio 2: 1, the magnitudes of the magnetic inductions at the centres of the coils are in the ratio
(A) 1 : 1
(B) 2 : 1
(C) 1 : 2
(D) 1 : 8.
Answer:
(B) 2 : 1

Question 21.
Three straight, parallel wires are coplanar and perpendicular to the plane of the page. The currents I1 and I3 are directed out of the page. If the wire 3 experiences no force due to the currents I1 and I2, then the current in the wire 2 is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 71
(A) I2 = 2I1 and directed into the page
(B) I2 = 0.5I1 and directed into the page
(C) I2 = 2I1 and directed out of the page
(D) I2 = 0.5I1 and directed out of the page.
Answer:
(B) I2 = 0.5I1 and directed into the page

Question 22.
Two diametrically opposite points of a uniform metal ring (radius, R) are connected to the terminals of a battery. If the current drawn from the battery is I, the magnetic induction at the centre of the ring has a magnitude
(A) \(\frac{\mu_{0} I}{R}\)
(B) \(\frac{\mu_{0} I}{2R}\)
(C) \(\frac{\mu_{0} I}{4R}\)
(D) zero
Answer:
(D) zero

Question 23.
Two circular coaxial coils, each of N turns and radius R, are separated by a distance R. They carry equal currents I in the same direction. If the magnetic induction at P, on the common axis and midway between the coils, due to the left hand coil is B, then the total induction at P is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current 72
(A) 2B
(B) B
(C) \(\frac{1}{2}\) B
(D) zero.
Answer:
(A) 2B

Question 24.
A toroid with a circular cross section has a current I in its windings. The total number of windings is N. The total current through an Amperian loop of radius r equal to the mean radius of the toroid is
(A) zero
(B) I
(C) NI
(D) \(\frac{N I}{2 \pi r}\)
Answer:
(C) NI

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 10 Magnetic Fields due to Electric Current

Question 25.
A very long solenoid has 8400 windings and a length of 7 m. If the field inside is 2ir x iO T, the current in the windings is about
0/4π = 10-7 T∙m/A]
(A) 0.42 A
(B) 0.83 A
(C) 4.2 A
(D) 8.3 A.
Answer:
(C) 4.2 A

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation

Question 1.
What is an ideal or perfect gas ? Explain.
Answer:
An ideal or perfect gas is a gas which obeys the gas laws (Boyle’s law, Charles’ law and Gay-Lussac’s law) at all pressures and temperatures. An ideal gas cannot be liquefied by application of pressure or lowering the temperature.

A molecule of an ideal gas is an ideal particle having only mass and velocity. Its structure and size are ignored. Also, intermolecular forces are zero except during collisions.

Question 2.
Derive the ideal gas equation, PV = nRT.
OR
Derive the equation of state for an ideal gas
Answer:
Let P1, V1 and T1 be the pressure, volume and absolute temperature (thermodynamic temperature) of n moles of a gas (assumed to be ideal).
Suppose the gas is heated at constant pressure (P1) so that its temperature becomes T and volume becomes V2. Then by Charles’ law,\(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\) = \(\frac{T}{T_{1}}\).
∴ T = \(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\)T1 … (1)
Now, suppose that the gas is heated at constant volume (V2) so that its temperature becomes T2 and pressure becomes P2. Then by Gay—Lussac’s law,
\(\frac{P_{2}}{P_{1}}\) = \(\frac{T_{2}}{T}\)
∴ T = \(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}\)T2 … (2)
From equations (1) and (2), we get,
\(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\)T1 = \(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}\)T2
∴ \(\frac{P_{2} V_{2}}{T_{2}}\) = \(\frac{P_{1} V_{1}}{T_{1}}\)
When pressure and temperature are constant, V ∝ n. Hence, in general, we can write \(\frac{P V}{T}\) = nR, where R is a proportionality constant, called the universal gas constant.
Thus, PV = nRT for an ideal gas. This is the equation of state for an ideal gas.

[ Note : By Boyle’s law, for a fixed mass of gas at constant temperature, PV = constant. Writing PV ∝ nT, we get PV = nRT.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation

Question 3.
Express the ideal gas equation in terms of
(i) the Avogadro number
(ii) The Boltzmann constant.
Answer:
In the usual notation, PV = nRT;
(i) Now, the number of moles, n = \(\frac{N}{N_{\mathrm{A}}}\), where N is the number of molecules corresponding to n moles of the gas and NA is the Avogadro number.
∴ PV = \(\frac{N}{N_{\mathrm{A}}}\)RT

(ii) PV = \(\frac{N}{N_{\mathrm{A}}}\)RT = N(\(\frac{R}{N_{\mathrm{A}}}\))T
= NkBT, where kB = \(\frac{R}{N_{\mathrm{A}}}\) is the Boltzmann constant.

Question 4.
Express the ideal gas equation in terms of the density of the gas.
Answer:
In the usual notation, PV = nRT. Now, the number of moles n = \(\frac{M}{M_{0}}\), where M is the mass of the gas M0 corresponding to n moles and M0 is the molar mass of the gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 1
is the density of the gas.

Notes :

(1) Charles’ law : At a constant pressure, the volume of a fixed mass of gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature (thermodynamic temperature).
If V is the volume of n moles of an ideal gas at a pressure P and T denotes its absolute temperature, P and n remaining constant,
V ∝ T or \(\frac{V}{T}\) = constant

The law was deduced experimentally in 1787 by Jacques Alexandre Cesar Charles (1746 -1823), French physicist.

From Charles’ law, V = KT, where K is a constant which depends on the mass and pressure. If M and ρ are the mass and mass per unit volume of a gas, V = M/ρ.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 2
Charles’ law was properly established only after the publication in 1802 of more accurate experimental results by Joseph Gay-Lussac (1778-1850), French chemist. Hence, the law is also known as Gay-Lussac’s law.

(2) The Boltzmann constant is the ratio of the molar gas constant (R) to the Avogadro constant (Avogadro number) (NA). Its symbol is kB or k.
kB = 1.380 648 8(13) × 10-23 JK-1

It is a fundamental physical constant relating the average energy of a molecule (at the microscopic level) with temperature (a state variable, at the macroscopic level). It can be called the gas constant per molecule. It is named after Ludwig Eduard Boltzmann (1844-1906), Austrian physicist.

Question 5.
State the basic assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases.
Answer:
The basic assumptions of the kinetic theory of an ideal gas :

  1. A gas of a pure material consists of an extremely large number of identical molecules.
  2. A gas molecule behaves as an ideal particle, i.e., it has mass but its structure and size can be ignored as compared with the intermolecular separation in a dilute gas and the dimensions of the container.
  3. The molecules are in constant random motion with various velocities and obey Newton’s laws of motion.
  4. Intermolecular forces can be ignored on the average so that the only forces between the molecules and the walls of the container are contact forces during collisions. It follows that between successive collisions, a gas molecule travels in a straight line with constant speed.
  5. The collisions are perfectly elastic conserving total momentum and kinetic energy, and the duration of a collision is very small compared to the time interval between successive collisions.

Notes :

(1) The walls of the container holding the gas are assumed to be rigid and infinitely massive so that they do not move. (2) Assumption (2) allows us to ignore intermolecular collisions because if they are truly point like (i.e., of negligible extent) they cannot make contact with each other. Therefore, the only collisions we consider are those with the walls of the container. If these collisions are perfectly elastic [by assumption (5)], they only change the direction of the velocity of a gas molecule and a gas molecule possesses only kinetic energy by assumption
(4). The kinetic theory of gases was developed by Daniel Bernoulli (1700 – 82), Swiss mathematician, Rudolf Clausius (1822 – 88), German theoretical physicist, James Clerk Maxwell (1831-79), British physicist, Ludwig Eduard Boltzmann, Josiah Willard Gibbs (1839-1903), US physical chemist.]

Question 6.
Distinguish between an ideal gas and a real gas.
Answer:

Ideal Gas Real Gas
1. Molecules of an ideal gas behave as ideal particles, i.e., they are like geometrical points without size and structure. 1. Molecules of a real gas have finite size and structure.
2. Molecules of an ideal gas have only translational motion. 2. Polyatomic molecules have in general, translational, vibrational and rotational motion.
3. There are no intermolecular forces in this case. 3. Intermolecular forces are non-zero in this case.
4. An ideal gas cannot be liquefied. 4. A real gas can be liquefied and also solidified in many cases, by application of pressure and reducing temperature.
5. There are no intermolecular collisions in this case. 5. There are intermolecular collisions in this case, and under normal conditions the collision frequency is very high.
6. In the absence of intermolecular forces, the internal energy of the gas is only kinetic. 6. Due to the intermolecular forces, the internal energy of the gas is (potential energy + kinetic energy.)

Question 7.
The pressure exerted by a certain mass of enclosed gas at 300 K is 5 × 104 Pa. What will be the pressure exerted by the gas at 600 K if the volume of the gas is kept constant ?
Answer:
Here, P ∝ T ∴\(\frac{P_{2}}{P_{1}}\) = \(\frac{T_{2}}{T_{1}}\) = \(\frac{600}{300}\) = 2
∴ P2 = 2P1 = 2 × 5 × 104 Pa = 105 Pa is the required pressure.

Question 8.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
16 g of oxygen occupy 0.025 m3 at 27 °C. Find the pressure exerted by it.
[Molar mass of oxygen = 32 g/mol, universal gas constant R = 8.3 J/mol.K]
Solution :
Data : M = 16 g, M0 = 32 g/mol, V = 0.025 m3,
T = 27 °C = (273 + 27) K = 300 K,R = 8.3 J/mol.K
PV = nRT, where number of moles, n = \(\frac{M}{M_{0}}\)
∴ The pressure exerted by the gas,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 3
[Note : 1 Pa = 1 N/m2]

Question 2.
Two tanks of equal volume contain equal masses of oxygen and nitrogen at 127 °C. Find the ratio of
(i) the number of molecules of the gases
(ii) the pressure exerted by the gases in the two tanks. [Molar mass of oxygen = 32 g/mol, molar mass of nitrogen = 28 g/mol]
Solution :
Data : M0 = MN (equal masses of the two gases), equal volumes and the same temperature,
M01 (Oxygen) = 32 g/ mol,
M02(nitrogen) = 28 g/mol
Let N1 and N2 be the number of molecules of oxygen and nitrogen, n1 and n2 the respective number of moles, and NA the Avogadro number.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 4
This is the ratio of the number of oxygen-molecules to that of nitrogen.

(ii) Using the ideal gas equation, PV = nRT,
P1 = n1\(\frac{R T}{V}\) and P2 = n2\(\frac{R T}{V}\) … (3)
since the gases occupy the same volume V and are at the same temperature T.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 5
This is the corresponding pressure ratio.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation

Question 3.
A room is to be prepared for a birthday party filled with helium balloons. Some balloons are filled to occupy 0.240 m3 when the pressure inside them is 0.038 atm and the constant temperature of the room is 70 °F. With what pressure should the larger balloons be filled with helium so that they occupy 0.400 m3 ?
Solution :
Data : V1 = 0.240 m3, P1 = 0.038 atm, temperature = 70 °F, V2 = 0.400 m3
At constant temperature, by Boyle’s law,
P2V2 = P1V1
∴ Hence, the pressure of helium inside the larger balloons,
∴ P2 = \(\frac{P_{1} V_{1}}{V_{2}}\) = \(\frac{(0.038)(0.240)}{0.400}\)
= 0.038 × 0.6 = 0.0228 atm

Question 4.
Determine the pressure exerted by 4 grams of hydrogen occupying a volume of 16 litres at 10 °C. (R = 8.314 J/mol.K, molar mass of hydrogen = 2 g/mol)
Solution :
Data : Mass of hydrogen = 4 grams,
V = 16 litres = 16 × 10-3 m3,
T = 273 + 10 = 283 K, M0 = 2 g/mol,
R = 8.314 J/mol.K
Number of moles (n) = \(\frac{\text { mass }}{M_{0}}\) = \(\frac{4}{2}\) = 2
PV = nRT ∴ P = \(\frac{n R T}{V}\) = \(\frac{2 \times 8.314 \times 283}{16 \times 10^{-3}}\)
P = 2.941 × 105 N/m2
This is the pressure exerted by the gas.

Question 5.
Find the number of molecules per m3 of a gas at STP.
[Given : 1 atmosphere = 1.013 × 105 N/m2 NA = 6.022 × 1023 per mole, R = 8.314 J/mol.K]
Solution :
Data : P = 1.013 × 105 N/m2,
NA = 6.022 × 1023 per mole,
R = 8.314 J/mol.K, T = 273 K
Number of molecules per m3,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 6
= 2.688 × 1025 molecules/m3
[ Note : STP means Standard temperature (0°C) and pressure (1 atmosphere).]

Question 6.
Explain the concept of free path of a gas molecule. Define free path and mean free path. State the expression for mean free path.
Answer:
Molecules of a real gas’ are not point like particles. For simplicity, molecules are assumed to be spherical. Because of their finite size, two molecules collide with each other when they come within a molecular diameter of each other, strictly speaking, within the sphere of influence of each molecule.
The molecular collisions, though perfectly elastic, result in significant changes in the speeds and
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 7
directions of motion of the molecules. Hence, every molecule follows a zigzag path, with abrupt changes in its speed and direction of motion at short and random time intervals. This is called Brownian motion.

Free path : The straight line path of a molecule, i.e., the distance covered by it between successive collisions, is called a free path.

Mean free path : The average distance travelled by a gas molecule between successive collisions, the average being taken over a large number of free paths (or collisions) is called the mean free path.

Maxwell, on the basis of the law of distribution of molecular speeds, obtained the formula for the mean free path (λ) as λ = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2} \pi d^{2}(N / V)}\), where N is the number of molecules in volume V of the gas and d is the diameter of a molecule.

[Note : Brownian motion is named after Robert Brown (1773-1858), British botanist, who, in 1827, observed under the microscope the random movement of pollen grains suspended in water. ]

Question 7.
Express the mean free path of a gas molecule in terms of pressure and temperature.
Answer:
In the usual notation, the mean free path of a gas molecule,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 8

Question 8.
Express the mean free path of a gas molecule in terms of the density of the gas
Answer:
In the usual notation, the mean free path of a gas molecule,
λ = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2} \pi d^{2}(N / V)}\)
Density, ρ, of the gas = \(\frac{\text { mass }}{\text { volume }}\)
= \(\frac{m N}{V}\), where m is the molecular mass.
∴ \(\frac{N}{V}\) = \(\frac{\rho}{m}\)
∴ λ = \(\frac{m}{\sqrt{2} \pi d^{2} \rho}\)

Question 9.
State the factors on which the mean free path of a gas molecule depends.
Answer:
The mean free path of a gas molecule depends upon the number of molecules per unit volume of the gas and molecular diameter.

Question 10.
What happens to the mean free path of a gas molecule if there is

  1. increase in temperature at constant pressure
  2. increase in pressure at constant temperature?

Answer:

  1. The mean free path increases,
  2. The mean free path decreases.

Question 9.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
Calculate the mean free path of a gas molecule if the molecular diameter is 5A and the number of molecules per unit volume of the gas is 2 × 1024 per m3. Compare it with molecular diameter.
Solution :
Data : d = 5Å = 5 × 10-10m, \(\frac{N}{V}\) = 2 × 1024 per m3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 9
[Note : 1Å = 10-10m, 1 nm = 10-9 m = 10 Å]

Question 2.
If the mean free path of a gas molecule under certain conditions is 5000Å and the molecular speed is 500 mIs, find
(i) the time interval between successive collisions
(ii) the collision frequency (number of collisions per unit time) of a gas molecule.
Solution :
Data : λ = 5000 Å = 5000 × 10-10 m
= 5 × 10-7 m, v = 500 m/s
(i) speed (v) = \(\frac{\text { distance }(\lambda)}{\text { time }(T)}\)
∴ The time interval between successive collisions of a gas molecule, T = \(\frac{\lambda}{v}\)
= \(\frac{5 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~m}}{500 \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}}\) = 10-9 s

(ii) The collision frequency (number of collisions per unit time) of a gas molecule,
f = \(\frac{1}{T}\) = \(\frac{1}{10^{-9} \mathrm{~s}}\) = 109 collisions per second

Question 3.
Calculate the mean free path of a gas molecule with diameter 4 Å if the pressure of the gas is 1.013 × 105 N/m2 and the temperature is 27° C. (The Boltzmann constant, kB = 1.38 × 10-23 J/K)
Solution :
Data : d = 4 Å = 4 × 10-10m, P = 1.013 × 105 N/m2, T = (273 + 27) K = 300 KB = 1.38 × 10-23 J/K
The mean free path of a gas molecule,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 10

Question 4.
Find the mean free path of a gas molecule if the diameter of a molecule is 4 A, the mass of a molecule is 5.316 × 10-26 kg and density of the gas is 1.429 kg/m3.
Solution :
Data : d = 4 Å = 4 × 10-10 m, m = 5.316 × 10-26 kg, ρ = 1.429 kg/m3
The mean free path of a gas molecule,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 11

Question 5.
The mean free path of a gas molecule is 60 nm when the density of the gas is 1.2 kg/m3. What will be the mean free path if the density is reduced to 0.8 kg/m3 ?
Solution :
Data : λ1 = 60 nm, ρ1 = 1.2 kg/m3, ρ2 = 0.8 kg/m3
λ = \(\frac{m}{\sqrt{2} \pi d^{2} \rho}\)
∴ \(\frac{\lambda_{2}}{\lambda_{1}}\) = \(\frac{\rho_{1}}{\rho_{2}}\) as m and d are not changed.
∴ λ2 = \(\lambda_{1} \frac{\rho_{1}}{\rho_{2}}\) = 60\(\left(\frac{1.2}{0.8}\right)\) nm = 90 nm
This is the required quantity.

Question 10.
What is the origin of pressure exerted by a gas on the walls of a container?
Answer:
The pressure exerted by a gas on the walls of a container results from the momentum transfer during the collisions of the gas molecules with the walls. The normal force on a wall by all the molecules, per unit wall area, is the gas pressure on the wall.

Question 11.
Define
(1) the mean (or average) speed
(2) the mean square speed
(3) the root-mean-square speed of gas molecules. State the expressions for the same.
Answer:
(1) Mean (or average) speed of molecules of a gas : The mean speed of gas molecules is defined as the arithmetic mean of the speeds of all molecules of the gas at a given temperature.

(2) Mean square speed of molecules of a gas : The mean square speed of gas molecules is defined as the arithmetic mean of the squares of the speeds of all molecules of the gas at a given temperature.

(3) Root-mean-square speed of molecules of a gas : The root-mean-square (rms) speed of gas molecules is defined as the square root of the arithmetic mean of the squares of the speeds of all molecules of the gas at a given temperature.

If there are N molecules in an enclosed pure gas and v1, v2, v3, …, vN are the speeds of different molecules,

  1. the mean speed, \(\bar{v}\) = \(\frac{v_{1}+v_{2}+\ldots+v_{N}}{N}\)
  2. the mean square speed,
    \(\overline{v^{2}}\) = \(\frac{v_{1}^{2}+v_{2}^{2}+\ldots+v_{N}^{2}}{N}\)
  3. the rms speed, vrms = \(\sqrt{\overline{v^{2}}}\)

[Note : The mean square velocity is numerically equal to the mean square speed. Similarly, the rms velocity is numerically equal to the rms speed. But in random motion, the mean velocity would be statistically zero, but the mean speed cannot be zero. ]

Question 12.
On the basis of the kinetic theory of gases, derive an expression for the pressure exerted by the gas.
Answer:
The pressure exerted by a gas on the walls of a container results from the momentum transfer during the collisions of the gas molecules with the walls. The normal force on the wall by all the molecules, per unit wall area, is the gas pressure on the wall.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 12
Consider a very dilute gas at a steady-state temperature enclosed in a cubical container of side L. The coordinate axes are aligned with the edges of this cube, as shown in above figure. Suppose that there are N molecules in the container, each of mass m. Consider a molecule moving with velocity \(\).
\(\overrightarrow{v_{1}}\) = \(v_{1 x} \hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + \(v_{1 y} \hat{\mathrm{j}}\) + \(v_{1 z} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) …. (1)

where v, v1x and v1z are the velocity components along the x-, y- and z-axes, respectively, so that
\(v_{1}^{2}\) = \(v_{1 x}^{2}\) + \(v_{1 y}^{2}\) + \(v_{1 z}^{2}\)
The change in momentum of the molecule on collision with the right wall
= final momentum – initial momentum
= (-m|v1x|) – m|v1x| = -2m|v1x|
Assuming the collision to be elastic, the change in momentum of the right wall due to this collision is 2m|v1x|.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 13
Since the distance between the right and left walls is L, the time between successive collisions with the right wall is,
∆t = \(\frac{2 L}{\left|v_{1 x}\right|}\)
Therefore, the frequency with which the molecule collides with the right wall is \(\frac{\left|v_{1 x}\right|}{2 L}\).

∴ Rate of change of momentum of the right wall = (change in momentum in one collision)
(frequency of collision)
= (2m|v1x|).\(\frac{\left|v_{1 x}\right|}{2 L}\) = \(\frac{m v_{1 x}^{2}}{L}\) …. (2)
By Newton’s second law of motion, this is the force f1x exerted by the molecule on the right wall.
Thus, the net force on the right wall by all the N molecules is
Fx = f1x + f2x + … + fNx
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 14
The pressure Px exerted by all the molecules on a wall perpendicular to the x-axis is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 17
where V = L3 is the volume of the container.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 18
As pressure is the same in all directions,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 19
By definition, the mean square speed of the gas molecules is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 20
where vrms is the root-mean-square speed of molecules of the gas at a given temperature. Equation (12) gives the pressure exerted by an ideal gas in terms of its density and the root-mean-square speed of its molecules.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation

Question 13.
Assuming the expression for the pressure P exerted by an ideal gas, prove that the kinetic energy per unit volume of the gas is \(\frac{3}{2}\)P.
Answer:
According to the kinetic theory of gases, the pressure P exerted by the gas is
P = \(\frac{1}{3} \rho v_{r m s}^{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{3} \frac{M}{V} v_{\mathrm{rms}}^{2}\)
where vrms is the rms speed (root-mean-square speed) of the gas molecules; M, V and ρ are the mass, volume and density of the gas, respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 21
Thus, the kinetic energy per unit volume of an ideal gas is \(\frac{3}{2}\)P.

Question 14.
What is the kinetic energy per unit volume of a gas if the gas pressure is 105 N/m2?
Answer:
Kinetic energy per unit volume of a gas
= \(\frac{3}{2}\)P = \(\frac{3}{2}\) × 105 = 1.5 × 105 J/m3.

Question 15.
Assuming the expression for the pressure exerted by an ideal gas, prove that (1) the kinetic energy per mole of the gas = \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT (2) the rms speed of a gas molecule, urms = \(\sqrt{3 R T / M_{0}}\).
OR
Assuming the expression for the pressure exerted by an ideal gas, show that the rms speed of a gas molecule is directly proportional to the square root of its absolute temperature.
OR
Show that the rms velocity of gas molecules is directly proportional to the square root of its absolute temperature.
Answer:
According to the kinetic theory of gases, the pressure P exerted by a gas is
ρ = \(\frac{1}{3} \rho v_{\mathrm{rms}}^{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{3} \frac{M}{V} v_{\mathrm{rms}}^{2}\)
∴ PV = \(\frac{1}{3} m v_{\mathrm{rms}}^{2}\)
where vrms is the rms speed (root-mean-square speed) of the gas molecules; M, V and ρ are the mass,
volume and density of the gas, respectively. If there are n moles of the gas and M0 is the molar mass,
M = nM0, so that PV = \(\frac{1}{3} n M_{0} v_{\mathrm{rms}}^{2}\) … (1)
The equation of state of an ideal gas is
PV = nRT … (2)
where T is the absolute temperature of the gas and R is the molar gas constant.
From Eqs. (1) and (2), we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 15
where the term on the left-hand side is the kinetic energy of one mole of the gas.
∴ Kinetic energy per mole of the gas = \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT… (5)
From Eq. (3),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 16
In Eq. (6), R and M0 are constant so that vrms ∝ \(\sqrt{T}\). Thus, the rms speed of a gas molecule is directly proportional to the square root of the absolute temperature of the gas.

Question 16.
The rms speed of oxygen molecules at a certain temperature is 400 m/s. What is the rms speed of nitrogen molecules at the same temperature ?
[M01 (oxygen) = 32 × 10-3 kg/mol,
M02 (nitrogen) = 28 × 10-3 kg/mol]
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 22

Question 17.
The kinetic energy per unit mass of a certain gas at 300 K is 1.3 × 105 J/kg. What will be the kinetic energy per unit mass of the gas at 600 K ?
Answer:
KE per unit mass of a gas (KE/M) ∝ T
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 23
This is the required quantity.

Question 18.
Prove that the kinetic energy per molecule of an ideal gas is \(\frac{3}{2}\)KBT.
Give the interpretation of temperature according to the kinetic theory of gases.
Answer:
Consider n moles of an ideal gas in a container of volume V. If m is the mass of a gas molecule and vrms is the root-mean-square speed of the gas molecules then, by the kinetic theory, the pressure exerted by the gas is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 24
Therefore, the kinetic energy per molecule of an ideal gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature.

This equation is the relation between the kinetic per molecule of a gas and the absolute temperature which is the macroscopic parameter of the gas. The absolute temperature of a gas is a measure of the kinetic energy per molecule of the gas. This result is called the kinetic intepretation of temperature, i.e., the interpretation of temperature according to the kinetic theory of gases.

Question 19.
The rms speed of molecules of a certain gas at 300 K is 400 m/s. What will be the rms speed if the gas is heated to 600 K?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 25
gives the required rms speed.

Question 20.
State Boyle’s law. Deduce it on the basis of the kinetic theory of an ideal gas.
OR
Deduce Boyle’s law using the expression for pressure exerted by an ideal gas.
Answer:
Boyle’s law : At a constant temperature, the pressure exerted by a fixed mass of gas is inversely proportional to its volume. If P and V denote the pressure and volume of a fixed mass of gas, then, PV = constant at a constant temperature, for a fixed mass of gas.
According to the kinetic theory of gases, the pressure exerted by the gas is
P = \(\frac{1}{3} \frac{N m v_{\mathrm{rms}}^{2}}{V}\)
where N is the number of molecules of the gas, m is the mass of a single molecule, vrms is the rms speed of the molecules and V is the volume occupied by the gas.
∴ PV = (\(\frac{1}{2}\)mv2rms) × \(\frac{2}{3}\) N
= (KE of a gas molecule) \(\frac{2}{3}\) N … (1)

For a fixed mass of gas, N is constant. Further, intermolecular forces are ignored so that the corresponding potential energy of the gas molecules may be assumed to be zero. Therefore, \(\frac{1}{2} m v_{\mathrm{rms}}^{2}\) is the total energy of a gas molecule and N\(\left(\frac{1}{2} m v_{\mathrm{rms}}^{2}\right)\) is the total energy of the gas molecules, which is proportional to the absolute temperature of the gas. Then, the right-hand side of EQ. (1) will be constant if its temperature is constant. Hence, it follows that PV = constant for a fixed mass of gas at constant temperature, which is Boyle’s law.

Question 21.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
The speeds of five molecules are 200 m/s, 300 m/s, 400 m/s, 500 m/s and 600 m/s respectively. Find
(i) the mean speed
(ii) the mean square speed
(iii) the root mean square speed of the molecules.
Solution :
Data : v1 = 200 m/s, v2 = 300 m/s, v3 = 400 m/s,. v5 = 500 m/s, v6 = 600 m/s
(i) Mean speed,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 26
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 27

Question 2.
Find the number of molecules in 1 cm3 of oxygen at a pressure of 105 N/m2 if the rms speed of oxygen molecules is 426 m/s. What is the temperature of the gas? (Mass of an oxygen molecule = 5.28 × 10-26 kg, kB = 1.38 × 10-23 J/K)
Solution :
Data : m = 5.28 × 10-26 kg, vrms = 426 m/s,
V = 1 cm3 = 10-6 m3, P = 105 Pa, kB = 1.38 × 10-23 J/K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 28
This is the number of molecules in 1 cm3 of oxygen under given conditions.

(ii) PV = nRT
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 29
This is the required temperature.

Question 3.
A cylinder filled with hydrogen at 400 K exerts a pressure of 3 atmospheres. If hydrogen is replaced by an equal mass of helium at the same temperature, find the
(i) relative number of molecules of hydrogen and helium occupying the cylinder
(ii) pressure exerted by helium. (Molar mass of hydrogen = 2 g/mol, molar mass of helium = 4 g/mol)
Solution:
Let the subscript 1 refer to hydrogen and the subscript 2 to helium.
From the data in the example,
T = 400 K, P1 = 3 atmospheres, molar mass of hydrogen, M1 = 2 g/mol
Molar mass of helium, M2 = 4 g/mol
∴ \(\frac{M_{2}}{M_{1}}\) = \(\frac{4}{2}\) = 2

(i) Since both the gases have the same mass, N1m1 = N2m2, where is the mass of a molecule of hydrogen and m2 is the mass of a molecule of helium.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 30
∴ P2 = \(\frac{2}{3}\) × \(\frac{N_{2}}{V}\) × \(\left(\frac{1}{2} m_{2} v_{2 \mathrm{rms}}^{2}\right)\)
As the temperature is the same in both the cases, the average kinetic energy of gas molecules will be the same in both the cases.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 31
Pressure exerted by helium,
P2 = 1.5 atmospheres

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation

Question 4.
Calculate the rms speed of oxygen molecules at 127 °C. (Density of oxygen at STP = 1.429 kg/m3 and one atmosphere = 1.013 × 105 N/m2)
Solution:
By the data, ρ = 1.429 kg/m3,
P = 1.013 × 105N/m2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 32
The root mean square speed of oxygen molecules at 127° C = 558.1 m/s.

Question 5.
At what temperature will helium molecules have the same rms speed as that of hydrogen molecules at STP ? (Molar mass of hydrogen = 2 g/mol, molar mass of helium = 4 g/mol)
Solution :
Data : M01 (hydrogen) = 2 g/mol
M02 (helium) = 4 g/mol, T1 (hydrogen) = 273 K,
vrms (hydrogen) = v2rms (helium)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 33
The temperature of helium = 546 K = 273 °C

Question 6.
Compute the temperature at which the rms speed of nitrogen molecules is 831 m/s. [Universal gas constant, R = 8310 J/kmol K, molar mass of nitrogen = 28 kg/kmol]
Solution :
Data : vrms = 831 m/s, R = 8310 J/kmol.K,
M0 = 28 kg/kmol
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 34
This is the required temperature.

Question 7.
If the rms speed of oxygen molecules at STP is 460 m/s, determine the rms speed of hydrogen molecules at STP. [Molar mass of oxygen = 32 g/mol, molar mass of hydrogen = 2 g/mol]
Solution :
Data : vrms (oxygen) = 460 m/s, same temperature, M01 (oxygen) = 32 × 10-3 kg/mol,
M02 (hydrogen) = 2 × 10-3 kg/mol
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 35
This is the rms speed of hydrogen molecules at STP.

Question 8.
Calculate the rms speed of helium atoms at 27 °C. [Density of helium at STP = 0.1785 kg/m3, one atmosphere = 1.013 × 105 Pa]
Solution :
Data : ρ = 0.1785 kg/m3, P = 1.013 × 105 Pa,
T0 = 273 K, T = (273 + 27) = 300 K
The rms speed of helium atoms at STP,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 36

Question 9.
Determine the pressure of oxygen at 0°C if the density of oxygen at STP = 1.44 kg/m3 and the rms speed of the molecules at STP = 456.4 m/s.
Solution :
Data : ρ = 1.44 kg/m3, vrms = 456.4 m/s
The pressure of oxygen,
P = \(\frac{1}{3} \rho v_{\mathrm{rms}}^{2}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\)(1.44)(456.4)2 = 9.98 × 104 Pa

Question 10.
Calculate the rms speed of hydrogen molecules at 373.2K. [Molar mass of hydrogen, M0 = 2 × 10-3 kg/mol, R = 8.314 J/mol.K]
Solution :
Data : T = 373.2 K, M0 = 2 × 10-3 kg/mol,
R = 8.314 J/mol.K
The rms speed of hydrogen molecules,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 37
= 2157 m/s = 2.157 km/s

Question 11.
Find the rms speed of hydrogen molecules if its pressure is 105 Pa and density is 0.09 kg/m3.
Solution :
Data : ρ = 0.09 kg/m3, P = 105 Pa
The rms speed of hydrogen molecules,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 38

Question 12.
The temperature of matter in interstellar space has an average value of about 3 K. Find the rms speed of a proton in the space. [mp = 1.673 × 10-27 kg, kB = 1.38 × 10-23 J/K]
Solution :
Data : T = 3 K, mp = 1.673 × 10-27 kg, kB = 1.38 × 10-23 J/K
The rms speed of a proton in interstellar space,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 39

Question 13.
Find the temperature at which
(i) the rms speed
(ii) the average kinetic energy of the molecules of an ideal gas are double their respective values at STP.
Solution:
Data : T0 = 273 K, v = 2v0 (rms speeds),
KE = 2KE0 (average kinetic energies)
(i) vrms ∝ \(\sqrt{\mathrm{T}}\) for a given gas.
∴\(\frac{v}{v_{\mathrm{o}}}\) = \(\sqrt{\frac{T}{T_{0}}}\)
∴\(\sqrt{\frac{T}{T_{0}}}\) = 2
∴ Temperature, T = 4T0 = 4 × 273 = 1092 K

(ii) Average Kinetic Energy ∝ T
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{KE}}{\mathrm{KE}_{0}}\) = \(\frac{T}{T_{0}}\)
∴ Temperature, T = 2T0 = 2 × 273 = 546 K

Question 14.
At what temperature is the rms speed of an argon atom equal to that of a helium atom at – 20 °C ? [Atomic mass of Ar = 39.9 amu, atomic mass of He = 4.0 amu]
Solution :
Data : T1 = -20 °C = 273 – 20 = 253 K,
M01 (He) = 4 amu, M02 (Ar) = 39.9 amu
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 40
∴ T2 = \(\frac{M_{02}}{M_{01}}\) T1 = \(\frac{39.9}{4} \times 253\)
= 2523 K
This is the required temperature.

Question 15.
Calculate the kinetic energy
(i) per mole
(ii) per unit mass
(iii) per molecule of nitrogen at STP. [Molar mass of nitrogen = 28 × 10-3 kg/mol, R = 8.314 J/mol.K, kB = 1.38 × 10-23 J/K]
Solution :
Data : T = 273 K, M0 = 28 × 10-3 kg/mol,
R = 8.314 J/mol.K, kB = 1.38 × 10-23 J/K
(i) The KE per mole = \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT
= \(\frac{3}{2}\)(8.314)(273) = 3.404 × 103 J/mol

(ii) The KE per unit mass = \(\frac{3}{2} \frac{R T}{M_{0}}\)
= \(\frac{3}{2} \cdot \frac{(8.314)(273)}{28 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 1.216 × 105 J/kg

(iii) The KE per molecule
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 41

Question 16.
Calculate the average molecular kinetic energy
(i) per kilomole
(ii) per kilogram of oxygen at 27 °C. [R = 8310 J/kmol.K, Avogadro’s number = 6.02 × 1026 molecules/kmol]
Solution :
Data : T = 273 + 27 = 300 K, M0 = 32 kg / kmol,
R = 8310 J/kmol.K
(i) The average molecular kinetic energy per kilomole of oxygen
= \(\frac{3}{2}\) RT = \(\frac{3}{2}\) (8310) (300)
= 4155 × 900 = 3739 × 1000
= 3.739 × 106 J/kmol

(ii) The average molecular kinetic energy per unit mass of oxygen
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 42

Question 17.
Calculate the kinetic energy of 10 grams of argon molecules at 127 °C. [Universal gas constant R = 8310 J/kmol.K, atomic weight of argon = 40]
Solution:
Data : M = 10 g = 10 × 10-3 kg, T = 273 + 127 = 400 K,R = 8310 J/kmol.K, M0 = 40 kg/kmol Kinetic energy per unit mass
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 43
= 15 × 8310 = 1.247 × 105 J/kg
∴ The kinetic energy of 1 × 10-3 kg of argon at 127°C = 1.247 × 105 × 10 × 10-3
= 1247 J

Question 18.
Calculate the kinetic energy of 2 kg of nitrogen at 300 K. [Molar mass of nitrogen = 28 × 10-3 kg/mol, R = 8.314 J/mol.K]
Solution :
Data : Mass of nitrogen, M = 2 kg, T = 300 K,
M0 = 28 × 10-3 kg/mol, R = 8.314 J/mol.K
Kinetic energy per kg = \(\frac{3}{2} \frac{R T}{M_{0}}\)
∴ The kinetic energy of 2 kg of nitrogen
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 44

Question 19.
The kinetic energy of 1 kg of oxygen at 300 K is 1.169 × 105 J. Find the kinetic energy of 4 kg of oxygen at 400 K.
Solution :
Data : Masses of oxygen, M1 = 1 kg and M2 = 4 kg, T1 = 300 K, T2 = 400 K, kinetic energy,
K1 = 1.169 × 105 J
Kinetic energy of a given mass (M) of a gas,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 45
This is the kinetic energy of 4 kg of oxygen at 400 K.

Question 20.
The kinetic energy per unit mass of nitrogen at 300 K is 2.5 × 106J/kg. Find the kinetic energy of 4 kg of oxygen at 600 K. [Molar mass of nitrogen = 28 kg/kmol, molar mass of oxygen = 32 kg/kmol]
Solution:
Data : T1 = 300 K, K1 = 2.5 × 106 J/kg,
M1 (nitrogen) = 1 kg, M2(oxygen) = 4 kg,
M01 (nitrogen) = 28 kg/kmol, T2 = 600 K,
M02(oxygen) = 32 kg/kmol
Kinetic energy of a given mass M of a gas,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 46
This is the required quantity.

Question 21.
The pressure of a gas in a 0.1 litre container is 200 kPa and the KE per molecule is 6 × 10-21J. Find the number of gas molecules in the container. How many moles are in the container? [Avogadro number = 6.022 × 1023 mol-1]
Solution:
Data : V = 0.1 litre = 10-4 m3, P = 200 kPa
= 2 × 105 Pa, KE per molecule = 6 × 10-21 J,
NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol-1
The KE per molecule of a gas = \(\frac{3}{2}\)kBT
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 47

Question 22.
At what temperature will the average kinetic energy of a gas be exactly half of its value at NTP ?
Solution :
Data : KE2/KE1 = 1/2, T1 = 273K
Average molecular kinetic energy per mole of the gas = \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 48
This is the required temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation

Question 23.
Find the kinetic energy per unit volume of nitrogen at a pressure of 76 cm of mercury. Hence, find the kinetic energy of 10 cm3 of the gas under the same condition. Take ρ (mercury) = 13.6 g/cm3 and g = 9.8 m/s2.
Solution :
Data :h = 76 cm = 0.76 m, ρ = 13.6 g/cm3 = 13.6 × 103 kg/m3, g = 9.8 m/s2,
V = 10 cm3 = 10 × 10-6 cm3

(i) The kinetic energy per unit volume of nitrogen
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 49
(ii) The kinetic energy of 10 cm3 of the gas = \(\frac{3}{2}\) PV= (1.519 × 105) (10 × 10-6)
= 1.519 J

Question 22.
What is meant by degrees of freedom ? Explain the degrees of freedom for
(i) an atom
(ii) a diatomic molecule.
Answer:
The concept of degrees of freedom as used in the kinetic theory specifies the number of independent ways in which an atom or molecule can take up energy. It depends only on the possibilities of motion of the atom or molecule.

Gas molecules of all types have x-, y- and z-components of velocity that are entirely independent of one another. Thus, they have three ways to move in translation, i.e., three degrees of translational freedom.

An atom (or a monatomic molecule, i.e., a molecule containing a single atom, e.g., He) treated as a point mass, has no rotational motion. Hence, it has only three degrees of translational freedom.

A diatomic molecule, in addition to translation, can rotate about axes perpendicular to the line connecting the atoms, as shown in below figure, but not about that line itself. Therefore, it has only two degrees of rotational freedom.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 50

Further, the two atoms may oscillate alternately toward and away from one another along the line joining them, as if connected by a spring. As a, i harmonic oscillator can have potential energy as well as kinetic energy, a diatomic molecule is regarded to have two degrees of vibrational freedom. Thus, at high enough temperatures, a diatomic molecule has seven degrees of freedom : three of translation, and two each of rotation and vibration.

Notes :

(1) That a monatomic gas molecule does not have rotational energy, and that a diatomic molecule does not have a third rotational degree of freedom corresponding to rotation about the line joining the atoms, are explained by quantum theory.

(2) Also according to quantum theory, rotational and oscillatory motions begin at certain higher temperatures. For a molecule of a diatomic gas (like hydrogen), only translation is possible at very low temperatures (below about 100 K). As the temperature increases, rotational motion can begin; so that, at room temperature, a diatomic molecule has only five degrees of freedom-behaving like a pair of atoms rigidly connected like a dumbbell. Oscillatory motion can begin only at quite high temperatures substantially above room temperature (usually of the order of thousands of kelvin).

Question 23.
Derive Mayer’s relation between the molar specific heat of a gas at constant pressure and that at constant volume.
OR
Using the first law of thermodynamics, show that for an ideal gas, the difference between the molar specific heat capacities at constant pressure and at constant volume is equal to the molar gas constant R.
Answer:
Consider a cylinder of volume V containing n moles of an ideal gas at pressure P, fitted with a piston of area A. Suppose, the gas is heated at constant pressure which raises its temperature by dT. The gas exerts a total force F = PA on the piston which moves outward a small distance dx.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 51
dW = Fdx = PAdx = PdV … (1)
where Adx = dV is the increase in volume of the gas during the expansion. dW is the work done by the gas on the surroundings as a result of the expansion. If the heat supplied to the gas is dQP and the increase in its internal energy is dE then, by the first law of thermodynamics,
dQP = dE + dW=dE + PdV
If CP is the molar specific heat capacity of the gas at constant pressure, dQP = nCP dT.
∴ nCPdT = dE + PdV …(2)

On the other hand, if the gas was heated at constant volume (instead of at constant pressure) from the initial state such that its temperature increases by the same amount dT, then dW=0. Since the internal energy of an ideal gas depends only on the temperature, the increase in internal would again be dE. If dQv was the heat supplied to the gas in this case, by the first law of thermodynamics and the definition of molar specific heat capacity at constant volume (CV),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 52
This is Mayer’s relation between CP and CV.

Here, heat and work are expressed in the same units. If heat is expressed in calorie or kilo calorie and work is expressed in erg or joule, the above relation becomes
CP – CV = \(\frac{R}{J}\) …. (7)
Where J is the mechanical equivalent of heat.

Question 24.
Express Mayer’s relation in terms of the principal specific heats, SP and SV.
Answer:
Mayer’s relation : CP – CV = R. Let M0 = molar mass of the gas, SP = specific heat of the gas at constant pressure and SV = specific heat of the gas at constant volume.

Now, CP = M0SP and CV = M0SV
∴ M0Sp – M0SV = R
∴ SP – SV = \(\frac{R}{M_{0}}\) when heat and work are expressed
in the same units. If heat is expressed in calorie or kilo calorie and work is expressed in erg or joule, we
get,
Sp – Sv = \(\frac{R}{M_{0} J}\), where J is the mechanical equivalent of heat.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 53

Question 25.
Explain : Each translational and rotational degree of freedom contributes only one quadratic term to the energy but one vibrational mode contributes two quadratic terms.
Answer:
With three translational degrees of freedom, the average translational energy per molecule of a gas is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 54
where m is the mass of the molecule and vx, vy and vz are the x-, y- and z-components of the molecular velocity.

A diatomic molecule has two rotational degrees of freedom. If ω1 and ω2 are the angular speeds about the two axes and I1 and I2 are the corresponding moments of inertia, the rotational energy of a diatomic molecule,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 55
A diatomic molecule is regarded to have two degrees of vibrational freedom for the vibrational mode in which the two atoms vibrate relative to, and without affecting, the centre of mass of the molecule. Comparing this system with a vibrating body of mass m connected to a spring of force constant k, the vibrational energy has two terms corresponding to the kinetic and potential energies :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 56
where x is the displacement from the mean position.

From Eqs. (1), (2) and (3), each translational and rotational degree of freedom contributes only one quadratic term to the average energy of a gas molecule while one vibrational mode contributes two quadratic terms.

[ Note : For a gas at an absolute temperature T, the
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 57

Question 26.
Explain the degrees of freedom a polyatomic molecule can have. Hence write the expressions for
(i) the energy per molecule
(ii) the energy per mole
(iii) CV
(iv) CP
(v) the adiabatic constant, for a polyatomic gas.
Answer:
A polyatomic molecule has three degrees of translational freedom like any particle. Each molecule can also rotate about its centre of mass with an angular velocity components along each of the three axes. Therefore, each molecule has three degrees of rotational freedom. Additionally, if the molecule is soft at high enough temperatures, it can vibrate easily with many different frequencies, say, f, because there are many interatomic bonds. Hence, it has 2f degrees of vibrational freedom. Then, according to the law of equipartition of energy, for each degree of freedom of translation and rotation,
the molecule has the average energy \(\frac{1}{2}\)kBT, but for each frequency of vibration the average energy is kBT, since each vibration involves potential energy and kinetic energy. kB is the Boltzmann constant and T is the thermodynamic temperature.
(i) The energy per molecule
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 58
[Note : As /increases, y decreases.]

Question 27.
The top of a cloud of smoke holds together for hours. Why?
Answer:
According to the law of equipartition of energy, the smoke particles have the same average kinetic energy of random motion as the air molecules. But smoke particles have a much larger mass than air molecules and therefore move slowly, i.e., the average speed of diffusion of smoke particles is small. Hence, in the absence of significant turbulence in the atmosphere, a smoke cloud is relatively stable.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation

Question 28.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
Find the kinetic energy per molecule of a monatomic gas at 300 K.
Solution :
Data : T = 300 K, kB = 1.38 × 10-23 J/K
The kinetic energy per molecule of the gas
= \(\frac{3}{2}\)kBT
= \(\frac{3}{2}\) (1.38 × 10-23) (300) J/molecule
= (4.5) (1.38 × 10-21) J/molecule
= 6.21 × 10-21 J/molecule
[Note : Here, the number of degrees of freedom is 3.]

Question 2.
Find the kinetic energy of two moles of a mon-atomic gas at 400 K.
Solution :
Data : n = 2, T = 400 K, R = 8.314 J/mol.K
The kinetic energy of two moles of the gas
= \(\frac{3}{2}\)nRT = \(\frac{3}{2}\)(2) (8.314) (400) J
= (12) (8.314 × 102) J
= 9.977 × 103 J.

Question 3.
Find the kinetic energy of 10 kg of a monatomic gas at 500 K if the molar mass of the gas is 4 × 10-3 kg/mol.
Solution :
Data : M = 10 kg, M0 = 4 × 10-3 kg/mol, T = 500 K, R = 8.314 J/mol.K.
The kinetic energy of 10 kg of the gas
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 59

Question 4.
Find the kinetic energy per molecule of a diatomic gas at 300 K.
Solution :
Data : T = 300 K, kB = 1.38 × 10-23 J/K
The kinetic energy per molecule of the gas
= \(\frac{5}{2}\) kBT = \(\frac{5}{2}\)(1.38 × 10-23) (300) J/molecule
= (7.5) (1.38 × 10-23) J/molecule
= 1.035 × 10-22 J/molecule.
[Note : Here, the number of degrees of freedom is 5.]

Question 5.
Find the kinetic energy of four moles of a diatomic gas at 400 K.
Solution :
Data : n = 4, T = 400 K, R = 8.314 J/mol.K
The kinetic energy of four moles of the gas
= \(\frac{5}{2}\)nRT = \(\left(\frac{5}{2}\right)\) (8.314) (400) J
= (40)(8.314 × 102) J
= 3.326 × 104 J

Question 6.
Find the kinetic energy of 56 kg of a diatomic gas at 500 K if the molar mass of the gas is 28 × 10-3 kg/mol.
Solution :
Data : M = 56 kg, M0 = 28 × 10-3 kg/mol, T = 500 K, R = 8.314 J/mol.K
The kinetic energy of 56 kg of the gas
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 60
= 25(8.314 × 105)
= 2.079 × 107 J

Question 7.
When two kilocalories of heat are supplied to a system, the internal energy of the system increases by 5030 J and the work done by the gas against the external pressure is 3350 J. Calculate J, the mechanical equivalent of heat.
Solution :
Data : From the data in the example,
dQ = 2 kcal, dE = 5030 J, dW = 3350 J.
dQ = \(\frac{d E+d W}{J}\), where J = mechanical equivalent of heat
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 61

Question 8.
Find the increase in the internal energy of a gas of mass 10 grams when it is heated from 300 K to 305 K.
Given : SV = 0.16 kcal/kg.K, J = 4186 J/kcal
Solution :
Data : M = 10 grams = 10 × 10-3 kg,
SV = 0.16 kcal/kg.K, J = 4186 J/kcal
Rise in the temperature of the gas,
∆T = 305 – 300 = 5K
∆E = J SV M∆T = (4186)(0.16)(10 × 10-3) × (5) J
= 33.49 J
The increase in the internal energy of the gas, ∆E = 33.49 J

Question 9.
The molar specific heat of helium at constant volume is 12.5 J/mol.K. Find its molar specific heat at constant pressure. Take R = 8.31 J/mol.K.
Solution :
Data : CV = 12.5 J/mol.K, R = 8.31 J/mol.K
The molar specific heat of helium at constant press-ure,
CP = CV + R = (12.5 + 8.31) J/mol.K
= 20.81 J/mol.K.

Question 10.
Find the principal specific heats of helium and hence the universal gas constant. Given : CP = 20.81 J/mol.K, CV = 12.5 J/mol.K. M0 (He) = 4 × 10-3 kg/mol.
Solution :
Data : CP = 20.81 J/mol.K, CV = 12.5 J/mol.K,
M0 = 4 × 10-3 kg/mol.
(i) The specific heat of helium at constant pressure,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 62
[Note : R = CP – CV = (20.81 – 12.5) J/mol.K = 8.31 J/mol.K. The difference between the two values of R is due to the approximation involved in calculation.]

Question 11.
The molar specific heat of nitrogen at constant volume is 4.952 cal/mol.K and that at constant pressure is 6.933 cal/mol.K. Find the mechanical equivalent of heat. Take R = 8.31 J/mol.K.
Solution :
Data : CV = 4.952 cal/mol.K, CP = 6.933 cal/mol.K, R = 8.31 J/mol.K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 63

Question 29.
Name and define the modes of heat transfer.
Answer:
The three modes of heat transfer are conduction, convection and radiation.

  1. Conduction is the mode of heat transfer within a body or between two bodies in contact, from a region of high temperature to a region of lower temperature without the migration of the particles of the medium.
  2. Convection is the mode of heat transfer from one part of a fluid to another by the migration of the particles of the fluid.
  3. Radiation is the mode of heat transfer by electromagnetic waves / quanta.

Question 30.
What is thermal radiation or heat radiation? State its characteristic properties.
Answer:
Radiation is the mode of heat transfer or in general, energy transfer by electromagnetic waves / quanta. Thermal radiation or heat radiation is the radiation produced by thermal agitation of the particles of a body, and its spectrum, i.e., frequency distribution or wavelength distribution, is continuous from the far infrared to the extreme ultraviolet region depending on the temperature of the body.

Properties :

  1. Thermal radiations are electromagnetic waves/ quanta extending from the far infrared to the extreme ultraviolet region. In this spectrum, the infrared waves (wavelengths ranging from about 700 nm to about 1 mm) are sensed as heat.
  2. They have the same speed in free space as that of light, nearly 3 × 108 m/s, which makes radiation the most rapid mode of heat transfer.
  3. They exhibit all the optical phenomena of light, viz., reflection, absorption, refraction, interference, diffraction and polarization.
  4. Radiation incident on a body is, in general, partly reflected, partly, absorbed and partly transmitted.
  5. Thermal radiation obeys the inverse-square law of intensity, i.e., the intensity at a point is inversely proportional to the square of its distance from a point source of radiation.

Question 31.
Define the coefficients of absorption, reflection and transmission. Obtain the relation between them.
Answer:

  1. The coefficient of absorption or absorptive power or absorptivity of a body is the ratio of the quantity of radiant energy absorbed by the body to the quantity of radiant energy incident on the body in the same time.
  2. The coefficient of reflection or reflectance or reflective power of the surface of a body is the ratio of the quantity of radiant energy reflected by the surface to the quantity of radiant energy incident on the surface in the same time.
  3. The coefficient of transmission or transmittance or transmissive power of a body is the ratio of the quantity of radiant energy transmitted by the body to the quantity of radiant energy incident on the body in the same time.

Let Q be the quantity of radiant energy incident on a body and Qa, Qr and Qt be the quantities of radiant energy absorbed, reflected and transmitted by the body respectively, in the same time. Since the total energy is conserved, we have,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 64
Hence, a + r + t = 1
This is the required relation.

[Note : The coefficients of absorption, reflection and transmission are, respectively, the measures of the ability of the body or material to absorb, reflect or transmit radiation.

They are dimensionless quantities and have no units. They depend on the material and physical conditions of the body as well as on the frequency of the incident radiation.]

Question 32.
If for a certain body, under certain conditions, the coefficient of absorption is 0.2 and the coefficient of reflection is 0.5, what will be the coefficient of transmission ?
Answer:
In the usual notation, a + r +1 = 1
Hence, the coefficient of transmission of the body = 1 – (a + r) = 1 – (0.2 + 0.5) = 1 – 0.7 = 0.3.

Question 33.
Give four exmaples of

  1. athermanous substance
  2. diathermanous substances.

Answer:

  1. Water, wood, iron, copper, moist air, benzene are athermanous substances.
  2. Quartz, sodium chloride, hydrogen, oxygen, dry air, carbon tetrachloride are diathermanous substances.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation

Question 34.
A substance may be athermanous or diathermanous for certain wavelength ranges while good absorber for other wavelength ranges. Explain.
Answer:
For interaction of light with matter, it is necessary to consider the atomic nature of matter. Interaction of an atom with light depends on the frequency or equivalently on the photon energy.

An atom absorbs light if the photon’s energy equals one of the excitation energies of the atom. In the dense atomic neighbourhood of ordinary gases at pressures above 100 Pa, solids and liquids, the discrete atomic energy states widen into bands. Thus, bulk matter, depending on its nature, possesses absorption bands in specific regions within the electromagnetic frequency spectrum.

Radiant energy of other frequencies is elastically scattered so that the material is transparent at these frequencies.

[Note : Colourless, transparent materials have their absorption bands outside the visible region of the spectrum, which is why they are, in fact, colourless and transparent. Glasses have absorption bands in the ultraviolet region (~ 100 nm-200 nm), where they become opaque. At even longer wavelengths of radiowaves glass is again transparent. In comparison, a stained glass has absorption band in the visible region where it absorbs out a particular range of frequencies, transmitting the complementary colour. Semiconductors, such as ZnSe, CdTe, GaAs and Ge, which are opaque in the visible region of the spectrum are highly transparent in the infrared region (2 µm to 30 µm).]

Question 35.
In Fery’s blackbody, the hole is the blackbody but not the inner coated or outer sphere alone. Explain.
Answer:
Any space which is almost wholly closed – e.g., an empty closed tin can with a tiny hole punched-approximates to a blackbody. The hole is a good absorber and looks black because any light which enters through it is almost completely absorbed after multiple reflections inside. This absorption is quickened in Fery’s blackbody by the inner coat of lampblack. Thus, the hole acts as a perfect absorber.

Also, the relative intensities of radiation at different wavelengths is determined only by the temperature of the blackbody, not by the nature of its surfaces. This is so because the radiation coming out from a small part of the inner surface is made up of

  1. the radiation emitted by that area
  2. the radiation from other parts reflected at that area. Since the hole in Fery’s blackbody is very small, the radiations from the inner surface are well mixed up by reflection before they can escape. Hence, when Fery’s blackbody is placed in a high-temperature bath of fused salts, the hole serves as the source of blackbody radiation.

The outer surface of Fery’s blackbody is made highly reflective and lampblack too has a small coefficient of reflection. Hence, neither of them alone is a blackbody.

Question 36.
What is
(i) a cavity radiator
(ii) cavity radiation?
Answer:
(i) A cavity radiator is a block of material with internal cavity. The inner and outer surfaces of the block are connected by a small hole. Most of the radiant energy entering the block through the hole cannot escape from the hole. The block, therefore, acts almost like a blackbody.

(ii) When the cavity radiator is heated to high temperature, radiation coming out from the hole resembles blackbody radiation. It is called cavity radiation. It depends only on the temperature of the radiator and not on the shape and size of the cavity as well as the material of the walls of the cavity.

Question 37.
‘If r = 1, then it is a white body’. Is this true ? Explain.
Answer:
No.
Since a + r + t = l,a = 0 and t = 0 for r = 1. Therefore, by Kirchhoff’s law, e = a = 0 which is impossible as every body at temperature above 0 K does emit radiant energy, and T = 0 K is impossible.

A blackbody being a full radiator, when heated to high enough temperature it would emit thermal radiation at all the wavelengths and thus appear white. A perfect reflector (r = 1), on the other hand, is a poor emitter and thus would not necessarily appear white when heated.

Question 38.
State and explain Prevost’s theory of exchange of heat.
Answer:
In 1792, Pierre Prevost put forward a theory of exchange of heat. According to this theory, all bodies at all temperatures above the absolute zero temperature (0 K) radiate thermal energy to the surroundings and at the same time receive radiant energy from the surroundings. Thus, there is continuous exchange of radiant energy between a body and its surroundings.

The quantity of radiant energy (thermal energy) emitted by a body per unit time depends upon the nature of the emitting surface, the area of the surface and the temperature of the surface. The quantity of radiant energy absorbed by a body per unit time depends upon the nature of the absorbing surface, the area of the surface and the time rate at which the radiant energy is incident on the body.

If the time rate of emission of thermal energy is greater than the time rate of absorption of thermal energy, the temperature of the body falls. If the emission rate is less than the absorption rate, the temperature of the body increases. If the emission rate equals the absorption rate, the temperature of the body remains constant.

[Note : A body appears red if its temperature is around 800 °C, and white hot if its temperature is around 3000 °C]

Question 39.
Define
(1) emissive power or radiant power
(2) coefficient of emission of a body
Answer:
(1) Emissive power or radiant power of a body (symbol, R) : The emissive power or radiant power of a body at a given temperature is defined as the quantity of radiant energy emitted by the body per unit time per unit surface area of the body at that temperature.

(2) Coefficient of emission (or emissivity) of a body (symbol, e) : The coefficient of emission (or emissivity) of a body is defined as the ratio of the emissive power of the body (R) to the emissive power of a perfect blackbody (Rb) at the same temperature as that of the body.
e = \(\frac{R}{R_{\mathrm{b}}}\)

[Note : The SI unit and dimensions of emissive power are the watt per square metre (W/m2 Or Js-1m-2) and [M1L°T-3]. The coefficient of emission is a dimensionless and unitless quantity. For a perfect blackbody, e = 1 and for a perfect reflector, e = 0.]

Question 40.
If the emissive power of a certain body at a certain temperature is 2000 W/m2 and the emissive power of a perfect blackbody at the same temperature is 10000 W/m2, what is the coefficient of emission of the body?
Answer:
The coefficient of emission of the body,
e = \(\frac{R}{R_{\mathrm{b}}}\) = \(\frac{2000}{1000}\) = 0.2

Question 41.
State the characteristics of blackbody radiation spectrum.
Answer:
Characteristics of blackbody radiation spectrum :

  1. The emissive power Rλ for every wavelength λ increases with increasing temperature.
  2. Each curve has a characteristic form with a maximum for Rλ at a certain wavelength λm.
  3. λm depends on the absolute temperature of the body and, with increasing temperature, shifts towards shorter wavelengths, i.e., towards the ultraviolet end of the spectrum.
  4. λmT = a constant.
  5. The area under each curve gives the total radiant power per unit area of a blackbody at that temperature and is proportional to T4, (Stefan-Boltzmann law).

Notes :

  1. Experimental work on the distribution of energy in blackbody radiation, was carried out by German physicists Otto Lummer (1860-1925), Wilhelm Wien (1864-1928) and Ernst Pringsheim (1859-1917).
  2. Explanation of the radiation spectrum, given by Wien on the basis of thermodynamics could account only for the short wavelength region. The formula obtained by Rayleigh and Jeans, on the basis of the equipartition of energy could account only for long wavelength region. Planck’s empirical formula, put forward in 1900, could account for the entire spectrum.

Question 42.
State the significance of Wien’s displacement law.
Answer:
Significance :

  1. It can be used to estimate the surface temperature of stars.
  2. It explains the common observation of the change of colour of a solid on heating-from dull red (longer wavelengths) to yellow (smaller wavelengths) to white (all wavelengths in the visible region).

Question 43.
Explain the Stefan-Boltzmann law.
Answer:
The power per unit area radiated from the surface of a blackbody at an absolute temperature T is its emissive power or radiant power Rb at that temperature. According to the Stefan-Boltzmann law,
Rb ∝ T4 ∴ Rb = σT4
where the constant a is called Stefan’s constant.

If A is the surface area of the body, its radiant power, i.e., energy radiated per unit time, is AσT4.

[Note : This law was deduced by Josef Stefan (1835-93), Austrian physicist, from the experimental results obtained by John Tyndall (1820-93), British physicist. The theoretical derivation of this law is due to Boltzmann in 1884. Hence, the law is known as the Stefan- Boltzmann law.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 65

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation

Question 44.
What is the emissive power of a perfect black-body at 1000 K? (σ = 5.67 × 10-8 W/m2.K4)
Answer:
Rb = σT4 = 5.67 × 10-8 × (103)4
= 5.67 × 104\(\frac{\mathrm{W}}{\mathrm{m}^{2}}\) is the required emissive power.

Question 45.
In the above case (Question 43), if the body is not a perfect blackbody and e = 0.1, what will be the emissive power?
Answer:
R = eRh = 0.1 × 5.67 × 104 = 5.67 × 103\(\frac{\mathrm{W}}{\mathrm{m}^{2}}\)

Question 46.
Derive an expression for the net rate of loss of heat per unit area by a perfect blackbody in a cooler surroundings.
Answer:
Consider a perfect blackbody at absolute temperature T. We assume its surroundings also to act as a perfect blackbody at absolute temperature T0, where T0 < T.

The power per unit area radiated from the surface of a blackbody at temperature T is its emissive power Rb at that temperature. According to the Stefan-Boltzmann law,
Rb = σT4
where σ is the Stefan constant.
At the same time, the body absorbs radiant energy from the surroundings. The radiant energy absorbed per unit time per unit area by the black-body is \(\sigma T_{0}^{4}\).

Therefore, the net rate of loss of radiant energy per unit area by the blackbody is σ(T4 – \(T_{0}^{4}\)).

[Note : If the body at temperature T has emissivity e < 1, (i.e., it is not a perfect blackbody) the net rate of loss of radiant energy per unit area is eσ(T4 – \(T_{0}^{4}\)).]

Question 47.
Compare the rates of radiation of energy by a metal sphere at 600 K and 300 K.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 66

Question 48.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
Radiant energy is incident on a body at the rate of 2000 joules per minute. If the reflection coefficient of the body is 0.1 and its transmission coefficient is 0.2, find the radiant energy
(i) absorbed
(ii) reflected
(iii) transmitted by the body in 2 minutes.
Solution :
Data : r = 0.1, t = 0.2
a + r + t = 1
∴ a = 1 – r – f = 1 – 0.1 – 0.2 = 0.7
Radiant energy incident per minute on the body is 2000 J. Hence, in 2 minutes, the radiant energy (Q) incident on the body is 4000 J. Let Qa, Qr and Qt be the quantities of radiant energy absorbed, reflected and transmitted in 2 minutes by the body, respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 67

Question 2.
Heat is incident at the rate of 10 watts on a completely opaque body having emissivity 0.8. Find the quantity of radiant heat reflected by it in 1 minute.
Answer:
Data : e = 0.8, time =1 min =60 s, \(\frac{d Q}{d t}\)= 10 W
For a completely opaque body, t =0.
Also, a = e = 0.8
a + r + t = 1
∴ 0.8 + r + 0 = 1
∴ r = 1 – 0.8 = 0.2
Total radiant heat incident on the body in 1 minute
Q = \(\left(\frac{d Q}{d t}\right)\) × time = 10 × 60 = 600J
∴ The quantity of radiant heat reflected by the body in 1 minute is
Qr = rQ = 0.2 × 600 = 120J

Question 3.
A metal cube of side 2 cm emits 672 J of heat in 100 s at a certain temperature. Calculate its emissive power (radiant power) at that temperature.
Solution :
Data : L = 2 cm = 2 × 10-2 m, Q = 672 J, t = 100 s
The surface area of the cube is
A = 6L2 = 6(2 × 10-2)2 = 24 × 10-4 m2
The energy radiated by the cube is Q = RAt
where R ≡ emissive power (radiant power).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 68

Question 4.
The energy of 6000 J is radiated in 5 minutes by a body of surface area 100 cm2. Find the emissive power (radiant power) of the body.
Solution :
Data : Q = 6000 J, t = 5 minutes = 5 × 60 s = 300 s,
A = 10 cm2 = 10 × 10-4 m2 = 10-3 m2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 69
Emissive power (radiant power), R = \(\frac{Q}{A t}\)
= \(\frac{6000}{10^{-3} \times 300}\)
= 2000 J/m2.s 2000 W/m2

Question 5.
An ordinary body A and a perfect blackbody B are maintained at the same temperature. If the radiant power of A is 2 × 104 W/m2 and that of B is 5 × 104 W/m2, what is the coefficient of emission (emissivity) of A ?
Solution :
Data : R = 2 × 104 W/m2, Rb = 5 × 104 W/m2
The coefficient of emission (emissivity) of A,
e = \(\frac{R}{R_{\mathrm{b}}}\) = \(\frac{2 \times 10^{4} \mathrm{~W} / \mathrm{m}^{2}}{5 \times 10^{4} \mathrm{~W} / \mathrm{m}^{2}}\) = 0.4

Question 6.
A body of surface area 100 cm2 radiates energy 3000 J in 10 minutes at a certain constant temperature. The radiant power of a perfect blackbody maintained at the same temperature is 2500 W/m2. Find the the radiant power and emissivity of the body.
Solution:
Data : A = 100 cm2 = 100 × 10-4m2 = 10-2m2, t = 10 minutes = 10 × 60 s = 600 s, Q = 3000 J.
Rb = 2500 W/m2.

(i) The radiant power of the body,
R = \(\frac{Q}{A t}\) = \(\frac{3000 \mathrm{~J}}{\left(10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}^{2}\right)(600 \mathrm{~s})}\)
= 5 × 102 W/m2

(ii) The emissivity of the body,
e = \(\frac{R}{R_{\mathrm{b}}}\) = \(\frac{500 \mathrm{~W} / \mathrm{m}^{2}}{2500 \mathrm{~W} / \mathrm{m}^{2}}\) = 0.2

Question 7.
For a certain body, the coefficient of absorption (absorptive power, absorptivity) is 0.4. The body is maintained at a constant temperature. The radiant power of a perfect blackbody maintained at the same temperature is 5 × 104 W/m2. Find the radiant power of the body at that temperature.
Solution:
Data: a = 0.4, Rb = 5 × 104 W/m2
As the emissivity, e = a,
we have, e = 0.4
∴ R = eRb = (0.4) (5 × 104 W/m2)
= 2 × 104 W/m2
This is the required quantity.

Question 8.
Calculate the wavelength in angstrom at which the emissive power is maximum for a blackbody heated to 3727 °C.
[Wien’s constant, b = 2.898 × 10-3 m.K]
Solution :
Data : T = 3727 °C = 3727 + 273 = 4000 K,
b = 2.898 × 10-3 m.K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 69

Question 9.
The maximum radiant power of the Sun is at wavelength 500 nm. The Wien displacement law constant is 2.898 × 10-3 m.K. Estimate the temperature of the surface of the Sun. Assume the Sun to be a blackbody radiator.
Solution :
Data : λm = 500 nm = 5 × 107 m, b = 2.898 × 10-3 m.K
By Wien’s displacement law,
λmT = b
∴ The estimated surface temperature of the Sun,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 70

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation

Question 10.
What is the peak wavelength of the radiation emitted by a blackbody at 35 °C ? [Wien’s displace-ment law constant, b = 2.898 × 10-3 m.K]
Solution :
Data : t = 35 °C, b = 2.898 × 10-3 m.K
The absolute temperature of the blackbody,
T = t + 273 = 35 + 273 = 308 K
By Wien’s displacement law, λmT = b
∴ The peak wavelength,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 71

Question 11.
Calculate the emissive power of a perfect black-body at 127°C.
Solution:
Data: T = 127°C = (127 + 273) K = 400 K,
= 5.67 × 10-8 W/m2.K4
Emissive power, Rb = σT4
= 5.67 × 10-8 × (400)4
= 1.452 × 103 W/m2

Question 12.
What is the temperature at which a blackbody radiates heat at the rate of 1 kilowatt per square metre?
Solution :
Data : Rb = 1 kW/m2 = 1000 W/m2,
σ = 5.67 × 10-8 W/m2K4
Rb = σT4
∴ Temperature, T = \(\left(\frac{R_{\mathrm{b}}}{\sigma}\right)^{1 / 4}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 72

Question 13.
A perfect blackbody, maintained at 27 °C, radiates energy at the rate of 551.1 W. Find the surface area of the body.
Solution :
Data : dQ/dt = 551.1 W,
T = 27 °C = (27 + 273) K = 300 K,
σ = 5.67 × 10-8 W/m2.K4
Let A be the surface area of the body. Energy radiated per unit time,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 73

Question 14.
Calculate the energy radiated in two minutes by a perfect black sphere of radius 2 cm, maintained at 427 °C.
Solution :
Data : T = 427 °C = (427 + 273) K = 700 K, r = 2 cm = 0.02 m, σ = 5.67 × 10-8 W/m2.K4, t = 2 minutes = 120 seconds
∴ A = 4πr2 = 4 × 3.142 × (0.02)2 = 5.027 × 10-3 m2
Energy radiated in time t = AσT4t
∴ Energy radiated in 120 seconds
= 5.027 × 10-3 × 5.67 × 10-8 × (700)4 × 120 J
= 8.212 × 103 J

Question 15.
The temperature of the filament of a 100 watt electric lamp is 2727 °C. Calculate its emissivity if the length of the filament is 8 cm and its radius is 0.5 mm.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 74

Question 16.
A 60 watt electric bulb loses its energy entirely by radiation from the surface of its filament. If the surface area of the filament is 4 cm2 and its coefficient of emission is 0.4, calculate the temperature of the filament.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 75

Question 17.
Energy is emitted from a hole in an electric furnace at the rate of 20 watts when the furnace is at 227 °C. Find the area of the hole.
Solution :
Data : T = 227 °C = (227 + 273) K = 500 K,
P = 20 W, σ = 5.67 × 10-8 W/m2.K4
Let A be the area at the hole. Then,
P = AσT4
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 76

Question 18.
A body of surface area 10 cm2 and temperature 727 °C emits 300 J of energy per minute. Find its emissivity.
Solution :
Data : A = 10 cm2 = 10 × 10-4m2 = 10-3m2,
T = 273 + 727 = 1000 K, Q = 300 J,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 77

Question 19.
A pinhole is made in a hollow sphere of radius 5 cm whose inner wall is at 727 °C. Find the power radiated per unit area. [Stefan’s constant, a = 5.7 × 10-8J/m2.s.K4, emissivity (e) = 0.2]
Solution :
Data : r = 5 × 10-2m, T = 727 + 273 = 1000 K, e = 0.2,
σ = 5.7 × 10-2 J/m2.s.K4
The power radiated per unit area, i.e., emissive power,
R = eσT4
= (0.2) (5.7 × 10-8) (103)4
= 1.14 × 10-8 × 1012 = 1.14 × 104 W/m2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation

Question 20.
A body of surface area 400 cm2 and absorption coefficient 0.5 radiates energy 1.5 kcal in 2 minutes when the temperature of the body is kept constant. Find the temperature of the body. (Given : J = 4186 J/kcal, σ = 5.67 × 10-8 J/s.m.K4)
Solution :
Data : A = 400 cm2 = 400 × 10-4 4 m2
= 4 × 10-2 m2, absorption coefficient, a = 0.8
But a = e ∴ e = 0.8, J = 4186 J/kcal
Q = 1.5 kcal = 1.5 × 4186 J = 6279 J,
t = 2 minutes = 120 s, σ = 5.67 × 10-8 J/s.m. K4
Energy radiated, Q = σ AeT4t
∴ 6279 = (5.67 × 10-8) × (4 × 10-2) × 0.8 × T4 × 120
∴ T4 = \(\frac{6279 \times 10^{8}}{21.77}\) = 288.4 × 108
∴ T = 4.121 × 102 K
This is the temperature of the body.

Question 21.
The filament of an evacuated light bulb has length 10 cm, diameter 0.2 mm and emissivity 0.2. Calculate the power it radiates at 2000 K. (a = 5.67 × 10-8 W/m2.K4)
Solution :
Data : 1 = 10 cm = 0.1 m, d = 0.2 mm
∴ r = 0.1 mm = 0.1 × 10-3 m, e = 0.2,
T = 2000 K, σ = 5.67 × 10-3 W/m2.K4
Surface area of the filament, A = 2πrl
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 78
This is the required quantity.

Question 22.
A body of surface area 10 cm2 and temperature 727 °C emits 300 J of energy per minute. Find its emissivity.
Solution :
Data : A = 10 cm2 = 10 × 10-4 m2 = 10-3 m2,
T = 273 + 727 = 1000 K, Q = 300 J,
t = 1 minute = 60 s, σ = 5.67 × 10-8 J/m2.s.K4
Q = σAeT4t
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 79

Question 23.
A metal cube of each side of length 1 m loses all its energy at the rate of 3000 watts. If the emissivity of the material of the cube is 0.4, estimate its temperature.
Solution :
Data : L = 1 m, e = 0.4, \(\frac{d Q}{d t}\) = 3000 W, dt
a = 5.67 × 10-8 W/m2.K4
Surface area of the cube, A = 6L2 = 6 m2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 80

Question 24.
Assuming the Stefan-Boltzmann law, compare the rate of radiation from a metal ball at 727 °C with its rate of radiation at 527 °C. Also compare its rate of loss of heat at the two temperatures, if the temperature of the surroundings is 27 °C. Solution :
Data : T0 = 273 + 27 = 300 K,
T1 = 273 + 727 = 1000 K, T2 = 273 + 527 = 800 K
(i) Rate of radiation (radiant power),
P = σAeT4
If P1 and P2 are the radiant powers at the temperatures T1 and T2, respectively,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 81

Question 25.
A black body at 1000°c radiates 14.89 watt per square centimetre of its surface. The surfaceof a certain star radiates 10 kW per square centimetre. Assuming that the star’s surface behaves as a perfect blackbody, estimate its temperature.
Solution:
Data: T1 = 273 + 1000 = 1273K,
R1 = 14.89 watt/cm2 = 14.89 × 104 watt/m2,
R2 = 10 kW/cm2 = 107 watt/cm2
Emissive power of a blackbody, R = σT4
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 82
∴ This is the temperature of the star’s surface.

Question 26.
A blackbody with initial temperature of 300 °C is allowed to cool inside an evacuated enclosure surrounded by melting ice at the rate of 0.35 °C/second. If the mass, specific heat and surface area of the body are 32 grams, 0.10 cal/g °C and 8 cm2 respectively, calculate Stefan’s constant. (Take J = 4200 j/kcal.)
Solution :
Data : T = 273 + 300 = 573 K, T0 = 273 K,
\(\frac{d Q}{d t}\) = 0.35 °C/s = 0.35 K/s, at
M = 32 g = 32 × 10-3 kg, A = 8 cm2 = 8 × 10-4 m2 C = 0.10 cal/g.°C = 0.10 kcal/kg.K = 420 j/kg.K
since J = 4200 J/kcal
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 83

Question 27.
A blackbody at 327 °C, when suspended in a black enclosure at 27 °C, loses heat at a certain rate. Find the temperature of the body at which its rate of loss of heat by radiation will be half of the above rate. Assume that the other conditions remain unchanged.
Solution :
Data : T1 = 273 + 327 = 600 K, T0 = 273 + 27 = 300 K,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 84

Question 49.
Choose the correct option.

Question 1.
The rms speed of a gas molecule is directly proportional to
(A) its absolute temperature
(B) the square root of its absolute temperature
(C) the square of its absolute temperature
(D) its molar mass.
Answer:
(B) the square root of its absolute temperature

Question 2.
Temperature remaining constant, if you double the number of molecules in a box, the pressure will
(A) remain unchanged
(B) double
(C) become one-half
(D) quadruple.
Answer:
(B) double

Question 3.
The pressure P of an ideal gas having volume V is \(\frac{2 E}{3 V}\). Then E is
(A) translational kinetic energy
(B) rotational kinetic energy
(C) vibrational kinetic energy
(D) potential energy.
Answer:
(A) translational kinetic energy

Question 4.
According to the kinetic theory of gases, at a given temperature, molecules of all gases have the same
(A) rms speed
(B) momentum
(C) energy
(D) most probable speed.
Answer:
(C) energy

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation

Question 5.
The kinetic energy per molecule of a gas at temperature T is
(A) \(\frac{3}{2} R T\)
(B) \(\frac{3}{2} k_{\mathrm{B}} T\)
(C) \(\frac{2}{3} R T\)
(D) \(\frac{3}{2} \frac{R T}{M_{0}}\)
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{3}{2} k_{\mathrm{B}} T\)

Question 6.
When the temperature of an enclosed gas is increased by 2 °C, its pressure increases by 0.5%. The initial temperature of the gas was
(A) 250 K
(B) 275 K
(C) 300 K
(D) 400 K.
Answer:
(D) 400 K.

Question 6.
For a given gas at 800 K, the rms speed of the ‘ molecules is
(A) four times the rms speed at 200 K
(B) half the rms speed at 200 K
(C) twice the rms speed at 200 K
(D) twice the rms speed at 400 K.
Answer:
(C) twice the rms speed at 200 K

Question 7.
If the absolute temperature of a gas becomes three times the initial absolute temperature, the rms speed of the gas molecules
(A) becomes \(\frac{1}{3}\) times the initial rms speed
(B) becomes \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\) times the initial rms speed
(C) becomes \(\sqrt{3}\) times the initial rms speed
(D) becomes 3 times the initial rms speed.
Answer:
(C) becomes \(\sqrt{3}\) times the initial rms speed

Question 8.
An ideal gas occupies 2 m3 at a pressure of 2 atm. Taking 1 atm = 105 Pa, the energy density of the gas is
(A) 3 × 105 J/m3
(B) 1.5 × 105 J/m3
(C) 300 J/m3
(D) 150 J/m3.
Answer:
(A) 3 × 105 J/m3

Question 9.
An ideal gas is confined to a cylinder with a movable piston. As it is heated to twice its initial absolute temperature, the gas is allowed to expand freely against the atmospheric pressure. The average thermal energy of the molecules
(A) quadruples
(B) doubles
(C) increases by a factor of \(\sqrt{2}\)
(D) remains unchanged.
Answer:
(B) doubles

Question 10.
Equal volumes of hydrogen and oxygen (relative molar masses 2 and 32, respectively) in separate containers are equimolar and exert equal pressure. The rms speeds of hydrogen and oxygen molecules are in the ratio
(A) 1 : 32
(B) 1 : 16
(C) 1 : 4
(D) 4 : 1.
Answer:
(D) 4 : 1.

Question 11.
At what temperature will the rms velocity of a gas molecule be double its value at NTP ?
A) 273 °C
(B) 546 °C
(C) 819 °C
(D) 1092 °C.
Answer:
(C) 819 °C

Question 12.
The rms speed of the molecules of a gas is 200 m/s at 27 °C and 1 atmosphere pressure. The rms speed at 127 °C and double the pressure is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 85
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{400}{\sqrt{3}}\) m/s

Question 13.
The temperature at which helium molecules have the same rms speed as hydrogen molecules at STP is
[MoH = MoHe = 4g/mol]
A) 1092 K
(B) 546 K
(C) 300 K
(D) 273 K.
Answer:
(B) 546 K

Question 14.
The number of degrees of freedom for a rigid diatomic molecule is
(A) 3
(B) 5
(C) 6
(D) 7
Answer:
(B) 5

Question 15.
For polyatomic molecules having / vibrational modes, the ratio of two specific heats is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation 86
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{4+f}{3+f}\)

Question 16.
A nonlinear triatomic molecule has …… degree(s) of freedom of rotational motion.
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 3
Answer:
(D) 3

Question 17.
The wavelength range of thermal radiation is
(A) from 4000 Å to 7000 Å
(B) from 7700 Å to 4 × 106 Å
(C) from 106 Å to 108 Å
(D) from 4 × 10-12 Å to 4 × 108 Å.
Answer:
(B) from 7700 Å to 4 × 106 Å

Question 18.
The coefficient of reflection of a perfectly opaque body is 0.16. Its coefficient of emission is
(A) 0.94
(B) 0.84
(C) 0.74
(D) 0.64.
Answer:
(B) 0.84

Question 19.
Which of the following materials is diathermanous ?
(A) Wax
(B) Glass
(C) Quartz
(D) Porcelain
Answer:
(C) Quartz

Question 20.
Which of the following substances is opaque to radiant energy?
(A) Carbon tetrachloride
(B) Sodium chloride
(C) Benzene
(D) Potassium bromide
Answer:
(C) Benzene

Question 21.
The substance which allows heat radiations to pass through it is
(A) iron
(B) water vapour
(C) wood
(D) dry air.
Answer:
(D) dry air.

Question 22.
A perfect blackbody is the one that
(A) absorbs all incident radiation
(B) reflects all incident radiation
(C) transmits all incident radiation
(D) both reflects and transmits incident radiation.
Answer:
(A) absorbs all incident radiation

Question 23.
The conical projection in Fery’s blackbody is
(A) used to support the spheres
(B) used to transmit incident radiation to outer sphere
(C) used to prevent reflected radiation to escape outside
(D) used for all of the above purposes.
Answer:
(C) used to prevent reflected radiation to escape outside

Question 24.
The emissive power of a body is
(A) the energy emitted by the body in a given time
(B) the radiant energy emitted by the body per unit area of the body
(C) the radiant energy emitted by the body per unit time
(D) the radiant energy emitted by the body per unit time per unit area of the body.
Answer:
(D) the radiant energy emitted by the body per unit time per unit area of the body.

Question 25.
The dimensions of emissive power are
(A) [M1L-2T-3]
(B) [M1L2T-3]
(C) [M1L0T-3]
(D) [M1L0-2]
Answer:
(C) [M1L0T-3]

Question 26.
The emissive power per wavelength interval Rλ of a blackbody at an absolute temperature T1 is maximum at λ1 = 1.1 µm. At an absolute temperature T2, its Rλ is maximum at λ2 = 0.55 µm. Then, \(\frac{T_{1}}{T_{2}}\) is equal to
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\)
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 4.
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 27.
The temperature of the photosphere of the Sun is about 6000 K. Wien’s displacement law constant is 2.898 × 10-3 m.K. The photosphere has maximum emissive power at wavelength
(A) 483 nm
(B) 496.7 nm
(C) 4830 nm
(D) 4967 nm.
Answer:
(A) 483 nm

Question 28.
A sphere and a cube made of the same metal have equal volumes, identical surface characteristics and are at the same temperature. If they are allowed to cool in identical surroundings, the ratio of their rates of loss of heat will be
(A) \(\frac{4 \pi}{3}\) : 1
(B) 1 : 1
(C) \(\left(\frac{\pi}{6}\right)^{\frac{2}{3}}\) : 1
(D) \(\left(\frac{\pi}{6}\right)^{\frac{1}{3}}\) : 1
Answer:
(D) \(\left(\frac{\pi}{6}\right)^{\frac{1}{3}}\) : 1

Question 29.
If the absolute temperature of a blackbody is increased by a factor 3, the energy radiated by it per unit time per unit area will increase by a factor of
(A) 9
(B) 27
(C) 81
(D) 243.
Answer:
(C) 81

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Kinetic Theory of Gases and Radiation

Question 30.
Two spheres P and Q, having radii 8 cm and 2 cm, and of the same surface characteristics are maintained at 127 °C and 527 °C, respectively. The ratio of the radiant powers of P to Q is
(A) 0.0039
(B) 0.0156
(C) 1
(D) 2.
Answer:
(C) 1

Question 31.
Two copper spheres of radii 6 cm and 12 cm, respectively, are suspended in an evacuated enclosure. Each of them is at a temperature of 15 °C above the surroundings. The ratio of their rate of loss of heat is
(A) 2 : 1
(B) 1 : 4
(C) 1 : 8
(D) 8 : 1.
Answer:
(B) 1 : 4

Question 32.
The peak of the radiation spectrum of a blackbody occurs at 2 µn. Taking Wien’s displacement law constant as 2.9 × 10-3 m.K, the approximate temperature of the blackbody is
(A) 15 K
(B) 150 K
(C) 750 K
(D) 1500 K.
Answer:
(D) 1500 K.

Question 33.
The light from the Sun is found to have a maximum intensity near the wavelength of 470 nm. Assuming the surface of the Sun as a blackbody, the temperature of the Sun is [Wien’s constant b = 2.898 × 10-3 m.K]
(A) 5800 K
(B) 6050 K
(C) 6166 K
(D) 6500 K.
Answer:
(C) 6166 K

Question 34.
The amount of energy radiated per unit time by a body does not depend upon the
(A) nature of its surface
(B) area of its surface
(C) mass of the body
(D) temperature difference of the surface and surroundings.
Answer:
(C) mass of the body

Question 35.
Two gases exert pressure in the ratio 3 : 2 and their densities are in the ratio 2 : 3. Then the ratio of their rms speeds is
(A) 2 : 3
(B) 3 : 2
(C) 2 : 1
(D) 1 : 2.
Answer:
(B) 3 : 2

Question 36.
Find the wavelength at which a blackbody radiates maximum energy, if its temperature is 427 °C.
[Wien’s constant b = 2.898 × 10-3 m.K]
(A) 0.0414 × 10-6 m
(B) 4.14 × 10-6 m
(C) 41.4 × 10-6 m
(D) 414 × 10-6 m
Answer:
(B) 4.14 × 10-6 m

Question 37.
If the total kinetic energy per unit volume of gas enclosed in a container is E, the pressure exerted by the gas is
(A) E
(B) \(\frac{3}{2}\)E
(C) \(\sqrt{3}\)E
(D) \(\frac{2}{3}\)E.
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{2}{3}\)E.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 2 Trade

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Organisation of Commerce and Management 11th Textbook Solutions Chapter 2 Trade Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Organisation of Commerce and Management Solutions Chapter 2 Trade

1. (A) Select the correct option and rewrite the sentence

Question 1.
……………. is the link between producer and retailer.
(a) Consumer
(b) Wholesaler
(c) Manufacturer
Answer:
(b) Wholesaler

Question 2.
Price charged by retailers is generally ………………..
(a) higher
(b) lower
(c) fixed
Answer:
(a) higher

Question 3.
A wholesaler invest ……………… capital in the business.
(a) small
(b) large
(c) less
Answer:
(b) large

Question 4.
Retailer is the …………….. link in the chain of distribution.
(a) first
(b) last
(c) second
Answer:
(b) last

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 2 Trade

Question 5.
Retailers supply information to the …………………. through wholesalers.
(a) manufacturer
(b) government
(c) consumers
Answer:
(a) manufacturer

Question 6.
Major items ……………… are chemicals, crude oil and petroleum products, edible oils, electronic goods, gold and silver, pearl and precious stone.
(a) exported by India
(b) not exported by India
(c) imported by India
Answer:
(c) imported by India

Question 7.
For customs clearance the ……………… is prepared by the exporter.
(a) carting order
(b) letter of credit
(c) shipping bill
Answer:
(c) shipping bill

Question 8.
……………… carry goods on their head in basket or containers.
(a) Hawkers
(b) Peddlers
(c) Cheap Jacks
Answer:
(b) Peddlers

Question 9.
………………… open their shops on market days i.e. on fixed days.
(a) Street Traders
(b) Market Traders
(c) Peddlers
Answer:
(b) Market Traders

Question 10.
……………… retailers deal in particular goods.
(a) General Stores
(b) Specialty Shop
(c) Second Hand Good Shops
Answer:
(b) Specialty Shop

Question 11.
………………… is known as self – service store.
(a) Departmental Store
(b) Super Market
(c) Multiple Store
Answer:
(b) Super Market

1. (B) Match the pairs

Question 1.

Group A Group B
(a) Departmental store (1) Carry goods on heads
(b) Market traders (2) Uniform price
(c) General shops (3) Business on market day
(d) One price shop (4) Most common shop
(e) Peddlers (5) Huge capital
(6) Distribution through branches
(7) Carry goods on carts
(8) Sale used articles
(9) Specialized goods
(10) Authorized dealers

Answer:

Group A Group B
(a) Departmental store (5) Huge capital
(b) Market traders (3) Business on market day
(c) General shops (4) Most common shop
(d) One price shop (2) Uniform price
(e) Peddlers (1) Carry goods on heads

Question 2.

Group A Group B
(a) Import trade (1) First step in import
(b) Registration (2) Goods not for own country
(c) Entrepot trade (3) Buying goods from other country
(d) Letter of Credit (4) No restrictions
(e) Large Turnover (5) Selling goods to other country
(6) Credit worthiness of importer
(7) Recovery of dues
(8) Wholesaler
(9) Retailer
(10) Credit worthiness of exporter

Answer:

Group A Group B
(a) Import trade (3) Buying goods from other country
(b) Registration (1) First step in import
(c) Entrepot trade (2) Goods not for own country
(d) Letter of Credit (7) Recovery of dues
(e) Large Turnover (8) Wholesaler

1. (C) Give one word/phrase/term

Question 1.
A person who move daily from place to place to sell goods.
Answer:
Itinerant retailer

Question 2.
The middleman between wholesaler and customer.
Answer:
Retailer

Question 3.
A retail shop which operates through branches.
Answer:
Chain stores

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 2 Trade

Question 4.
A shop where all goods are available at same price.
Answer:
One price shop

Question 5.
A retailer who display his goods on the load.
Answer:
Street traders

Question 6.
An order placed by an importer for the supply of certain goods.
Answer:
Indent

1. (D) State True or False

Question 1.
Wholesaler keeps large stock of goods.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Wholesaler deals in small quantity.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
A retailer has no direct contact with consumers.
Answer:
False

Question 4.
Super market shops offer home delivery facilities to customer.
Answer:
False

Question 5.
Departmental store located out of the city.
Answer:
False

Question 6.
Customers cannot bargain in one price shop.
Answer:
True.

Question 7.
Letter of Credit is required for obtaining export license.
Answer:
True

Question 8.
Buying goods from other country is known as export trade.
Answer:
False

Question 9.
Maintaining high quality is necessary to sustain in export business.
Answer:
True

1. (E) Find the odd one.

Question 1.
Itinerant Retailers
General Stores, Hawkers, Cheap Jacks, Peddlers.
Answer:
General Stores

Question 2.
Large Scale Retailers
Departmental Stores, Chain Stores, Market Trader, One Price Shop.
Answer:
Market Trader

Question 3.
Small Scale Retailers
Specialty Shops, Second hand Goods Shops, Malls, Authorised Dealers.
Answer:
Malls

1. (F) Complete the sentences.

Question 1.
The original form of trade was ……………
Answer:
barter

Question 2.
Trade establishes a link between producers and …………….
Answer:
consumers

Question 3.
The wholesaler provides valuable services to manufacturers and ……………….
Answer:
retailers

Question 4.
The wholesaler purchases a large quantity of goods from the ………………..
Answer:
manufacturers

Question 5.
The wholesaler bears the risk of ……………… and market fluctuations.
Answer:
price

Question 6.
The wholesaler provides financial support to retailers by way of ………………. facility.
Answer:
credit

Question 7.
The retailer is the connecting link between the wholesaler and …………………..
Answer:
consumers

Question 8.
……………… is a large retail organization which mainly sells wide range of food and grocery items on the basis of ‘Self-service’.
Answer:
Super market

Question 9.
……………….. are retail stores owned by a single organization
Answer:
Chain store

Question 10.
The shop where the price of all products or goods are same is known as ……………..
Answer:
One price shop

Question 11.
A modern shopping mall is an ………………. term.
Answer:
American

Question 12.
The Letter of Credit is the safest method of payment in ………………. trade.
Answer:
foreign

1. (G) Select the correct option

Question 1.
Wholesaler deals in (small / large) quantity.
Answer:
Large

Question 2.
Departmental stores are located (in / out of) the city.
Answer:
in

Question 3.
Customer cannot bargain in (General stores / One Price shop).
Answer:
One price shop

Question 4.
Retailer operates in (global / local) market.
Answer:
local

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 2 Trade

Question 5.
Departmental store is a (large / small) scale retail shop.
Answer:
large

Question 6.
Supermarket shop requires (limited / large) capital.
Answer:
large

Question 7.
Chain stores are retail store owned by (many / single) organization.
Answer:
single

Question 8.
The shop where the price of all the product or goods are (different / same) is known as one price shop.
Answer:
same

1. (H) Answer in one sentence

Question 1.
What do you mean by internal trade?
Answer:
Trade carried on within the geographical boundaries of a country is called internal trade or domestic trade.

Question 2.
Who is known as hawkers?
Answer:
A trader who carries the goods on the back of animals or wheel cart for the purpose of selling is called an hawker.

Question 3.
What is the meaning of Peddlers?
Answer:
Mobile retailer who carry goods on their head or back and move from one place to another for selling are called Peddlers.

Question 4.
What do you mean by fixed shop retailers?
Answer:
Fixed shop retailers are those retailers who have a fixed place for their business.

Question 5.
What do you mean by small scale fixed retailers?
Answer:
Small scale fixed retailers are those who conduct their business operations on a small scale with variety of goods at a fixed place.

Question 6.
What do you mean by large scale fixed retailer?
Answer:
Large scale fixed retailers operate on large scale business at a fixed place.

Question 7.
What is departmental store?
Answer:
A departmental store is a large scale retail organisation situated in a central place in the city. It is divided into a number of small retail shops known as departments, selling different goods under one roof. .

Question 8.
What is meant by supermarket shop?
Answer:
It is a large scale retail organization which sells a wide variety of goods to customers on the basis of self service.

Question 9.
What do you mean by chain store?
Answer:
Chain store is a retail shop owned and controlled by a single organization located in different parts of the city, with a particular kind of goods.

Question 10.
What is one price shop?
Answer:
One price shops are shops where all articles are sold at one standard and fixed price.

Question 11.
What is a mall?
Answer:
A mall is a large enclosed shopping complex comprising of various stores business cinema theaters and restaurants.

1. (I) Correct the underlined word and rewrite the following sentences

Question 1.
When the trade activities are conduct between two or more countries, it is called as internal trade.
Answer:
When the trade activities are conduct between two or more countries, it is called as external trade.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 2 Trade

Question 2.
Export trade refers to the purchase of goods and services from foreign country.
Answer:
Import trade refers to the purchase of goods and services from foreign country.

Question 3.
The price charged in departmental stores is comparatively less.
Answer:
The price charged in departmental stores is comparatively high.

Question 4.
Wholesaler requires less capital.
Answer:
Retailer requires less capital.

Question 5.
Tariff rates of various countries affect the internal trade.
Answer:
Tariff rates of various countries affect the external trade.

1. (J) Arrange in proper order

Question 1.
Retailer, Consumer, Producer, Wholesaler.
Answer:
Producer, Wholesaler, Retailer, Consumer.

Question 2.
International Market, Local Market, National Market, State Market.
Answer:
Local Market, State Market, National Market, International Market.

Question 3.
Import Stage, Pre-import Stage, Post-import Stage, Preliminary Stage.
Answer:
Preliminary Stage, Pre-import Stage, Import Stage, Post-import Stage.

2. Explain the following terms /concepts.

Question 1.
Wholesale Trade.
Answer:

  1. When goods are purchased in large quantity from the manufacturers or producers for the purpose of resale to retailers, then it is called as wholesale trade.
  2. The person doing wholesale business is called wholesaler.
  3. Wholesaler acts as a link between manufacturer and retailer.

Question 2.
Retail Trade.
Answer:

  1. When goods are sold in smaller quantities to the final consumers, then it is called as retail trade.
  2. The person doing retail trade is called as retailer.

Question 3.
Foreign Trade.
Answer:

  1. Trade carried on between two or more foreign countries is called foreign trade.
  2. Foreign trade depends as political relations between two countries.
  3. Procedure of foreign trade is complex, difficult and lengthy.
  4. It consists of import trade and export trade.

Question 4.
Letter of Credit.
Answer:

  1. A letter of credit is a guarantee issued by the importers bank that it will honour the payment upto certain amount of export bills to the bank of the exporter.
  2. It is generally demanded by the exporter country.
  3. It gives assurance to exporter country about its payment of goods exported.

Question 5.
One price shop.
Answer:

  1. One price shop are shops where all the articles are sold at one standard and fixed price.
  2. Such shops sells variety of goods of daily use.
  3. Goods at such shops are sold at lower prices.
  4. E.g. of goods sold at such shops are – watches, shampoos, household articles, crockery, etc.

Question 6.
Departmental Store.
Answer:

  1. Departmental store is a large scale retail shop having different departments and sections for different type of goods in the same building.
  2. It sells large variety of goods under one roof.
    E.g. Shopper stop.

Question 7.
General store.
Answer:

  1. General store is a retail shop which deals in a wide variety of goods located in a residential locality.
  2. Such store sells goods of daily needs like food grains, soaps, stationery, medicines, oils, biscuits, etc.
  3. They provide home delivery to their customers.
  4. They buy goods from the wholesalers or directly from the manufacturers.

Question 8.
Mall.
Answer:

  1. A mall is a large enclosed shopping complex having various stores, restaurant, cinema hail and other business.
  2. E.g. Phoenix Mall, Inorbit Mall, etc.
  3. It is an American term in which one or move building from a complex.

3. Study the following case/situation and express your opinion.

1. Sonupant purchases his grocery material every month from nearest Nandulal grocery shop and he purchase wheat, rice and pulses in bulk for whole year from Gorhe and Son’s Market yard.

Question 1.
Who is wholesaler?
Answer:
Gorhe and Son’s Market yard.

Question 2.
Who is retailer?
Answer:
Nandulal grocery shop is the retailer.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 2 Trade

Question 3.
Any one difference between wholesaler and retailer?
Answer:
Goods are sold to retailer for the purpose of sale by wholesaler.
Goods are sold to customer for consumption by the retailer.

2. Anurag is selling goods to Japan. Kavita is buying goods from USA where as Ganesh is buying raw material from South Africa and after processing it sells finished goods to Malaysia.

Question 1.
Who is exporter?
Answer:
Anurag is the exporter.

Question 2.
Who is importer?
Answer:
Kavita is an importer.

Question 3.
What is Entrepot Trade?
Answer:
Enterpot trade is re-exporting of the goods to another country, with or without processing or re-packaging, e.g. Ganesh buying raw materials from South Africa and processing it and selling it to Malaysia.

4. Distinguish between the following

Question 1.
Wholesaler and Retailer.
Answer:

Wholesaler Retailer
(1) Meaning A person who conducts the wholesale trade is called as wholesaler. A person who conducts retail trade is called as retailer.
(2) Capital/Finance Wholesaler needs large amount of capital Retailer needs small amount of capital.
(3) Link It is a link between manufacturer and retailer. It is a link between wholesaler and customers.
(4) Location It is located in central market of the city. It is located in various local markets in the city.
(5) Profit margin Wholesaler works on less profit margin. Retailer works on more profit margin.
(6) Sales of goods Goods are sold to retailer for the purpose of resale. Goods are sold to final customers for their consumption.
(7) Credit Facility Wholesaler offers credit facility to retailers. Retailer offers credit facility only to his regular customers.
(8) Prices It sales goods at lower prices to retailers. It sales goods at higher prices to customers.
(9) Specialisation They are specialised in one or few line of goods. They are specialised in variety of goods.
(10) Warehousing Requires warehousing facilities as the stock of goods are on large scale. He does not require separate warehousing due to small scale purchasing.
(11) Home Delivery Wholesaler offers delivery of goods to retailers at their shops. Retailer offers home delivery of goods to regular customers.

Question 2.
Itinerant Retailers and Non-Itinerant Retailers (Fixed shop retailers).
Answer:

Itinerant Retailers Non-Itinerant Retailers/ Fixed Shop Retailers
(1) Meaning Itinerant retailers are those retailers who do not have a fixed places for their business. Fixed shop retailers are those retailers who have a fixed place for their business.
(2) Capital It requires limited capital. It requires higher capital investment.
(3) Stock of Goods They keep limited stock of goods. They keep large stock of goods.
(4) Quality of Goods They sell low quality goods. They sell quality goods.
(5) Variety of Goods They do not offer variety of goods to customers. They offer variety of goods to customers.
(6) Prices Prices of goods is lower due to absence of fixed cost. Prices of goods is higher than itinerant retailers.
(7) Credit Facility Credit facility is not given to customers. Credit facility is given only to regular customers.
(8) Choice of Goods Customers have no scope for choice of goods. Customers have more scope for choice of goods.
(9) Door to Door Service They offer door to door service to their customers. They do not offer door to door services to their customers.
(10) After Sales Service They do not provide after sales service to customers. They provide after sales service to customers.
(11) Types of Goods It deals in goods of daily need and more perishable nature. It deals in all types of goods as per the needs of the customers.

Question 3.
General Stores and Specialty Stores.
Answer:

General Stores Speciality Stores
(1) Meaning It is a shop which deals in wide variety of goods. It is a shop which deals in specialised products of goods.
(2) Location It is located in the residential areas of the city. It is located in busy shopping centers of the city.
(3) Prices Prices of goods are generally low. Prices of goods are generally high.
(4) Sales Goods are sold on cash basis as well as on credit basis. Goods are sold on cash basis only.
(5) Variety of Products Customers have limited choice of goods. Customers have maximum choice in one line of goods.
(6) Types of Goods Goods sold as per customers day to day need. Specialised goods are sold to customers.
(7) Advertisement Do not spend much expenses on advertisement. Spend more expenses on advertisement due to specialisation.

Question 4.
Departmental Stores and Chain Stores.
Answer:

Departmental Stores Chain Stores
(1) Meaning It is a large scale retail store having different departments and sections for different type of goods under a same roof. It is a retail shop owned and controlled by a single organization located in different parts of the city.
(2) Variety of Goods It deals with large variety of goods. It deals with goods of a particular manufacturer only.
(3) Location It is located at central place of city. It is located in the residential area of the city.
(4) Capital it requires large amount of capital. It requires less amount of capital than Departmental store.
(5) Choice of Goods It deals in the variety of goods and offers wide choice to customers. It deals in particular product of goods and offer the wide choice to customers.
(6) Home Delivery It provides home delivery to customers. It do not provide home delivery to customers.
(7) Operation Operations of departmental store are rigid in nature. Operation of Chain Stores are flexible in nature.
(8) Motto Motto of departmental store is to attract customers. Motto of Chain Store is to approach the customers.
(9) Price It generally charges high price. It charges comparatively less price.
(10) Cost of operating Cost of operating departmental store is high. Cost of operating chain store is low.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 2 Trade

Question 5.
Import Trade and Export Trade
Answer:

Import Trade Export Trade
(1) Meaning It refers to buying of goods and services from foreign country. It refers to sale of goods and services to foreign country.
(2) Person Involved The person doing import trade is called importer. The person doing export trade is called exporter.
(3) Example India buying bananas from Sri Lanka. India selling mangoes to Sri Lanka.
(4) Effect as Currency It reduces foreign currency. It increase foreign currency.
(5) Stages It includes following stages:

(a) Preliminary stage

(b) Pre-shipment stage

(c) Shipment stage

(d) Post-shipment stage

It includes following stage:

(a) Preliminary stage

(b) Pre-import stage

(c) Import stage

(d) Post-import stage.

5. Answer in brief.

Question 1.
State any four feature of one price shop.
Answer:
Features of One Price Shop:

  1. Location: One price shops are located in busy centers of the city such as busy trade centers, near railway stations, bus stops and other crowded places.
  2. Variety of Goods: In one price shop, the customers are given wide scope to make selection of goods of their choice. However, the price is uniform but quality of the goods may be different.
  3. Cash Sales : In this shop goods are sold on cash basis only. No credit facility is given to the customers. So there is no risk of bad debts.
  4. Low Priced Articles: In one price shop, the goods are sold to customers for domestic use at lower prices e.g. stationery, cutlery, toys, plastic goods, etc.
  5. Uniform Prices : All the articles of goods are sold in one price shop at the same price. The customers have no scope for bargain in this shop.
  6. Business Policy: In one price shop, the policy of buying and selling of goods of all the shops are the same one.

Question 2.
State any four features of wholesalers to manufacturers.
Answer:
Services of Wholesalers to Manufacturers:

  1. Provide Finance : Wholesaler provides advance to the manufacturers so they can do bulk production. Manufacturer can maintain continuous flow of production.
  2. Collecting Order and Distribution of Goods : Wholesaler collects small orders of goods from the retailers then he collects the goods from manufacturer and distributes it to retailers.
  3. Goods Sale on Large Scale : Wholesaler sells goods to the retailers on large scale on behalf of manufacturers.
  4. Economy in Production : Large scale of production is made possible because production of goods is done continuously by the manufacturer.
  5. Market Information : Wholesaler provides latest information of market condition to manufacturer. On the basis of this information manufacturer changes his production policies and regulates production activities.
  6. Storage : The wholesaler provides storage facilities for the manufacturers product of goods. This helps them to fill up the time gap between production and consumption of goods.

Question 3.
Write any four services of retailers to consumers.
Answer:
1. Variety of Goods : Retailer keep different brands of goods which helps the customer to choose.

2. After Sales Services : After sales services are given for a particular period, which is known as guarantee period for costly and durable goods such as refrigerators, TV. etc. Such services create confidence in minds of consumers for further purchases.

3. Regular Supply of Goods : Retailer stocks the goods sufficiently which are required by the customers and customers purchases the goods whenever needed.

4. Credit Facilities : Retailers provides credit facility to customer which helps him to grow up sales and also it is convenient for the customers to purchase goods.

5. Home Delivery : Retailer provides home delivery service to the customers which helps him to maintains permanent relationship with the customers.

Question 4.
State any two types of small scale fixed shop retailer.
Answer:
Types of Small Scale Shop Retailers:
(i) General Store Retailer : These shops are found in residential areas and offers shopping convenience to the customers. They deal in wide variety of goods so there is scope for choice. They deal in almost all household articles and goods of daily use. They provide credit facilities and have personal relation with their customers. They have fixed place of business so the customers have faith and confidence in dealing with them.

(ii) Second Hand Goods Dealers : As the name indicates these shops deal in used or old goods and articles. They buy goods from individual and not from manufacturers or wholesalers. They repair or overhaul the items. They display them in their shops. Generally people from poor communities prefer to buy from these shops.

Question 5.
Explain preliminary stage of import procedure.
Answer:
Ist Stage : Preliminary Stage:
(1) Registration : In order to carry out import, the importer has to get himself registered with the authorities given below:

  • Director General Foreign Trade (DGFT) in order to get an Import-Export Certificate Number.
  • The Income Tax department to obtain Permanent Account Number.
  • To carry out GST formalities.

(2) Negotiation or Trade enquiry : The importer must collect information from overseas suppliers regarding the goods he wants to import of a product. It contains details like-

  • Price
  • Delivery schedule,
  • Credit period and
  • Terms and conditions of sale, payment and delivery.

Question 6.
Explain post-shipment stage of export procedure.
Answer:
Post-shipment Stage:

  1. Shipment Advice : On the dispatch of the goods, the exporter sends shipment advice to the importer. Along with it, he also sends the packaging list, commercial invoice and non-negotiable copy of loading.
  2. Presentation of Documents : The necessary documents are presented to the bank for negotiation and realisation of export proceeds.
  3. Realisation of Export incentive : Various incentive like duty drawbacks, refunds of GST if paid, etc. is given to the exporter by the concerned authorities.
  4. Follow up : Exporter has to follow up and find out the buyers reaction on the goods he receives. This concludes the export procedure.

6. Justify the following statements

Question 1.
Wholesaler sells goods in large quantities.
Answer:

  1. Wholesaler buys goods in large quantities from the manufacturer and sells it to the retailers according to their orders.
  2. Thus, wholesaler sells goods in large quantities.

Question 2.
Wholesaler maintains price stability.
Answer:

  1. A wholesaler is both a buyer and a seller.
  2. He is in a position to maintain price stability by balancing supply and demand factors.
  3. By suppling regular goods to the retailer, he solves the risk of shortage and price fluctuation is reduced. Thus, wholesaler maintains price stability.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 2 Trade

Question 3.
Retailer provide home delivery of goods to customers.
Answer:

  1. Retailer is a person who buys goods on smaller quantities.
  2. Retailer provides home delivery of goods to customer at nominal cost or free of cost.
  3. This helps them to improve relations with the customers and maintain permanent relations with the customers.
  4. Thus, retailer provide home delivery of goods to customers.

Question 4.
Wholesaler performs various marketing functions.
Answer:

  1. The wholesaler carries various marketing functions like warehousing, advertisings, sales promotion, etc. on behalf of the manufacturers.
  2. They also perform various marketing functions like assembling, warehousing, transporting, grading, packing, advertising and financing.
  3. These functions help the retailers and a manufacturers as they can concentrate on the production and selling activities.
  4. Thus, wholesaler performs various marketing functions.

Question 5.
Authorized dealer do not have other product of other manufacturers.
Answer:

  1. An authorized dealer only deals with one line of products from one manufacturers.
  2. They do not have products of other manufacturers.
  3. They promote the goods by providing window display, advertising and also having attractive schemes for selling the goods.
  4. Thus, authorized dealer do not have other product of other manufacturers.

Question 6.
General stores are generally situated near residential areas.
Answer:

  1. General stores are found in residential areas and offer shopping convenience to the customers.
  2. They deal in wide variety of goods.
  3. They deal with day to day useful goods.
  4. Thus, general stores are generally situated near residential areas.

Question 7.
Departmental store has centralized management system.
Answer:

  1. Departmental stores are generally established by joint stock companies.
  2. Various departments which look like specialized shops are controlled and managed by single management.
  3. The management of departmental store is centralized.
  4. All departmental store is centralized.
  5. All departments are independent but they are centrally owned managed are controlled.
  6. Thus, departmental store has centralized management system.

Question 8.
Packing plays an important role in selling product in the supermarket.
Answer:

  1. Packing plays an important role in selling products in the supermarket.
  2. Goods are duly packed by giving details of quantity, quality, weight, price, contents, date of manufacturing and date of expiry.
  3. This is helpful in handling the goods and also makes the goods more attractive and durable.
  4. Thus, packing plays an important role in selling product in the supermarket.

Question 9.
Chain store sell a limited range of goods.
Answer:

  1. Each branch of a chain store deals in the same commodity or in the same line of products.
  2. This enables the store to give better guidelines to the customers.
  3. Thus, chain store sell a limited range of goods.

Question 10.
There is no scope for bargaining in one price shop.
Answer:

  1. The goods are priced at one price which is fixed.
  2. There is a fixed and uniform price. ,
  3. The price are fixed in advance, so there is no scope for bargaining.
  4. Thus, there is no scope for bargaining in one price shop.

7. Answer the following

Question 1.
What are the main features of Wholesaler?
Answer:
(A) Meaning:

  1. Wholesalers are those who engage themselves in wholesale trade.
  2. It is concerned with the buying of goods in large quantities from producers and reselling the same in small quantities to the retailers.
  3. Wholesaler is a connecting link between producers on one hand and retailers on the other.

(B) Definitions:
Philip Kotler “wholese,lling includes all activities involved in selling goods or services to those who buy for resale or for business use.

(C) Features of Wholesaler:

  1. The wholesaler generally deals in one or few items of goods.
  2. Wholesaler requires a large amount of capital to be invested in the business.
  3. Wholesaler buys goods from the manufacturer in large scale.
  4. Wholesaler sells the goods to retailers as per their requirement.
  5. Wholesaler has direct contact with manufacturer.
  6. Wholesaler is located in the same area for convenience of the retailer.
  7. Wholesaler acts as a real risk bearer in the process of distribution,
  8. Wholesaler performs various marketing functions.

Question 2.
Explain the services of retailers to wholesalers.
Answer:
Services of Retailers to Wholesalers:

  1. Create demand: Retailers attracts consumers attention towards new products and arrivals in the market through personal salesmanship.
  2. Helps to Distribute : Retailer helps distributing perishable goods which are having short life. He also performs assembling, grading and packing function.
  3. Marketing: Retailers sometimes carry marketing function for the wholesalers i.e. handling transportation, solving shortage problems, advertise goods, etc.
  4. Financing: Wholesaler collects order from customers and take advances from them. Then places order to manufacturer. Retailer collects sales proceeds from customers and passes it to the wholesaler and finally it reaches the manufacturer.
  5. Attracts Consumers : Retailer makes an advertising of goods by displaying in the showroom and thus promote sales. This activity directly helps the wholesaler to sell the product.
  6. Provides Information: Retailer provides information to the wholesaler regarding market and demand of goods by the customers, likes and dislikes of customers, etc.
  7. Connecting Link : Retailer purchases goods from wholesaler and sells it to the customer and thus act as a middleman.
  8. Increase Sales : Retailers help the wholesaler to increase his sales by buying goods from him regularly and at short intervals.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 2 Trade

Question 3.
Explain small scale fixed shop retailers.
Answer:
Small Scale Fixed Shop Retailers:
Small scale fixed retailers usually run their business operations on a small scale and deal in limited fine of goods. Such shops are run by their owners with the help of assistants. These shops are situated in residential areas.

Types of Small Scale Shop Retailers:
(i) General Stores : These shops are found in residential areas and offers shopping convenience to the customers. They deal in wide variety of goods so there is scope for choice. They deal in almost all household articles and goods of daily use. They provide credit facilities and have personal relation with their customers. They have fixed place of business so the customers have faith and confidence in dealing with them.

(ii) Second Hand Goods Shops : As the name indicates these shops deal in used or old goods and articles. They buy goods from individual and not from manufacturers or wholesalers. They repair or overhaul the items. They display them in their shops. Generally people from poor communities prefer to buy from these shops.

(iii) Authorised Dealers : These retailers have an authorized dealership of a particular manufacturer’s goods. They sell of consumers requirement goods like T.V. sets, mobile phones, washing machine, etc.

(iv) Speciality Shops : These retailers deal in particular line of goods. They keep a wide variety of items within the same line of products. They offer goods at reasonable prices. They are popular in cities and towns. They provide wide choice to customers. Normally they carry on business on cash basis.

Question 4.
Explain the services of wholesalers.
Answer:
Wholesaler provides services to:
(A) Manufacturers and (B) Retailers
(A) Services of Wholesalers to Manufacturers:

  1. Finance Assistance : Wholesaler provides advance to the manufacturers, so they can do bulk production. Thus, manufacturer can maintain continuous flow of production.
  2. Collecting Order and Distribution of Goods : Wholesaler collects small orders of goods from the retailers then he collects the goods from manufacturer and distributes it to retailers.
  3. Large Purchase : Wholesaler purchases goods on large scale from the manufacturers and sells it to the retailers on behalf of the manufacturers.
  4. Transportation: Wholesaler sometimes carry the transportation function of manufacturer by himself. So cost and time of manufacturer is saved.
  5. Risk Bearing: He takes a risk of buying goods in big quantity and storing them. This may sometimes lead him to loss.
  6. Provide Market Information : Wholesaler provides latest information of market condition to manufacturer. On the basis of this information manufacturer changes his production policies and regulates production activities.
  7. Marketing Function: Wholesaler carries many marketing functions like warehousing, advertising, sales promotion, etc. on behalf of manufacturer.
  8. Storage : The wholesaler provides storage facilities for the products manufacture by the producers. This helps them to fill up the time gap between production and consumption of goods.

(B) Services of Wholesaler to Retailers:

  1. Financial Support: Wholesaler provides credit facility, discount facility and financial assistance to their retailers.
  2. Market Information : Wholesaler provides market information to retailers as he has link with various manufacturers. This information is very useful to retailers for purchase of goods.
  3. Risk Bearing : Retailer holds limited stock of goods and avoids the risk of spoilage of goods. Retailer get protected from increase or decrease of prices of goods and fluctuation of demand.
  4. Stock of Goods : Wholesaler stores the stock of goods for retailers, then retailer supply these goods to customers as per their demands.
  5. Warehousing and Transport: Wholesaler provides the facility of storing of goods as well as transport facility to retailers. They also do home delivery of goods to retailers.
  6. Regular Supply : Wholesaler assures regular supply of goods to the retailers. Risk of shortage of goods and price fluctuation is reduced.
  7. Sales Promotion : Wholesaler provides promotional facility to the retailer. He advertises on behalf of retailers and this helps the retailers to increase the sales.

Question 5.
Explain the different services of retailers.
Answer:
Retailers provides services to:
(A) Customers and
(B) Wholesaler

(A) Services of Retailers to Customers:
1. Variety of Goods : Retailer keep different brands of goods which helps the customer to choose.

2. After Sales Services : After sales services are given for a particular period, which is known as guarantee period for costly and durable goods such as refrigerators, TV. etc. Such services create confidence in minds of consumers for further purchases.

3. Regular Supply of Goods : Retailer stocks the goods sufficiently which are required by the customers and customers purchases the goods whenever needed.

4. Credit Facilities : Retailers provides credit facility to customer which helps him to grow up sales and also it is convenient for the customers to purchase goods.

5. Home Delivery : Retailer provides home delivery service to the customers which helps him to maintains permanent relationship with the customers.

6. Information : Retailer is a link between manufacturer and consumer. He provides valuable information from the customers to the manufacturer so that he can modify the product as per the likes and dislikes of the customers. Corpplaints regarding defects in goods, improper functioning of the product, constant break down, etc. are passed on to the manufacturers.

7. Local Convenience : Retailers are generally located near residential areas. Hence, customers can buy the goods whenever they require.

8. Improves Standard of Living : Retailers help customers to increase their standard of living by making available all the latest types of goods produced.

9. Sale of Perishable Goods : Perishable goods like milk, meat, fish, vegetables, etc. require quick distribution. Hence, retailer provides this facility as per customers requirement.

(B) Services of Retailers to Wholesaler:

  1. Create demand: Retailers attracts consumers attention towards new products and arrivals in the market through personal salesmanship.
  2. Helps to Distribute : Retailer helps distributing perishable goods which are having short life. He also performs assembling, grading and packing function.
  3. Marketing: Retailers sometimes carry marketing function for the wholesalers i.e. handling transportation, solving shortage problems, advertise goods, etc.
  4. Financing: Wholesaler collects order from customers and take advances from them. Then places order to manufacturer. Retailer collects sales proceeds from customers and passes it to the wholesaler and finally it reaches the manufacturer.
  5. Attracts Consumers : Retailer makes an advertising of goods by displaying in the showroom and thus promote sales. This activity directly helps the wholesaler to sell the product.

Question 6.
Define import trade. Explain its procedure in detail.
Answer:
Import trade refers to buying of goods and services from another country or countries i.e. a foreign country. The procedure of import trade varies from one country to another country depending upon the policy implemented in that country. Import of goods and services is controlled by the government in most of the countries. India follows the following import procedure, which is divided into four stages.

[A] Ist Stage : Preliminary Stage :
(1) Registration : In order to carry out import, the importer has to get himself registered with the authorities given below:

  • Director General Foreign Trade (DGFT) in order to get an Import-Export Certificate Number.
  • The Income Tax department to obtain Permanent Account Number.
  • To carry out GST formalities.

(2) Negotiation or Trade enquiry : The importer must collect information from overseas suppliers regarding the goods he wants to import of a product. It contains details like-

  • Price
  • Delivery schedule,
  • Credit period and
  • Terms and conditions of sale, payment and delivery.

[B] IInd Stage : Pre-import Stage :
(i) Import License / Quota Certificate : The Export Import (EXIM) Policy of our country indicates which goods need license for import and which can be imported freely. For goods that require a license, the importer should get a quota certificate and acquire the license. At the time of importing goods, the IEC number is to be mentioned.

(ii) Foreign Exchange Clearance : The exporter has to be paid in foreign exchange by the importer as he resides in a foreign country. For this the Indian currency has to be exchanged for foreign currency. This is done by Exchange Control Department of the Reserve Bank of India (RBI). The importer has to get the foreign exchange sanctioned. For this he applies in a prescribed form to a bank authorised by RBI. After scrutiny of the documents, the necessary foreign exchange is sanctioned.

(iii) Placing an Order : Once the foreign exchange clearance is obtained from RBI the importer places an import order with the exporter for supply of goods. This order contains information on all aspects relating to the goods to be imported. These include quality, quantity, size, grade, price, packing and shipping, ports of shipment, insurance, delivery schedule and modes of payment. This order is called as indent.

(iv) Letter of Credit : If the exporter agrees to a letter of credit, then the importer obtains it from his bank and forwards it to the exporter. It minimises the risk of non-payment for the exporter. At the same time, the importer should arrange for sufficient funds to be paid on delivery of the goods.

(v) Clearing and Forwarding Agent : The importer then appoints C & F agent to look after the various customs formalities and documentation work with respect to import of goods.

(vi) Shipment Advice: Once the goods are loaded on the vessel, the exporter sends a shipment advice to the importer. This document contains details about the goods, invoice number, bill of lading and name of the vessel, the port of export and date of sailing of the vessel. This will help the importer for custom clearance and unloading of goods.

[C] IIIrd Stage : Import Stage:
(1) Receipt of Document : The importer receives the documents sent by the exporter through his bank. They are as follows Bill of Lading, Certificate of Origin, Certificate of Inspection, Packing List, Commercial Invoice, etc.

(ii) Bill of Entry : The clearing and forwarding agents, then prepare a bill of entry. This bill is presented to the dock superintendent for release of goods. The bill of entry has details like number of packages, quality of good and price of goods.

(iii) Delivery Order : For taking delivery of the goods a delivery order is needed. This is obtained from the shipping company by the C & F agent. Once this is received the freight charges are paid and goods are allowed to be unloaded from the ship.

(iv) Customer Clearance : The importer has to present the Bill of Lading, Bill of Entry and Packing List to the customer authority who will certify it and give customs clearance.

[D] IVth stage : Posts Import Stage:
Various duties have to paid in order to take the goods out of port are:

  1. Port Trust Dues : The clearing and forwarding agent has to make the payment of port trust dues.
  2. Customer Duty : Also paid by the clearing and forwarding agent to the custom authorities.
  3. Insurance Premium : Under the FOB (Free of Board) impact, the importer has to make the payment of Insurance Premium.
  4. Payment of Freight: The shipping contract will lay down the amount of freight to be paid and it has to be paid by the importer for getting clearance of goods.
  5. Exporters Payment: The exporter draws a Bill of Exchange on the importer according to the terms and conditions of the contract.
  6. Follow Up : It is the duty of the importer to take a follow up of the goods. If there are any discrepancies in the order or goods it has to be intimated to the exporter. Thus, the procedure of importing goods comes to an end.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 2 Trade

Question 7.
What is export trade? Explain its procedure in detail.
Answer:
Trade between two countries is called International Trade. It can be import or export trade. Export trade refers to selling of goods and services to other country or foreign countries.

Export procedure is as follows:
There are four stages which help in simplify the export procedure.
[A] Preliminary Stage : This is the first stage which includes the following steps.
(1) Registration : The exporter gets himself registered with various authorities in order to conduct export trade like-

  • Director General of Foreign Trade in order to obtain Import Export Certificate Number.
  • Income Tax Authority to obtain Permanent Account Number.
  • Export Promotion Council (EPC) and GST authority.

(2) Appointment of Agent: The exporters are supposed to appoint an agent in the foreign country who will look after the order or book order for the exporter.

[B] Pre-shipment Stage:

  1. Receipt of Order : When the exporter receives an order he has to check the details of the order. He also check the restriction of import in the importer’s country.
  2. Letter of Credit: The exporter has to obtain a letter of credit from the importer, which is used to clear the foreign exchanges and other restrictions.
  3. Pre-shipment Finance : The exporter has to meet his working capital needs and for that he has to obtain the pre-shipment finance from his bankers.
  4. Production of goods : If the exporter is a manufacturer, then he has to produce the goods according to the order placed by the importer, otherwise he has get the necessary goods arranged from his suppliers.
  5. Packaging : Packaging plays a very important role in export business. Goods have to be packed as per the requirement of the importer and it should protect the goods in transit, preserve the quality of goods and carry out promotion of goods.
  6. ECGC Cover (Export Credit and Guarantee Corporation) : In order to protect the goods and cover the credit risks, the exporter must obtain an cover of ECGC. The ECGC covers the risk upto 90%, if the importer fails to make the payment.
  7. GST formalities (Goods and Service Tax): All formalities regarding GST must be complied with by the exporter.
  8. Marine Insurance : For exporting the goods, it is mandatory for the exporter to take a marine insurance policy for the goods exported. This insurance is under CIF (Cost,Insurance and freight) contract.
  9. Clearing and Forwarding Agents (C & F agents): The exporter has to appoint a clearing and forwarding agent to carry out the necessary formalities of customs. They are also called custom house agents.

[C] Shipment Stage:
(i) Processing of Document: The exporter prepares the shipping bill and gets all the documents processed at the customs house as required for the export of good.

(ii) Examination of Goods : The clearing and forwarding agents obtain1 a document called ‘carting order’ from the Port Trust Authorities, which allows the exporter to take the goods inside the dock area.

(iii) Loading of Goods : On examination of the goods, the ‘Customs Examiner’ issues order called ‘Let Export’ order. This is given to the clearing and forwarding agent by the ‘Customers Preventative Officer’ (CPO). The goods are then loaded on the ship and the captain of the ship issue a receipt called the ‘Mates Receipt’. Then the C & F agent obtain the Bill of Lading.

[D] Post-shipment Stage:

  1. Shipment Advice : On the dispatch of the goods, the exporter sends shipment advice to the importer. Along with it, he also sends the packaging list, commercial invoice and non-negotiable copy of loading.
  2. Presentation of Documents : The necessary documents are presented to the bank for negotiation and realisation of export proceeds.
  3. Realisation of Export incentive : Various incentive like duty drawbacks, refunds of GST if paid, etc. is given to the exporter by the concerned authorities.
  4. Follow up : Exporter has to follow up and find out the buyers reaction on the goods he receives. This concludes the export procedure.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Organisation of Commerce and Management 11th Textbook Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Organisation of Commerce and Management Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business

1. (A) Select the correct option and rewrite the sentence

Question 1.
A Lawyer is ……………..
(a) a professional person
(b) a businessman
(c) an employee
Answer:
(a) a professional person

Question 2.
Raw material is converted into finished product by…………….. industry.
(a) genetic
(b) extractive
(c) manufacturing
Answer:
(c) manufacturing

Question 3.
Actual buying and selling of goods is known as ………………..
(a) profession
(b) trade
(c) industry
Answer:
(b) trade

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business

Question 4.
National level code of conduct is prepared for ……………….
(a) professionals
(b) businessmen
(c) employees
Answer:
(a) professionals

Question 5.
Construction of dams is an activity done under ……………….. industry.
(a) primary
(b) secondary
(c) tertiary
Answer:
(b) secondary

Question 6.
The problem of distance is solved by ………………..
(a)bank
(b) transport
(c) warehousing
Answer:
(b) transport

Question 7.
Commerce is a branch of ………………
(a) business
(b) industry
(c) trade
Answer:
(a) business

Question 8.
Return in business is called ………………
(a) fees
(b) salary
(c) profit
Answer:
(c) profit

Question 9.
A business unit depends upon ………………… for selling its output.
(a) industry
(b) society
(c) employees
Answer:
(b) society

Question 10.
Warehousing creates ……………… utility of goods.
(a) place
(b) time
(c) form
Answer:
(b) time

1. (B) Match the pairs

Question 1.

Group A Group B
(a) Helping disabled person (1) Social objective
(b) Genetic industry (2) Foreign trade
(c) Local Currency (3) Sericulture
(d) Solve social problems (4) Non-economic activity
(e) Employment (5) Internal trade
(6) Mining
(7) Profit
(8) Economic activity
(9) Business
(10) Home trade

Answer:

Group A Group B
(a) Helping disabled person (4) Non-economic activity
(b) Genetic industry (3) Sericulture
(c) Local Currency (5) Internal trade
(d) Solve social problems (1) Social objective
(e) Employment (8) Economic activity

1. (C) Give one word, phrase or term

Question 1.
A regular activity concerned with production and distribution of goods and services for profits.
Answer:
Business activity

Question 2.
Human activities that are conducted for earning money.
Answer:
Economic activities

Question 3.
Buying and selling of goods against money or money’s worth.
Answer:
Trade

Question 4.
Activities that remove all the difficulties in trade.
Answer:
Auxiliaries to trade

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business

Question 5.
The type of industries that creates immovable wealth.
Answer:
Construction industry

Question 6.
Name the business activity which is concerned with production of goods and services.
Answer:
Industry

Question 7.
Name the business activity which is concerned with distribution of goods and services.
Answer:
Commerce

Question 8.
The activity which provides mobility to men and material.
Answer:
Transport

Question 9.
An aid to trade which creates time utility.
Answer:
Warehousing

Question 10.
An occupation by which a person agrees to provide expert services for fees.
Answer:
Profession

1. (D) State True or False

Question 1.
Business is an economic activity.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Every profession is practiced for earning money.
Answer:
True

Question 3.
Primary industries are concerned with nature.
Answer:
True

Question 4.
Trade includes commerce.
Answer:
False

Question 5.
Warehousing removes difficulty of time.
Answer:
True

Question 6.
Trade includes buying and selling of goods and services.
Answer:
True

Question 7.
Profit leads to increase in overall efficiency of the organisation.
Answer:
True

Question 8.
Plant nursery is an example of extractive industry.
Answer:
False

Question 9.
Industry creates form utility.
Answer:
True

Question 10.
Retailer is the link between manufacturer and wholesaler.
Answer:
False

1. (E) Find the odd one

Question 1.
Agriculture industry, Extractive industry, Genetic industry, Manufacturing industry.
Answer:
Manufacturing industry

Question 2.
Import trade, Export trade, Wholesale trade, Entrepot trade.
Answer:
Wholesale trade

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business

Question 3.
Banking, Insurance, Transport, Manufacturing.
Answer:
Manufacturing

Question 4.
Tea, Milk, Coffee, Machinery.
Answer:
Machinery

1. (F) Complete the sentences

Question 1.
Economic activities are those activities which are conducted to ………………
Answer:
earn money

Question 2.
……………… Includes marketing of goods and services.
Answer:
commerce

Question 3.
Business is an ……………….. activity.
Answer:
economic

Question 4.
The basic purpose to is to ………………… earn profit.
Answer:
business

Question 5.
Professional charges …………………… in exchange of expert services.
Answer:
fees

Question 6.
……………… is the person who offers the work.
Answer:
employer

Question 7.
………………. is considered as a reward for assuming several business risks.
Answer:
profit

Question 8.
Industry creates ………………… utility.
Answer:
form

Question 9.
In ………………. trade, goods, are purchased and sold in bulk.
Answer:
wholesale

Question 10.
……………….. is the link between wholesaler arid customer.
Answer:
Retailer

1. (G) Select the correct option

Question 1.
(Export trade, Foreign trade, Wholesaler, Import Trade, Economic objective of business)

Group A Group B
(i) Trade between different countries —————
(ii) Purchase of goods and services from another country ————–
(iii) ————– Selling of goods and services to foreign customer
(iv) ————– Link between producer and retailer
(v) Spending money on Research and Development for development of business ——————–

Answer:

Group A Group B
(i) Trade between different countries Foreign Trade
(ii) Purchase of goods and services from another country Import Trade
(iii) Export Trade Selling of goods and services to foreign customer
(iv) Wholesaler Link between producer and retailer
(v) Spending money on Research and Development for development of business Economic objective of business.

1. (H) Answer in one sentence

Question 1.
What is an economic activity?
Answer:
Activity done for earning money is an economic activity.

Question 2.
What is a non-economic activity?
Answer:
Activities are done to satisfy human wants other than monetary demands.

Question 3.
What do you mean by wholesale trade?
Answer:
Trade conducted on large scale is wholesale trade.

Question 4.
What is the meaning of retail trade?
Answer:
Trade conducted on small scale is retail trade.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business

Question 5.
What do you mean by import trade?
Answer:
When the goods or services are bought from other countries, to home country it is called import trade.

Question 6.
What do you mean by export trade?
Answer:
When the goods or services are sold to other countries, form home country it is called export trade.

Question 7.
What is an entrepot trade?
Answer:
Goods brought in the country from one country and sold to some other country, it is called entrepot trade.

Question 8.
What is meant by auxiliaries to trade?
Answer:
Auxiliaries to trade are the services which help the smooth conduct of trade.

Question 9.
What is trade?
Answer:
Buying and selling of goods and services is called trade.

Question 10.
What do you mean by commerce?
Answer:
Commerce is a part of business activity which is concerned with the distribution of goods and services.

Question 11.
What is primary industry?
Answer:
Industry which depends upon nature for production is called primary industry.

Question 12.
What is secondary industry?
Answer:
Industry which depends upon primary industry for production is called secondary industry.

Question 13.
What do you mean by genetic industry?
Answer:
Genetic industry means the industry engaged in reproduction and multiplication of plants.

1. (I) Correct the underlined word and rewrite the following sentences

Question 1.
Profession can be transferred to other person.
Answer:
Profession cannot be transferred to other person.

Question 2.
Capital is required for employment.
Answer:
Capital is required for business.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business

Question 3.
Industry creates place utility.
Answer:
Transport creates place utility.

Question 4.
Commerce represents supply side of market.
Answer:
Industry represents supply side of market.

Question 5.
The basic purpose of business is to provide services.
Answer:
The basic purpose of business is to make profit.

Question 6.
Business is non-economic activity.
Answer:
Business is an economic activity.

Question 7.
Barter exchange is an exchange with money.
Answer:
Barter exchange is an exchange with goods.

2. Explain the following terms/concepts

Question 1.
Business.
Answer:

  1. Business is one of the economic activities.
  2. Business is done to earn profit.
  3. It is done by individuals or organisations.
  4. Business includes all those activities done for production, processing and distribution of goods.
  5. Business has a risk involved.

Question 2.
Profession.
Answer:

  1. Profession is a part of economic activity.
  2. A person who practices profession is called a professional.
  3. A professional has to acquire particular knowledge under formal education system.
  4. He practices and obtain skill in his profession. E.g. Doctors, Lawyers, Chartered Accountants, Architects etc.
  5. A professional gets fees for his services.

Question 3.
Employment.
Answer:

  1. Employment is an economic activity.
  2. A person works for others to earn his livelihood.
  3. A person who works is called an employee and a person who offers work is an employer.
  4. Employee gets remuneration after certain period which is called salary or wages.

Question 4.
Home Trade.
Answer:

  1. Trade means buying and selling of goods and services.
  2. Trade conducted within the boundaries of the country i.e. buying and selling of goods and services within the country is called home trade or internal trade.
  3. Home trade is divided into two parts; Wholesale trade and retail trade.

Question 5.
Foreign Trade.
Answer:

  1. Buying and selling of goods and services is called trade.
  2. Trade can be conducted within the country or with other countries.
  3. Trade conducted with other countries is called foreign or external trade.
  4. Foreign trade is divided into three parts; they are import, export and entrepot trade.

Question 6.
Economic Activity.
Answer:

  1. Human beings are engaged in various activities throughout the day.
  2. Some activities are done to earn money or livelihood.
  3. These activities are called economic activities.
  4. Economic activities are of three types; they are business, employment and profession.
  5. Because of the economic activities a person can earn for himself and his family.
  6. These activities are required for the survival of a human being.

Question 7.
Non-economic Activity.
Answer:
(i) Human activities are divided into two types – economic and non-economic activities.

(ii) Non-economic activities are those which are conducted by a person to satisfy his non monetary requirements. They include personal, social, cultural, religious activities, etc. E.g. singing, playing games, gardening etc.

3. Study the following case/situation and express your opinion.

1. Jaysukh oil mills produce refined oil. The entire production is purchased by Rupesh Oil Depot, who in turn sells it to various retailers. Mrs. Prachi purchased 2kg oil from Balaji Groceries.

Question 1.
Wholesaler
Answer:
Wholesaler – Rupesh Oil Depot

Question 2.
Retailer
Answer:
Retailer – Balaji Groceries

Question 3.
Consumer
Answer:
Consumer – Mrs. Prachi

2. Mr. Pranav is a tin manufacturer in India. Mr. Jack of England sells goods to M/s Frank Corporation in North America and Mr. Williams of USA buys various goods from Brazil.

Question 1.
Who is the importer?
Answer:
Importer – M/s Frank Corporation in North America, Mr. Williams in USA

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business

Question 2.
Who is the manufacturer?
Answer:
Manufacturer – Mr. Pranav

Question 3.
Who is the exporter?
Answer:
Exporter – Mr. Jack

4. Distinguish between the following

Question 1.
Industry and Commerce.
Answer:

Industry Commerce
(1) Meaning Industry is engaged in the production of goods and services. Commerce looks after the distribution of goods and services.
(2) Location Industries are located in the industrial belts which are usually away from residential areas. Infact there is no particular location of commerce. It gives its services at any location.
(3) Utility Industries create form utility. Commerce creates place, time and possession utility.
(4) Resources Industries require mainly machinery, materials and man power for production Commerce mainly works with the help of man power.
(5) Capital Industries require huge capital. It mainly depends upon the size of industry. Activities of commerce comparatively require less capital.
(6) Interdependence Industries depend on commerce for the supply of raw materials and carrying finished goods to markets. Commerce cannot function unless supported by the goods provided by the industries.
(7) Conducted by Manufacturers Traders or mercantile agents
(8) Classification Industries are divided into Primary, secondary and tertiary types. Commerce is divided into Trade and auxiliaries to trade.
(9) Market Force Industries represent supply side of the market. Commerce represents demand side of markets.
(10) Status It has primary importance. It has secondary importance.

Question 2.
Business and Commerce.
Answer:

Business Commerce
(1) Meaning It is an economic activity engaged in production and distribution of goods and services. Commerce takes care of distribution of goods and services.
(2) Concept Business is a wider term than business. Commerce is a narrower term than business.
(3) Part of Business is a part of economic activity. Commerce is a part of business.
(4) Skill Industries require more of technical, managerial and marketing skills. Commerce mainly require managerial and marketing skills.
(5) Classification Business is classified into two parts industry and commerce. Commerce is divided into two parts trade and auxiliaries to trade.
(6) Capital It requires large capital. It requires limited capital.
(7) Investment Heavy investment is required. Less investment is required.

Question 3.
Business and Profession.
Answer:

Business Profession
(1) Meaning It is an economic activity where goods and services are produced and distributed. Profession is also an economic activity under which a person uses his knowledge and provide expect services.
(2) Nature A person invests his capital and starts business. He may or may not have proper skill or knowledge. A professional has to take formal training before starting his profession.
(3) Special education Business does not require special formal education though it is advisable. Professional is required to take formal education to practice a profession.
(4) Returns A businessman gets profit. A professional gets fees from clients.
(5) Registration A businessman need not register with a particular body or association. A professional has to register under the respective body or association eg. A Lawyer has to register himself with the Bar Council of India before carrying out his profession.
(6) Capital requirement More capital is required to run a business. Capital is brought by a businessman. Comparatively less capital is required to carry out a profession. The required capital is brought by a professional.
(7) Code of conduct There is no specific code of conduct for the businessmen. They are the owners so they may form the code of conduct for their organisation. There is specific code of conduct for a professional. This code is decided by the respective association.
(8) Examples Manufacturer of textiles, retailer, courier service provider, etc. Doctor, Lawyer, Architect, Chartered Accountant, etc.

Question 4.
Employment and Profession.
Answer:

Employment Profession
(1) Meaning Business is an economic activity, conducted to earn remuneration. Profession is also an economic activity under which a person uses his knowledge and provide services.
(2) Nature A person works for other person or organisation to get his livelihood. A professional has to take formal training before starting his profession.
(3) Special education It depends on the nature of employment. Some type of employment requires a specific type of education. Whereas in some cases any education is acceptable. Professional is required to take formal education to practice a profession.
(4) Returns An employee gets remuneration in the form of wages or salary. A professional gets fees from clients.
(5) Registration An employee does not require registering himself with specific associations. A professional has to register under the respective body or association eg. A Lawyer has to register himself with the Bar Council of India before carrying out his profession.
(6) Capital requirement Employee need not invest money in the business. He does not require capital. Comparatively less capital is required to carry out a profession. The required capital is brought by a professional.
(7) Code of conduct Employee has to follow the rules and regulations of his organisation. There is specific code of conduct for a professional. This code is decided by the respective association.
(8) Decisionmaking Employee has no right to take decisions in the organisations unless he is asked. Professional can take his own decisions as he is the owner.
(9) Tenure Every employment has a specific tenure. It means the maximum period for which an employee can remain in the employment is fixed. The employee has to retire after that period. Professional can work throughout his life also.

5. Answer in brief

Question 1.
State any four features of profession.
Answer:
Profession is a part of economic activity. A professional acquires formal knowledge to practice profession. Following are the features of profession:
(i) Qualification : A particular qualification is required to practice a profession. A professional needs to acquire knowledge through formal education. Unless he gets a formal knowledge and training, he cannot practice profession, e.g. A Doctor cannot prescribe medicines without having a degree in medicine.

(ii) R eturns: A professional charges fees for the services rendered to the clients, The fees charged by a professional depends on different factors like his knowledge, experience, skill etc. His income is not fixed.

(iii) Capital : Professional requires capital to set up or run his practice. The amount of capital depends upon the nature of practice a professional wants to do.

(iv) Work Nature : A professional who is expert in a particular field, provides services in his field of expertise, eg. an architect will provide his services in the field of building houses.

Beside the above features, there are other features like-

  1. Aim
  2. Registration and Membership
  3. N on transferability

Question 2.
State any two types of industries.
Answer:
Industries is a part of business. They look after the production of goods and services. Industries creates form utility. There are various types of industries. They can be broadly divided into three categories.
(i) Primary Industry :
These are the industries which depend on nature for their production. They include agriculture, mining, fishing, wood cutting etc. Primary industries are further divided into three types; agriculture industry, extractive industry and genetic industry.

(ii) Secondary Industry :
These are the industries which depend upon primary industries for their production. They mainly categorized as manufacturing industries and construction industries. Secondary industries use the raw materials of primary industries and convert them into finished products which is then sold in the market.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business

Question 3.
Give two types of Foreign Trade.
Answer:
Trade with other countries is called foreign trade. Foreign trade is of three types.

  1. Import trade : When the goods or services are purchased from other countries it is called import trade,
  2. Export trade : When the goods are sold to other countries, it is called export trade.
  3. Entrepot trade : It is also called re-exporting. In this case goods are first brought from one country and again resale to other country, e.g. A buyer from India imports goods from France and exports them to Australia.

Question 4.
State any four auxiliaries to trade.
Answer:
Auxiliaries to trade are all those services which help in the smooth conduct of trade. There are different types of services which help trade. They are explained below.
(i) Warehousing: Warehousing helps to store the goods safely. There is a gap between the time of production and the time of consumption. Warehousing fills up this gap by conveniently storing the goods till they are demanded in the market. Warehousing, thus, creates time utility. Care is taken that the goods do not get damaged in the warehouse.

(ii) Advertising : Advertising is an important tool in the hands of a businessman to communicate to potential buyers. In today’s world producer/seller is situated at one place and consumers are spread over wider area. Through advertisement, producer or seller can contact the consumers. There are different mediums of advertisement, e.g. T.V., Radio, Hoardings, Print etc.

(iii) Insurance : Business is exposed to many risks. A businessman has to be careful about the risks. Some risks can be avoided, some can be minimized and some can be transferred. Insurance is an auxiliary which helps the businessman to handle the risk. Businessman can transfer some of the risks to insurance company. Insurance company, by accepting premium from the businessman, assures him to pay compensation in case of loss.

(iv) Transport: Transport is an important auxiliary to trade. Transport carries raw materials and people to place of production and brings finished goods to markets. Thus transport creates place utility. Transport can be conducted by different modes e.g. rail, road, water or air.

Beside the above features, there are other features like-

  1. Banking
  2. Mercantile Agents
  3. Communication

Question 5.
State any four features of employment.
Answer:
Employment is an economic activity. A person works for others to earn his livelihood.
Following are the features of employment:
(i) Aim : The main aim of person accepting employment is to earn money.

(ii) Qualification : Qualifications are required depending upon the nature of employment. Some types of work require educational qualifications, some require some specific skill, some require both. But qualifications are necessary for employment.

(iii) Monetary returns : The person who accepts employments and work for the employer gets remuneration after specific intervals. Remuneration can be wages or salary. Usually wages are paid daily or weekly and salaries are paid monthly.

(iv) Capital: Capital is not required for the person who is in employment.

Question 6.
Write any four objectives of business.
Answer:
Business is done with some objectives. These can be divided as (a) Economic objectives and (b) Social objectives. Following are the Economic Objectives:

  1. Earning Profit: Business is done with the main objective of earning profit. Profit is always a motivating factor for a businessman.
  2. Searching New Customers : To maximize profit a business organisation has to search new customers. It is required to expand the business. It is also important to retain the old customers.
  3. Best possible use of Resources : Making best use of available resources is the objective of business. This ensures avoiding of wastage and saving valuable money. This ultimately leads to increase in profit.
  4. Innovation : One of the important objectives of business is to make innovations for the development of business. Therefore research and development becomes an important part of the working of any business organisation.

Question 7.
State any four features of business.
Answer:
Business is an economic activity which is done to earn profit.
Following are the features of business:
(i) An economic activity : Business is an economic activity. Because it is done to earn profit for livelihood.

(ii) Two parties : Business is mainly concerned with the production and distribution of goods and services. It means business transactions involve exchange and in any exchange two parties are involved. Thus business involves two parties.

(iii) Profit motive: Every business is done with a motive of making profit. Therefore all the activities of business revolve around profit. A businessman is not satisfied with the profit he gets, but he tries to maximize the profit either by increasing the production or by reducing the cost. He tries to find out new customers and new markets.

(iv) Production of Goods and Services : Business includes the production of goods and services. Raw materials are used and the finished goods are produced.

Question 8.
State any two types of primary industry.
Answer:
Primary industries are those industries which depend on nature for production. Primary industries are of three types which are given below.

  1. Agriculture industry: Agriculture includes cultivation of land. It is an important primary sector industry.
  2. Extractive industry : Extractive industry draws out the produce from natural resources like land, river or sea etc. The products extracted are usually in raw form they are converted into finished products and sold in the market.
  3. Genetic industry : Genetic industries are engaged in the reproduction and multiplication of plants and animals e.g. poultry, plant nursery, etc.

6. Justify the following statements.

Question 1.
Retailer is in direct contact with ultimate consumers.
Answer:

  1. Retailer in a trader operating in the chain of distribution.
  2. He deals with the ultimate consumer.
  3. Retailer is the last link in the chain of distribution.
  4. Goods flow from the producer to consumer in the following way:
    Producer → Wholesaler → Retailer → Consumer
  5. Thus, retailer comes into direct contact with the ultimate consumer.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business

Question 2.
Commerce is a wider term than trade.
Answer:

  1. Commerce is a part of business. Business is divided into two parts; industry and commerce,
  2. Commerce is concerned with the distribution of goods.
  3. Commerce is divided into two parts. One is trade and the other is auxiliaries to trade.
  4. Trade is concerned with buying and selling of goods and services.
  5. Trade is’a part of commerce.
  6. Along with trade, commerce also includes auxiliaries or services to trade.
  7. These services help in the smooth running of trade.
    Thus, it clearly indicates that commerce is a wider term than trade.

Question 3.
Risk is inevitable in business activities.
Answer:

  1. Every business is exposed to various risks. A businessman cannot avoid risks in the business.
  2. These risks include goods remaining unsold due to changes in fashions, risks of losses due to fire or theft, damage to goods during transportation or warehousing, risks of bad debts, etc.
  3. A businessman has to be prepared to handle these risks.
  4. These risks cannot be totally eliminated. But they can be minimized or transferred to insurance company.
  5. A businessman must be ready for the risks as they are inevitable.
  6. Thus, risk is inevitable in business activities.

Question 4.
Combination of import-export trade is entrepot trade.
Answer:

  1. Import, export and entrepot trade are the parts of foreign trade.
  2. When the goods are purchased from other countries it is called import trade.
  3. When the goods are sold to other countries it is called export trade.
  4. A combination of import and export trade is called entrepot trade.
  5. In case of entrepot trade goods are first purchased from one country i.e. imported and then sold to or exported to other country.
  6. E.g. Indian trader purchased some computers from Japan and sold them to Sri Lanka will be included in entrepot trade.
  7. Thus, entrepot trade is a combination of import and export trade.

Question 5.
Transport creates place utility.
Answer:

  1. Transport is one of the important auxiliaries to trade.
  2. Transport brings raw materials and people to the place of production and carries finished products to markets.
  3. There are different modes of transport through it carries goods and people from one place to another. They are rail, road, water and air.
  4. If goods are produced at one place, it may not have demand at that place only.
  5. Transport carries them to other place where they are demanded and create place utility.
  6. Thus, we can say that transport creates place utility.

Question 6.
Industrial activities take place before commerce starts its role.
Answer:

  1. Industry and commerce are the two parts of business.
  2. Both the parts are complimentary to each other.
  3. One cannot function without other.
  4. Industries look after the production of goods and services and commerce takes care of the distribution of the goods produced.
  5. Obviously production of goods comes first and it is followed by distribution or selling of goods.
  6. Thus, industrial activities take place before commerce starts its role.

Question 7.
Available resources should be used to its maximum.
Answer:

  1. Resources are always scarce. The demand for resources is more and the availability of resources is less.
  2. Similarly, resources belong to the society but the businesses use them for production and provide the finished products to the society.
  3. So it is necessary to use the resources carefully.
  4. Wastage of resources should be avoided.
  5. Wherever possible, recycling and reusing the resources should be considered by the businesses.
  6. Thus, whatever resources available should be used to its maximum.

Question 8.
Wholesalers is a link between retailer and manufacturer.
Answer:

  1. Wholesaler and retailer are the important intermediaries in trade.
  2. They help to bring the goods from the manufacturer to ultimate consumer.
  3. Wholesaler is a trader who deals in large quantities i.e. the wholesaler purchases the goods in bulk from the manufacturer and sells it to retailer in small quantities.
  4. Both the wholesalers and retailers are the part of chain of distribution, which is shown below.
    Producer → Wholesaler → Retailer → Consumer
  5. Thus, it is true that wholesaler is the link between the manufacturer and retailer.

Question 9.
Business is a part of economic activities.
Answer:

  1. Economic activities are those activities which are done with the intention of making money.
  2. A person has to earn money for his livelihood.
  3. However all economic activities are not same. They can be conducted mainly in three different ways.
    (a) Employment (b) Profession and (c) Business.
  4. Business is conducted to earn profit.
  5. businessman invests his own capital, takes decisions and carries out business activities.
  6. He also takes risk for carrying business activities.
  7. Thus, a businessman is responsible for the business activities. The profit earned is enjoyed by the businessman. So business is a part of economic activity.

Question 10.
Changing fashions is one of the important causes of business risk.
Answer:

  1. Business is exposed to various kinds of risk.
  2. The risks can be due to the loss of goods by fire or theft, bad debts, changes in government policies, goods remaining unsold etc.
  3. Goods remaining unsold due to changes in fashion, is also an important type of risk in the business.
  4. Due to this risk businessman can suffer loss.
  5. However this risk is there in case of some goods only e.g. clothes, footwear, jewellery, accessories, sun glasses etc.
  6. This risk is not there in case of food grains or vegetables as they are essentials and their demand remains somewhat constant.
  7. Thus, changes in fashion is an important risk in the business.

7. Answer the following questions

Question 1.
What do you mean by commerce ?
Answer:
Commerce involves distribution of goods and services. Commerce is a part of business. Business is divided into two parts. They are (i) industry and (ii) commerce. Industries are concerned with the distribution of goods and commerce does the distribution of those goods in the market. Commerce helps in bringing the goods from the manufacturer to consumer by making uninterrupted flow of goods. Commerce includes main two activities – (i) Trade and (ii) Auxiliaries to trade.
(i) Trade means buying and selling of goods and services. Any buying and selling is included in trade. It can be industrial goods, consumer goods or buying and selling of services, etc.

(ii) Auxiliaries of trade are all those supportive services which help in the smooth conduct of trade. They include transport, banking, insurance, advertising, etc.

Question 2.
What is the meaning of export trade?
Answer:
Trade is divided into two parts, (i) Home trade and (ii) Foreign trade. Home trade is a trade conducted within the country where as foreign trade is trade with other countries. When the goods are purchased from and sold to other countries it is included in foreign trade.

Foreign trade is divided into three parts, (i) Import trade, (ii) Export trade and (iii) Entrepot trade. In case of export trade goods are sold to other countries e.g. A garment trader from India selling his garments to England will be included in export trade. Export trade plays an important role in the economy of any country, It helps a country to get valuable foreign exchange for the country, It also helps to enhance the reputation of the country in the foreign market.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business

Question 3.
State the role of auxiliaries to trade in trading activities.
Answer:
Role of auxiliaries to trade:

  1. Auxiliaries to trade are all the services which help trade.
  2. Trade means buying and selling of goods. However buying and selling is not possible unless it is supported by different services which will make the trade easy.
  3. There are different auxiliaries or services which support buying and selling. They are : transport, warehousing, banking, insurance, advertising, etc.
  4. These services help the trader as well as the buyers. They remove the hindrances in the process of distribution and ensure smooth flow of goods from the manufacturer to consumer.
  5. In modern world, the manufacturers and’ consumers stay away from each other. It becomes very difficult for the manufacturer to contact the buyers and sell goods directly to them.
  6. In this regard auxiliaries to trade help in establishing a link between the manufacturer or seller to consumer.

Question 4.
What are the different types of secondary industries?
Answer:
Secondary industries are those which depend upon primary industry for production. Secondary industries take raw materials from primary industries and carry out their production.
Secondary industries are of two types:
(i) Manufacturing industry : These industries are engaged in the manufacturing of various types of goods. They may be consumer goods or industrial goods. These industries convert raw materials into finished products. They make use of men, material and money for production. The examples of these industries include chemical industry, electronics industry, textile industry, paper industry.

(ii) Construction industry : These types of secondary industries are engaged in the construction activities such as dams, bridges, buildings, roads, tunnels etc. In case of other industries the goods are produced at one place but sold at different places. However in case of construction industry the construction takes place at one place only. Thus this industry creates immovable property.

Question 5.
State the types of human activities.
Answer:
There are various activities conducted by a person in a day. These activities can be divided into two parts.
Human Activities:
Economic activities
Non-economic activities

1. Economic activities : These activities are conducted to earn money. A human being requires money for livelihood. Economic activities are divided into three types.

  • Business
  • Profession
  • Employment

Business is done to earn profit. Profession is done by acquiring special knowledge to provide services to people. A professional gets fees for the services rendered. Whereas when a person works for other person or” organisation to earn wage or salary, is called employment.

2. Non-economic activities : Non-economic activities are conducted by the person to satisfy their needs other than financial needs. These activities include cultural, social, religious, sports, health related etc.

Question 6.
Describe the scope of internal trade.
Answer:
Internal trade is a part of trade. It includes buying and selling of goods within the country. Internal trade is further divided into two parts.
(i) Wholesale Trade : Wholesale trade is a trade conducted on large scale. A wholesaler purchases goods in bulk from the manufacturer and sells them to the retailers. Wholesaler forms a large network through which he helps to distribute goods at distant places. Wholesaler is an expert trader in his field. He acts as a link between the manufacturer and the retailer.

(ii) Retail Trade : Retail trade is a trade conducted on small scale. He purchases goods from the wholesalers and sells them to the consumers in required quantities. Retailer comes into direct contact with the consumers. A retailer caters to the needs of consumers by providing them various goods in whatever quantities they want.

Question 7.
How does banking and insurance help trading?
Answer:
Commerce includes trade and auxiliaries to trade. Trade means buying and selling of goods and services. But buying and selling is not possible unless it is supported by the auxiliaries of trade. Thus auxiliaries to trade are the services which help trade. Banking and insurance are two important auxiliaries to trade.
(i) Banking : Banking services help traders in many ways. Branches of banks are spread over wider areas. Traders can open an account in bank and take the advantage of various banking services. Banks offer loans, overdrafts, transfer of money, letter of credit, foreign exchange facilities to the traders.

(ii) Insurance : There are various kinds of risks in the business. A businessman can transfer some risks on the insurance company. Goods can be destroyed by fire, theft or damaged in transportation. The businessman can transfer these risks on the insurance company. He has to pay premium to the insurance company and make a contract with the insurance company. In case of loss, insurance company pays compensation to the trader.

(iii) Thus, the risks cannot be avoided completely but can be minimized by taking insurance policy.

8. Answer the following in details.

Question 1.
Give comparative analysis of business, profession and employment.
Answer:
Business, profession and employment are the part of economic activities. These activities are conducted to earn money. However the nature of all the three activities is different. A comparative analysis of all the three activities is given below:
Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business 1

Question 2.
Define business. Explain its features.
Answer:
Business is a part of economic activities. Business is done to earn profit. It is done by an individual or a group of individuals. Business can be defined in many ways by thinkers. Some of them are given below:
Prof. Haney : “ Business activities are all those activities which are directed towards the production and processing of wealth”.
Prof. Pride, Huges and Kapoor: “The organised efforts of individuals to produce and sell for a profit, the goods and services that satisfy society’s needs”.

The term business also refers to the organised efforts and activities of individuals to produce and sell goods and services for profit.

Following are the features of business:
1. Continuity in Dealings : Continuity is most important in case of any business. Business requires regularity. Business activity should be carried on for a Longer time. A transaction carried on only for one time or few times cannot be called as a business activity, e.g. Sale of own old motor car cannot be considered as a business activity.

2. Uncertain Returns : The returns in any business are not fixed. They are uncertain and fluctuating. The profit of business is not fixed or guaranteed.

3. Risk Element: Business is exposed to many risks. These risks arise out of some unforeseen circumstances or wrong decisions or misjudgements of the businessman. A businessman cannot avoid the risks but he can minimize the risks by taking proper steps. Some risks can be transferred to insurance company.

4. Satisfaction : Customer is an integral part of any business activity. Without a customer there cannot be buying or selling. Businesses need customers to fulfil their monetary objective and therefore customer satisfaction is the most important part of any business activity. Modern thinking on business gives top most priority to customer satisfaction. If the customers are satisfied, there will be more sale and profit to the business.

5. Two Parties : Business includes production and distribution. Every business transaction involves exchange. For carrying out any exchange two parties are required. These two parties are the seller and the buyer. There is an oral or written agreement between the buyer and the seller to buy or sell the goods or services.

6. Economic Activity : Business is an economic activity. The intention of carrying out any business is to earn money. Business is not conducted for satisfying sentimental needs of a person. Business activity is purely monetary.

7. Profit Motive : Business is basically conducted to earn profit. Every businessman tries to get maximum profit out of the business. Profit is required for the businessman to earn the livelihood and also for the survival of the business. It is also required for the expansion of business. Thus profit plays a vital role in business.

8. Production of Goods and Services :: Business has two aspects. One is production of goods and services and distribution of them. Goods are produced by the industries. Providing of services also form an important part of business activities.

9. Exchange of Goods and Services : Goods and services are exchanged for money or money’s worth. It is a business activity as there is a seller and a buyer and they exchange goods or services for a value. In modern days almost all the transactions are carried out with money as a medium of exchange. In case of very few transactions, goods are exchanged for goods.

10. Dealings in Goods and Services : In case of business, goods or services are bought and sold. There cannot be business without the exchange of goods or services. Goods can be consumer goods or industrial goods. Services are of different types like banking, insurance etc. Services are also exchanged for a value.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business

Question 3.
Describe various objectives of a business.
Answer:
Business is an economic activity which includes production and distribution of goods and services. Business is done to get profit. Even though business is done with the intention of making profit, that is not the only objective of the business. There are other objectives of business.
The objectives of business are explained below:

A. Economic Objectives:
(i) Searching of New Customers : Business needs expansion. So that it can earn more profit. Therefore searching new customers or new markets becomes an important economic objective of business.

(ii) Earning Profit: Making profit always becomes the main economic objective of any business.

(iii) Best possible Use of Resources : It is the responsibility of any businessman to make proper use of available resources. It is because resources are limited and the demand for resources is more. When a businessman uses resources carefully and economically, he can save his money. It will ultimately result in the increase of profit.

(iv) Innovation : Business needs change according to current situation. New products, new processes should be found out to remain in the competition in the market. Then only a business can survive and continue making profit. Therefore making innovations is one of the economic objectives of the business.

(B) Social Objectives:
Following are the social objectives:
(i) Contributing to the Welfare of the Society : Social objectives incliude the working for the betterment of the society in general. It is the responsibility of the business to work for the welfare of the society by carrying out social welfare programmes.

(ii) Avoiding Unfair Trade Practices : Unfair trade practices are those practices which are not advisable in business. They include black marketing, hoarding, adulteration, wrong representation, false advertisements etc. Unfair trade practices make adverse effect on the business. Therefore one of the important social objective of business is to keep itself away from such practices.

(iii) Supplying Quality Products : It is the social objective of business, to provide quality products to the customers. Customer is the important part of any business. Without customers, a business cannot function. Therefore it is the responsibility of the business to provide safe, non ad ulterated, durable products to the customers.

(iv) Help to Solve Social Problems : In modern world many social problems are occurring in the society. Business is a part of the society and therefore one of the social objectives of business is to help solving the social problems.

(v) Employment Generation : A business can provide employment to many people. It becomes the social objective of the business to generate more and more employment. This will help to reduce the problem of poverty and unemployment.

(vi) Welfare of Employees : Employees is an integral part of any organisation. Business cannot function without the employees. It is therefore the responsibility of the businessman to provide better working conditions to employees. Better working conditions help to improve the productivity of the employees.

Question 4.
Explain the importance of profit in business.
Answer:
Business is such activity which involves earning profit. Any business organisation, whether small or large, production unit or service industry; works for getting maximum profit. Profit plays a very important role in business.
The role of profit is explained below:
(i) Growth and Expansion : Profit acts as an internal source of raising funds. Business can keep aside excess profit and use it for its own expansion or diversification purpose. Expansion results into more profit, which can be used for other purposes.

(ii) Research and Development : When a business gets good profits it can spend money on research and development. Research and development helps to find out the processes that help to reduce the cost of production and provide better quality products. This helps to increase the production ultimately resulting in increase in profit.

(iii) Returns to lnvestors: The owner of business needs returns on the money he has invested in the business. These returns are in the form of profit. If there are good profits, the businessman gets fair returns on his investment.

(iv) Means of Livelihood : A biusiness is mainly carried on for getting the livelihood. A result of business is profit. Thus the main role of profit is to help the businessman earn his living.

(v) Increasing Efficiency : Profit acts as a motivating factor. A businessman who is working hard for the business and gets substantial profits gets a motivation to work hard. Profit thus helps in increasing the efficiency. Similarly an employer can give good remuneration to the employees when there is good profit. This helps to increase the efficiency of the employee also.

(vi) Reward for Risks : Every business is exposed to various types of risks. A businessman has to consider these risks. As a businessman takes risks and performs business activities, buyers get the necessary commodities. The result of these business activities is profit. Profit in this case acts a reward for the risk taken by the businessman.

Maharashtra Board OCM 11th Commerce Solutions Chapter 1 Introduction of Commerce and Business

(vii) Survival: The most important role of profit is to help the business to carry on the activities continuously. Survival of business depends upon the continuous supply of finance. Profit enables business to continue with the uninterrupted supply of funds.

Thus profit plays a vital retie in the business. Profit is an inevitable part in every business. It helps a businessman to earn his livelihood, carry on research and development activities and most importantly survival of the business.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics

Question 1.
What is temperature? Explain.
Answer:
The temperature of a body is a quantitative measure of the degree of hotness or coolness of the body. According to the kinetic theory of gases, it is a measure of the average kinetic energy per molecule of the gas. Temperature difference determines the direction of flow of heat from one body to another or from one part of the body to the other. Its SI unit is the kelvin (K).

Question 2.
What is heat ? Explain.
Answer:
When two bodies are in thermal contact with each other, there is a transfer of energy from the body at higher temperature to the body at lower temperature. The energy in transfer is called the heat. Also when two parts of a body are at different temperatures, there is a transfer of energy from the part at higher temperature to the other part. The SI unit of heat is the joule.

[Note : Count Rumford [Benjamin Thompson] (1753-1814) Anglo-American adventurer, social reformer, inventor and physicist, measured the relation between work and heat. When he visited Arsenal in Munich, he found that tremendous amount of heat was produced in a short time when a brass cannon was being bored. He found that even with a blunt borer a lot of heat can be produced from a piece of metal. At that time it was thought that heat consists of a fluid called caloric. Rumford’s experiments showed that caloric did not exist and heat is the motion of the particles of a body. He measured the relation beween work done and corresponding heat produced. The result was not accurate, but important in development of thermodynamics.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics

Question 3.
What is thermodynamics ?
Answer:
Thermodynamics is the branch of physics that deals with the conversion of energy (including heat) from one form into another, the direction of energy transfer between a system and its environment with the resulting variation in temperature, in general, or changes of state, and the availability of energy to do mechanical work.

Question 4.
What is meant by thermal equilibrium ? What is meant by the expression “two systems are in thermal equilibrium” ?
Answer:
A system is in a state of thermal equilibrium if there is no transfer of heat (energy) between the various parts of the system or between the system and its surroundings.

Two systems are said to be in thermal equilibrium when they are in thermodynamic states such that, if they are separated by a diathermic (heat conducting) wall, the combined system would be in thermal equilibrium, i.e., there would be no net transfer of heat (energy) between them.
[Note :It is the energy in transfer that is called the heat.]

Question 5.
State the zeroth law of thermodynamics.
Answer:
Zeroth law of thermodynamics : If two systems are each in thermal equilibrium with a third system, they are also in thermal equilibrium with each other.

[Note :The zeroth law is fundamental to the other laws of thermodynamics. That this law is assumed by the other laws of thermodynamics was realized much later. This law has no single discoverer. It was given the status of a law, following the suggestion by R. H. Fowler (in 1931), only after the first, second and third laws were named.]

Question 6.
Explain the zeroth law of thermodynamics.
Answer:
Consider three systems A, B and C. Suppose A and B are in thermal equilibrium, and A and C are also in thermal equilibrium. Then B and C are also in thermal equlibrium. Thus, A, B and C are at the same temperature and A works as a thermometer.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 1
[Note: The arrows in the figure indicate energy exchange]

Question 7.
Define internal energy.
Answer:
Internal energy of a system is defined as the sum of the kinetic energies of the atoms and molecules belonging to the system, and the potential energies associated with the interactions between these constituents (atoms and molecules).
[Note : Internal energy does not include the potential energy and kinetic energy of the system as a whole. In the case of an ideal gas, internal energy is purely kinetic. In the case of real gases, liquids and solids, internal energy is the sum of potential and kinetic energies. For an ideal gas, internal energy depends on temperature only. In other cases, internal energy depends on temperature, as well as on pressure and volume. According to quantum theory, internal energy never becomes zero. Even at OK. particles have energy called zero-point energy.]

Question 8.
What is the internal energy of one mole of argon and oxygen ?
Answer:
Argon is a monatamic gas. In this case, with three degrees of freedom, the average kinetic energy per molecule = \(\left(\frac{3}{2}\right)\)kBT, where kB is the Boltzmann constant and T is the absolute (thermodynamic) temperature of the gas. Hence, the internal energy of one mole of argon = NA\(\left(\frac{3}{2} k_{\mathrm{B}} T\right)\) = \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT, where NA is the Avogadro number and R = NAkB is the universal gas constant. Oxygen is a diatomic gas. In this case, with five degrees of freedom at moderate temperatures, the internal energy of one mole of
oxygen = \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT.

Question 9.
Find the internal energy of one mole of argon at 300 K. (R = 8.314 J/mol.K)
Answer:
The internal energy of one mole of argon at 300 K
= \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT = \(\frac{3}{2}\)(8.314)(300) J = 3741 J.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics

Question 10.
The internal energy of one mole of nitrogen at 300 K is 6235 J. What is the internal energy of one mole of nitrogen at 400 K ?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 2
This is the required quantity.
[Note : In chapter 3, the symbol E was used for internal energy.]

Question 11.
Explain the term thermodynamic system.
Answer:
A thermodynamic system is a collection of objects that can form a unit which may have ability to Surrounding
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 3
exchange energy with its surroundings. Everything outside the system is called its surroundings or environment. For example, a gas enclosed in a container is a system, the container is the boundary and the atmosphere is the environment.

Question 12.
Explain classification of thermodynamic systems.
Answer:
Depending upon the exchange of energy and matter with the environment, thermodynamic systems are classified as open, closed or isolated.

A system that can freely exchange energy and matter with its environment is called an open system. Example : water boiling in an open vessel.

A system that can freely exchange energy but not matter with its environment is called a closed system. Example : water boiling in a closed vessel.

A system that cannot exchange energy as well as matter with its environment is called an isolated system. In practice it is impossible to realize an isolated system as every object at a temperature above 0 K emits energy in the form of radiation, and no object can ever attain 0 K.

For many practical purposes, a thermos flask containing a liquid can be considered an isolated system.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 4
These three types are illustrated in above figure.

Question 13.
What is a thermodynamic process? Give an exmple.
Answer:
A process in which the thermodynamic state of a system is changed is called a thermodynamic process.
Example : Suppose a container is partially filled with water and then closed with a lid. If the container is heated, the temperature of the water starts rising and after some time the water starts boiling. The steam produced exerts pressure on the walls of the container, Here, there is a change in the pressure, volume and temperature of the water, i.e. there is a change in the thermodynamic state of the system.

Question 14.
Explain the relation between heat and internal energy.
Answer:
Suppose a system consists of a glass filled with water at temperature TS. Let TE be the temperature of the environment (surroundings) such as the surrounding air in the room. There is a continuous exchange of energy between the system and the surroundings.

If TS > TE, the net effect of energy exchange is the net transfer of internal energy from the system to the environment till thermal equilibrium is reached, i.e., TS and TE became equal. This internal energy in transit is called heat (Q). The change in the temperature of the environment is usually negligible compared with the change in the temperature of the system.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 5

For TS < TE, there is energy exchange between the
system and the environment, but no net transfer of
energy.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 6
For TS = TE, there is energy exchange between the system and the environment, but no net transfer of energy.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 7
Thus, the net transfer of energy takes place only when there is temperature difference.

Question 15.
Explain how the internal energy of a system can be changed.
Answer:
Consider a system (S) consisting of some quantity of gas enclosed in a cylinder fitted with a movable, massless, and frictionless piston.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 8
Suppose the gas is heated using a burner (source of heat, environment). Let TS = temperature of the system (gas) and TE = temperature of the environment.

Here, TE > TS. Hence, there will be a net flow of energy (heat) from the environment to the system causing the increase in the internal energy of the system.

The internal energy of the gas (system) can also be increased by quickly pushing the piston inward so that the gas is compressed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 9
The work done on the gas raises the temperature of the gas. Thus, there is increase in the internal energy of the gas. If the gas pushes the piston outward, the work is done by the gas on the environment and the gas cools as its internal energy becomes less.

Question 16.
On the basis of the kinetic theory of gases, explain
(i) positive work done by a system
(ii) negative work done by a system.
Answer:
Consider a system consisting of some quantity of a gas enclosed in a cylinder fitted with a movable, massless and frictionless piston.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 10
During expansion of the gas, molecules colliding with the piston lose momentum to it. This exerts force and hence pressure on the piston, moving it outward through a finite distance. Here, the gas does a positive work on the piston. There is increase in the volume of the gas. The work done by the piston on the gas is negative.

During compression of the gas, molecules colliding with the piston gain momentum from it. The piston moving inward through a finite distance exerts force on the gas. Here, the gas does a negative work on the piston. There is decrease in the volume of the gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 11
The work done by the piston on the gas is positive.

Question 17.
Obtain an expression for the work done by a gas.
OR
Show that the work done by a gas is given by
Answer:
Consider a system consisting of some quantity of a gas enclosed in a cylinder fitted with a movable, massless and frictionless piston.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 12
During expansion of the gas, molecules colliding with the piston impart momentum to the piston. The time rate of change of momentum is the force, F exerted by the gas on the piston. If dx is the displacement of the piston, the work done by the gas, dW = F dx. If A is the area of cross section of the piston, the pressure exerted by the gas, P = \(\frac{F}{A}\).

Hence, the work done, dW = PAdx = PdV where dV = Adx is the increase in the volume of the gas. Here, dx is the infinitesimal displacement of the piston and dV is the infinitesimal increase in the volume of the gas.

If Vi is the initial volume of the gas, and Vf is the final volume, the total work done by the gas in moving the piston is given by W = \(\int_{V_{i}}^{V_{\mathrm{f}}} P d V\).

Question 18.
State the first law of thermodynamics. Express it in mathematical form.
Answer:
First law of thermodynamics : The change in the internal energy of a system (∆U) is the difference between the heat supplied to the system (Q) and the work done by the system on its surroundings (W).
Mathematically, ∆ U = Q – W, which is the same as Q = ∆ U + W.

Notes :

  1. if Q is positive, it means heat is added to the system. If Q is negative, it means heat is given out by the system or removed from the system,
  2. If ∆U is positive, it means there is increase in the internal energy of the system. If ∆ U is negative, it means there is decrease in the internal energy of the system,
  3. If W is positive, it means it is the work done by the system on its surroundings. Negative W means work is done on the system by the surroundings,
  4. The first law of thermodynamics is largely due to Joule. It is essentially the law of conservation of energy applied to the systems that are not isolated, i.e., the systems that can exchange energy with the surroundings. Thermodynamics was developed in 1850 by Rudolf Clausius (1822-88) German theoretical physicist, His ideas were developed in 1851 by William Thomson [Lord Kelvin] (1824-1907), British physicist and electrical engineer,
  5. Q = ∆ U + W. Here, all quantities are expressed in the same units, e.g., cal or joule. If Q and A U are expressed in heat unit (cal, kcal) and W is expressed in mechanical unit (erg, joule) then the above equation takes the form Q = ∆ U + \(\frac{W}{J}\), where J is the mechanical equivalent of heat.]

Question 19.
What is the property of a system or a system variable ?
Answer:
The property of a system or a system variable is any measurable or observable characteristic or property of the system when the system remains in equilibrium.

Question 20.
Name the macroscopic variables of a system.
Answer:
Pressure, volume, temperature, density, mass, specific volume, amount of substance (expressed in mole) are macroscopic variables of a system.
Notes : The quantities specified above are not totally independent, e.g.,

  1. density = mass/volume
  2. specific volume (volume per unit mass) = 1/density.

Question 21.
What is an intensive variable ? Give examples.
Answer:
A variable that does not depend on the size of the system is called an intensive variable.
Examples : pressure, temperature, density.

Question 22.
What is an extensive variable ? Give examples.
Answer:
A variable that depends on the size of the system is called an extensive variable.
Examples : internal energy, mass.

Question 23.
What is mechanical equilibrium ?
Answer:
A system is said to be in mechanical equilibrium when there are no unbalanced forces within the system and between the system and its surroundings.
OR
A system is said to be in mechanical equilibrium when the pressure in the system is the same throughout and does not change with time.
[Note : The constituents of a system, atoms, molecules, ions, etc, are never at rest. Within a system, even in the condition of equilibrium, statistical fluctuations do occur, but the time of observation is usually very large so that these fluctuations can be ignored.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics

Question 24.
What is chemical equilibrium ?
Answer:
A system is said to be in chemical equilibrium when there are no chemical reactions going on within the system.
OR
A system is said to be in chemical equilibrium when its chemical composition is the same throughout the system and does not change with time.
[Note : In this case, in the absence of concentration gradient, there is no diffusion, i.e., there is no transport of matter from one part of the system to the other.]

Question 25.
What is thermal equilibrium ?
Answer:
A system is said to be in thermal equilibrium when its temperature is uniform throughout the system and does not change with time.

Question 26.
Give two examples of thermodynamic systems not in equilibrium.
Answer:

  1. When an inflated balloon is punctured, the air inside it suddenly expands and escapes into the atmosphere. During the rapid expansion, there is no uniformity of pressure, temperature and density.
  2. When water is heated, there is no uniformity of pressure, temperature and density. If the vessel is open, some water molecules escape to the atmosphere.

Question 27.
What is the equation of state ? Explain.
Answer:
The mathematical relation between the state variables (pressure, volume, temperature, amount of the substance) is called the equation of state.

In the usual notation, the equation of state for an ideal gas is PV = nRT.

For a fixed mass of gas, the number of moles, n, is constant. R is the universal gas constant. Thus, out of pressure (P), volume (V) and thermodynamic temperature (T), only two (any two) are independent.

Question 28.
Draw P-V diagram for positive work at constant pressure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 13
Answer:
In this case, during the expansion, the work done by the gas, W = \(\int_{V_{1}}^{V_{2}} P d V\) = P(V2 – V1) is positive as V2 > V1.

Question 29.
What is a thermodynamic process ? Explain.
Answer:
A procedure by which the initial state of a system changes to its final state is called a thermodynamic process. During the process/ there may be

  1. addition of heat to the system
  2. removal of heat from the system
  3. change in the temperature of the system
  4. change in the volume of the system
  5. change in the pressure of the system.

Question 30.
What is a quasistatic process ?
Answer:
A quasistatic process is an idealised process which occurs infinitely slowly such that at all times the system is infinitesimally close to a state of thermodynamic equilibrium. Although the conditions for such a process can never be rigorously satisfied in practice, any real process which does not involve large accelerations or large temperature gradients is a reasonable approximation to a quasistatic process.

Question 31.
Draw a diagram to illustrate that the work done by a system depends on the process even when the initial and final states are the same.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 14
Answer:
In the above diagram, the initial state of a gas is characterized by (Pi, Vi) [corresponding to point A] and the final state of the gas is characterized by (Pf, Vf) [corresponding to point B]. Path 1 corresponds to constant temperature. Path 2 corresponds to the combination AC [P constant] + CB [V constant]. Path 3 corresponds to the combination AD [V constant] + DB [P constant]. The work done by the gas (W) is the area under the curve and is different in each case.

Question 32.
What is a reversible process? What is an irreversible process? Give four examples of an irreversible process. Explain in detail.
Answer:
A reversible process is one which is performed in such a way that, at the conclusion of the process, both the system and its local surroundings are restored to their initial states, without producing any change in the rest of the universe.

A process may take place reversibly if it is quasistatic and there are no dissipative effects. Such a process cannot be realized in practice.

A process which does not fulfill the rigorous requirements of reversibility is said to be an irreversible process. Thus, in this case, the system and the local surroundings cannot be restored to their initial states without affecting the rest of the universe. All natural processes are irreversible.
Examples of irreversible process :

  1. When two bodies at different temperatures are brought in thermal contact, they attain the same temperature after some time due to energy exchange. Later, they never attain their initial temperatures.
  2. Free expansion of a gas.
  3. A gas seeping through a porous plug.
  4. Collapse of a soap film after it is pricked.
  5. All chemical reactions.
  6. Diffusion of two dissimilar inert gases.
  7. Solution of a solid in water.
  8. Osmosis.

[Note : A free expansion is an adiabatic process, i.e., a process in which no heat is added to the system or removed from the system. Consider a gas confined by a valve to one half of a double chamber with adiabatic walls while the other half is evacuated.

When the gas is in thermal equilibrium, the gas is allowed to expand to fill the entire chamber by opening the valve.
No interaction takes place and hence there are no local surroundings. While rushing into a vacuum, the gas does not meet any pressure and hence no work is done by the gas. The gas only changes state isothermally from a volume Vi to a larger volume Vf.]

To restore the gas to its initial state, it would have to be compressed isothermally to the volume Vi; an amount of work W would have to done on the gas by some mechanical device and an equal amount of heat would have to flow out of the gas into a reservoir. If the mechanical device and the reservoir are to be left unchanged, the heat would have to be extracted from the reservoir and converted completely into work. Since this last step is impossible, the process of free expansion is irreversible.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 15
It can be shown that the diffusion of two dissimilar inert gases is equivalent to two independent free expansions. It follows that diffusion is irreversible.]

Question 33.
What are the causes of irreversibility?
Answer:

  1. Some processes such as a free expansion of a gas or an explosive chemical reaction or burning of a fuel take the system to non-equilibrium states.
  2. Most processes involve dissipative forces such as friction and viscosity (internal friction in fluids). These forces can be minimized, but cannot be eliminated.

Question 34.
What is an isothermal process? Obtain an expression for the work done by a gas in an isothermal process.
Answer:
A process in which changes in pressure and volume of a system take place at a constant temperature is called an isothermal process.

Consider n moles of a gas enclosed in a cylinder fitted with a movable, massless and frictionless piston. Let Pi, Vi and T be the initial pressure, volume and absolute temperature respectively of the gas. Consider an isothermal expansion (or compression) of the gas in which Pf, Vf and T are respectively the final pressure, volume and absolute
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 16
temperature of the gas. Assuming the gas to behave as an ideal gas, we have, its equation of state :
PV = nRT = constant as T = constant, R is the universal gas constant. The work done by the gas,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 17
Notes :

  1. The above expression for W can be written in various forms such as W = nRT ln\(\left(\frac{P_{\mathrm{i}}}{P_{\mathrm{f}}}\right)\) = PiVi ln \(\left(\frac{P_{\mathrm{i}}}{P_{\mathrm{f}}}\right)\) = PfVf\(\left(\frac{V_{f}}{V_{\mathrm{i}}}\right)\), etc.
  2. W is positive if Vf > Vi (expansion). W is negative if Vf < Vi (contraction).
  3. At constant temperature, change in internal energy, ∆ U = 0.
    ∴ Q = ∆ U + W = W.
  4. Isothermal process shown in P- V diagram is also called an isotherm.
  5. Melting of ice is an isothermal process.

Question 35.
What is an isobaric process? Obtain the expressions for the work done, change in internal energy and heat supplied in an isobaric process in the case of a gas.
Answer:
A process in which pressure remains constant is called an isobaric process. Consider n moles of a gas enclosed in a cylinder fitted with a movable, massless and frictionless piston. We assume that the gas behaves as an ideal gas so that we can use the equation of state PV = nRT.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 18
Consider an isobaric expansion (or compression) of the gas in which the volume of the gas changes from Vi to Vf and the temperature of the gas changes from Ti to Tf when the pressure (P) of the gas is kept constant. The work done by the gas,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 19
Now, PVi = nRTi and PVf = nRTf
∴ PVf – PVi = nRTf – nRTi
∴ P(Vf – Vi) = nR(Tf – Ti)
∴ from Eq. (1), W = nR(Tf – Ti) … (2)
The change in the internal energy of the gas,
∆ U = nCv(Tf – Ti) …(3)
where Cv is the molar specific heat of the gas at constant volume.
From Eqs. (2) and (3), we have, the heat supplied to the gas,
Q = ∆ U + W = nCv(Tf – Ti) + nR(Tf – Ti)
= n(Cv + R)(Tf – Ti)
∴ Q = nCp(Tf – Ti) …(4)
Where Cp ( = Cv + R) is the molar specific heat of the gas at constant pressure.
[Note : P-V curve for an isobaric process is called an isobar.

Question 36.
What is an isochoric process ? Write the expressions for the work done, change in internal energy and heat supplied in this case. Also draw the corresponding P-V diagram.
Answer:
A process that takes place at constant volume is called an isochoric process (or isometric process).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 20
As there is no change in volume in this case, the work done (W) by the system on its environment is zero. The change in the internal energy.
∆ U = nCv (Tf – Ti) and heat supplied,
Q = ∆ U = nCv(Tf – Ti)

Question 37.
What is an adiabatic process ? Obtain expressions for the work done by a system (an ideal gas) in an adiabatic process. Also draw the corresponding P-V diagram.
Answer:
A process during which there is no transfer of heat (energy) from the system to the surroundings or from the surroundings to the system is called an adiabatic process.

It can be shown that if an ideal gas is subjected to an adiabatic process, then,
PVγ = constant = C, where γ, is \(\frac{C_{P}}{C_{V}}\). γ is called the adiabatic ratio. CP is the molar specific heat of the gas at constant pressure and CV is the molar specific heat at constant volume.
Let Pi = initial pressure, Pi final pressure Vf = initial volume and Vf = final volume of the gas taken through an adiabatic process.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 21
Now, PiVi = nRTi and PfVf = nRTf, where n is the number of moles of the gas, Ti is the initial temperature of the gas, Tf is the final temperature of the gas and R is the universal gas constant.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 22
[Note: We have Q = ∆ U + W = 0 in an adiabatic process.
∴ W= -∆ U = -nCv(Tf – Ti)nCv(Ti – Tf)]

Question 38.
What is a cyclic process? Explain with a diagram.
Answer:
A thermodynamic process in which the system returns to its initial state is called a cyclic process. This is illustrated in below figure. Path 1 shows how the state of the system (ideal gas) is changed from (Pi, Vi) [point A] to (Pf, Vf) [point B], Path 2 shows the return of the system from point B to point A. As the system returns to its initial state, the total change in its internal energy is zero. Hence, according to the first law of thermodynamics, heat supplied,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 23
Q = ∆ U + W = 0 + W = W. The area enclosed by the cycle in P-V plane gives the work done (W) by the system.

Question 39.
Explain the term free expansion of a gas.
Answer:
When a balloon is ruptured suddenly, or a tyre is punctured suddenly, the air inside the balloon/ tyre rushes out rapidly to the atmosphere. This process (expansion of air inside the balloon/tyre) is so quick that there is no time for transfer of heat from the system to the surroundings or from the surroundings to the system. Such an adiabatic expansion is called free expansion. It is characterized by Q = W = 0, implying ∆ U = 0. Free expansion is an uncontrolled change and the system is not in thermodynamic equilibrium. Free expansion cannot be illustrated with a P-V diagram as only the initial state and final state are known.

Question 40.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
A gas enclosed in a cylinder fitted with a movable, massless and frictionless piston is expanded so that its volume increases from 5 L to 6 L at a constant pressure of 1.013 × 105 Pa. Find the work done by the gas in this process.
Solution :
Data : P = 1.013 × 105 Pa, Vi = 5L = 5 × 10-3 m3,
vf = 6L = 6 × 10-3 m3
The work done by the gas, in this process,
W = P(Vf – Vi)
= (1.013 × 105)(6 × 10-3 – 5 × 10-3)J
= 1.013 × 102J

Question 2.
The initial pressure and volume of a gas enclosed in a cylinder are respectively 1 × 105 N/m2 and 5 × 10-3 m3. If the work done in compressing the gas at constant pressure is 100 J. Find the final volume of the gas.
Solution :
Data : P = 1 × 105 N/m2, Vi = 5 × 10-3 m3,
W= -100 J
W = P(Vf – Vi) ∴ Vf – Vi = \(\frac{W}{P}\)
∴ Vf = Vi + \(\frac{W}{P}\) = 5 × 10-3 + \(\frac{(-100)}{\left(1 \times 10^{5}\right)}\)
= 5 × 10-3 -1 × 10-3 = 4 × 10-3 m3
This is the final volume of the gas.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics

Question 3.
If the work done by a system on its surroundings is 100 J and the increase in the internal energy of the system is 100 cal, what must be the heat supplied to the system? (Given : J = 4.186J/cal)
Solution :
Data : W = 100 J, ∆ U = 100 cal, J = 4.186 J / cal
The heat supplied to the system,
Q = ∆ U + W = (100 cal) (4.186 J/cal) + 100 J
= 418.6J + 100J = 518.6 J

Question 4.
Ten litres of water are boiled at 100°C, at a pressure of 1.013 × 105 Pa, and converted into steam. The specific latent heat of vaporization of water is 539 cal/g. Find
(a) the heat supplied to the system
(b) the work done by the system
(c) the change in the internal energy of the system. 1 cm3 of water on conversion into steam, occupies 1671 cm3 (J = 4.186 J/cal)
Solution :
Data : P = 1.013 × 105 Pa, V (water) = 10 L = 10 × 10-3 m3, V(steam) = 1671 × 10 × 10-3 m3, L = 539 cal/g = 539 × 103 \(\frac{\mathrm{cal}}{\mathrm{kg}}\) = 539 × 103 × 4.186\(\frac{\mathrm{J}}{\mathrm{kg}}\) as J = 4.186 J/cal, mass of the water (M) = volume × density = 10 × 10-3 m3 × 103 kg/m3 = 10 kg

(a) Q = ML = (10) (5.39 × 4.186 × 105) J
= 2.256 × 107J
This is the heat supplied to the system

(b) W = P∆V = (1.013 × 105) (1671 – 1) × 10-2J
= (1.013) (1670) × 103 J = 1.692 × 106 J
This is the work done by the system.

(c) ∆ U = Q – W = 22.56 × 106 – 1.692 × 106
= 2.0868 × 107J
This is the change (increase) in the internal energy of the system.

Question 5.
Find the heat needed to melt 100 grams of ice at 0°C, at a pressure of 1.013 × 105 N/m2. What is the work done in this process ? What is the change in the internal energy of the system ?
Given : Specific latent heat of fusion of ice = 79.71 cal/g, density of ice = 0.92 g/cm3, density of water = 1 g/cm3,1 cal = 4.186 J.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 24

  1. The heat needed to melt the ice, Q = ML = (0.1) (3.337 × 105) J = 3.337 × 104 J
  2. The work done, W = P(VWater – Vice)
    = (1.013 × 105) (100 – 108.7) × 10-6J = -0.8813J
  3. The change in the internal energy,
    ∆ U = Q – W = 3.337 × 104 J + 0.8813 J
    = 3370.8813 J

Question 6.
Find the work done by the gas when it is taken through the cycle shown in the following figure. (1 L = 10-3 m3)
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 25
∴ WABCDA = WAB + WBC + WCD + WDA
= 2000J + 0 – 1000J + 0 = 1000J

Question 7.
A gas with adiabatic constant γ = 1.4, expands adiabatically so that the final pressure becomes half the initial pressure. If the initial volume of the gas 1 × 10-2 m3, find the final volume.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 26
This is the final volume of the gas.

Question 8.
In an adiabatic compression of a gas with γ = 1.4, the initial temperature of the gas is 300 K and the final temperature is 360 K. If the initial volume of the gas is 2 × 10-3 m3, find the final volume.
Solution:
Data: γ = 1.4, Ti = 300 K, Tf = 360 K
∴ Tf/Ti = 1.2, Vi = 2 × 10-3 m3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 27
This is the final volume of the gas.

Question 9.
In an adiabatic compression of a gas with γ = 1.4, the final pressure is double the initial pressure. If the initial temperature of the gas is 300 K, find the final temperature.
Solution:
Data: γ = 1.4, Pf = 2Pi, Ti = 300 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 28
∴ log \(\frac{T_{\mathrm{f}}}{T_{\mathrm{i}}}\) = 0.2857 log 2 = 0.2857 (0.3010) = 0.086
∴ \(\frac{T_{\mathrm{f}}}{T_{\mathrm{i}}}\) = antilog 0.086 = 1.219
∴ Tf = 1219Ti
= (1.219) (300) = 365.7 K
This is the final temperature of the gas.

Question 10.
In an adiabatic compression of a gas the final volume of the gas is 80% of the initial volume. If the initial temperature of the gas is 27 °C, find the final temperature of the gas. Take γ = 5/3.
Solution :
Data: Vf = 0.8 Vi ∴ \(\frac{V_{\mathrm{i}}}{V_{\mathrm{f}}}\) = \(\frac{10}{8}\) = 1.25,
∴ Ti = 27 °C = (273 + 27) K = 300 K, γ = \(\frac{5}{3}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 29
∴ x = antilog 0.0646 = 1.161
∴ Tf = (300) (1.161) = 348.3 K
= (348.3 – 273)°C = 75.3 °C
This is the final temperature of the gas.

Question 11.
In an adiabatic expansion of a gas, the final volume of the gas is double the initial volume. If the initial pressure of the gas is 105 Pa, find the final pressure of the gas. (γ = 5/3)
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 30
Let 25/3 = x ∴ \(\frac{5}{3}\)log 2 = log x
∴ log x = \(\left(\frac{5}{3}\right)\) (0.3010) = 0.5017
∴ x = antilog 0.5017 = 3.175
∴ Pf = \(\frac{10^{5}}{3.175}\) = 3.15 × 104 Pa
This is the final pressure of the gas.

Question 12.
In an adiabatic process, the final pressure of the gas is half the initial pressure. If the initial temperature of the gas is 300 K, find the final temperature of the gas. (Take γ = \(\frac{5}{3}\))
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 31
This is the final temperature of the gas.

Question 13.
In an adiabatic process, the pressure of the gas drops from 1 × 105 N/m2 to 5 × 104 N/m2 and the temperature drops from 27 °C to – 46 °C. Find the adiabatic ratio for the gas.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 32
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 33
This is the adiabatic ratio (γ) for the gas.
[Note : This value (1.673) is slightly more than 5/3 (the value for a monatomic gas) due to error in measurement of pressure and temperature.]

Question 14.
Two moles of a gas expand isothermally at 300 K. If the initial volume of the gas is 23 L and the final volume is 46 L, find the work done by the gas on its surroundings. (R = 8.314 J/mol.K)
Solution :
Data ; n = 2, T = 300 K, V, = 23 L = 23 × 10-3 m3, Vf = 46 L = 46 × 10-3 m3, R = 8.314 J/mol.K
The work done by the gas on its surroundings,
W = nRT ln \(\left(\frac{V_{\mathrm{f}}}{V_{\mathrm{i}}}\right)\) = 2.303 nRT log10 \(\left(\frac{V_{\mathrm{f}}}{V_{\mathrm{i}}}\right)\)
= (2.303) (2) (8.314) (300) log10 \(\left(\frac{46 \times 10^{-3}}{23 \times 10^{-3}}\right)\)
= (4.606) (8.314) (300) log\(\begin{array}{r}
2 \\
10
\end{array}\)
= (4.606) (8.314) (300) (0.3010)
= 3458J

Question 15.
Four moles of a gas expand isothermally at 300 K. If the final pressure of the gas is 80% of the initial pressure, find the work done by the gas on its surroundings. (R = 8.314 J/mol.K)
Solution :
Data : n = 4, T = 300 K, Pf = 0.8 Pi
∴ \(\frac{P_{i}}{P_{f}}\) = \(\frac{10}{8}\), R = 8.314 j/mol.K
The work done by the gas on its surroundings,
W = nRT ln\(\left(\frac{P_{\mathrm{i}}}{P_{\mathrm{f}}}\right)\)
= (4) (8.314) (300) 2.303 log10 \(\left(\frac{10}{8}\right)\)
= 2.3 × 104 log10 (1.25) = 2.3 × 104 × 0.0969
= 2.229 × 103J

Question 16.
The molar specific heat of He at constant volume is 12.47 J/mol.K. Two moles of He are heated at constant pressure so that the rise in temperature is 10 K. Find the increase in the internal energy of the gas.
Solution :
Data : Cv = 12.47 J/mol.k, n = 2, Tf – Ti = 10 K
The increase in the internal energy of the gas,
∆ U = nCv (Tf – Ti)
= (2) (12.47) (10) J
= 249.4 J

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics

Question 17.
The molar specific heat of Ar at constant volume is 12.47 J/mol.K. Two moles of Ar are heated at constant pressure so that the rise in temperature is 20 K. Find the work done by the gas on its surroundings and the heat supplied to the gas. Take R = 8.314 J/mol.K.
Solution :
Data : Cv = 12.47 j/mol.K, n = 2,Tf – Ti = 20 K,
R = 8.314 J/mol.K

  1. W = nR (Tf – Ti) = (2) (8.314) (20) J = 332.6 J
    This is the work done by the gas on its surroundings.
  2. Q = nCv(Tf – Ti) + W = (2) (12.47) (20) + 332.6
    = 498.8 + 332.6 = 831.4 J
    This is the heat supplied to the gas.

Question 18.
The molar specific heat of a gas at constant pressure is 29.11 J/mol.k. Two moles of the gas are heated at constant pressure so that the rise in temperature is 40 K. Find the heat supplied to the gas.
Solution :
Data : CP = 29.11 J/mol.K, n = 2, Tf – Ti = 40 K.
The heat supplied to the gas,
Q = nCP (Tf – Ti) = (2) (29.11) (40) J
= 2329 J

Question 19.
The molar specific heat of a gas at constant volume is 20.8 J/mol.k. Two moles of the gas are heated at constant volume so that the rise in temperature is 10 K. Find the heat supplied to the gas.
Solution :
Data : Cv = 20.8 J/mol.K, n = 2, Tf – Ti = 10 K.
The heat supplied to the gas,
Q = nCv (Tf – Ti) = (2) (20.8) (10) J
= 416J

Question 20.
In an adiabatic expansion of 2 moles of a gas, the initial pressure was 1.013 × 105 Pa, the initial volume was 22.4 L, the final pressure was 3.191 × 104 Pa and the final volume was 44.8 L. Find the work done by the gas on its surroundings. Take γ = 5/3.
Solution :
Data : H = 2, Pi = 1.013 × 105 Pa, Pf = 3.191 × 104 Pa,
Vi = 22.4 L = 22.4 × 10-3 m3,
Vf = 44.8 L = 44.8 × 10-3 m3, γ = 5/3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 34

Question 21.
In an adiabatic expansion of 2 moles of a gas, the temperature of the gas decreases from 37°C to 27°C. Find the work done by the gas on its surroundings. Take γ = 5/3 and R = 8.314 J/mol.K
Answer:
Data: n =2, Ti = (273 + 37) = 310 K,
Tf = (273 + 27)K = 300K, γ = 5/3,
R = 8.314 J/mol.K.
The work done by the gas on its surroundings,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 35

Question 22.
A resistor of resistance 200 Ω carries a current of 2 A for 10 minutes. Assuming that almost all the heat produced in the resistor is transferred to water (mass = 5 kg, specific heat capacity = 1 kcal/kg), and the work done by the water against the external pressure during the expansion of water can be ignored, find the rise in the temperature of the water. (J = 4186 J/cal)
Solution :
Data : I = 2 A, R = 200 Ω, t = 10 min = 10 × 60 s = 600 s, M = 5 kg, S = (1 kcal/kg) (4186 J/kcal)
= 4186 J/kg
Q = ∆ U + W = MS ∆T + W \(\simeq\) MS ∆T ignoring W.
Also, Q = I2Rt ∴ I2RT = MS∆T
∴ The rise in the temperature of water = ∆T = \(\frac{I^{2} R t}{M S}\)
= \(\frac{(2)^{2}(200)(600)}{(5)(4186)}\)°C = 22.93°C

Question 23.
The initial pressure, volume and temperature of a gas are respectively 1 × 105 Pa, 2 × 10-2 m3 and 400 K. The temperature of the gas is reduced from 400 K to 300 K at constant volume. Then the gas is compressed at constant temperature so that its volume becomes 1.5 × 10-2 m3.
Solution:
Data : PA = 1 × 105 Pa, VA = 2 × 10-2 m3, TA = 400 K, VB = vA = 2 × 10-2 m3, TB = 300 K, TC = TB = 300 K, VC = 1.5 x 10× 10-2 m3, Also, PC = PA = 1 × 105 Pa as the gas returns to its initial state.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 36

Question 24.
If the adiabatic ratio for a gas is 5/3, find the molar specific heat of the gas at
(i) constant volume
(ii) constant pressure.
(R = 8.314 J/mol. K)
Solution :
Data : r = 5/3, R = 8.314 J/mol.K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 37
This is the required quantity.
(ii) CP = γCV = \(\left(\frac{5}{3}\right)\)(12.47) = 20.78 J/mol.

Question 41.
What is a heat engine ?
Answer:
A heat engine is a device in which a system is taken through cyclic processes that result in converting part of heat supplied by a hot reservoir into work (mechanical energy) and releasing the remaining part to a cold reservoir. At the end of every cycle involving thermodynamic changes, the system is returned to the initial state.
[Note : Automobile engine is a heat engine.]

Question 42.
What does a heat engine consist of ?
OR
What are the elements (parts) of a typical heat engine?
Answer:
The following are the parts of a typical heat engine :

(1) Working substance : It can be

  1. a mixture of fuel vapour and air in a gasoline (petrol) engine or diesel engine
  2. steam in a steam engine. The working substance is called a system.

(2) Hot and cold reservoirs : The hot reservoir is a source of heat that supplies heat to the working substance at constant temperature TH. The cold reservoir, also called the sink, takes up the heat released by the working substance at constant temperature TC < TH.

(3) Cylinder and piston : The working substance is enclosed in a cylinder fitted with (ideally) a movable, massless, and frictionless piston. The walls of the cylinder are nonconducting, but the base is conducting. The piston is nonconducting. The piston is connected to a crankshaft so that the work done by the working substance (mechanical energy) can be transferred to the environment.

Question 43.
What are the two basic types of heat engines?
Answer:
(i) External combustion engine in which the working substance is heated externally as in a steam engine.
(ii) Internal combustion engine in which the working substance is heated internally as in a petrol engine or diesel engine.
[Note : A steam engine was invented by Thomas New-comen (1663-1729), English engineer. The first practical steam engine was constructed in 1712. The modem steam engine was invented in 1790 by James Watt (1736-1819), British instrument maker and engineer. A hot-air type engine was developed by Robert Stirling (1790-1878), Scottish engineer and clergyman.

A four-stroke internal combustion engine was devised by Nikolaus August Otto (1832-1891), German engineer. A compression-ignition internal combustion engine was devised by Rudolph (Christian Karl) Diesel (1858 – 1913), German engineer.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics

Question 44.
State the basic steps involved in the working of a heat engine.
Answer:

  1. The working substance absorbs heat (QH) from a hot reservoir at constant temperature. TH. It is an isothermal process QH is positive.
  2. Part of the heat absorbed by the working substance is converted into work (W), i.e. mechanical energy. In this case, there is a change in the volume of the substance.
  3. The remaining heat (|QC| = |QH| – W) is transferred to a cold reservoir at constant temperature TC < TH. QC is negative.

Question 45.
Draw a neat labelled energy flow diagram of a heat engine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 38

Question 46.
Define thermal efficiency of a heat engine.
Answer:
The thermal efficiency, η of a heat engine is defined W as η = \(\frac{W}{Q_{H}}\), where W is the work done (output) by QH the working substance and QH is the amount of heat absorbed (input) by it.
[Note : η has no unit and dimensions or its dimensions are [M°L°T°].]

Question 47.
Draw a neat labelled P-V diagram for a typical heat engine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 39
Here, TH is the temperature at which the work is done by the gas and Tc is the temperature at which the work is done on the gas. The area of the loop ABCDA is the work output.

Question 48.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
Find the thermal efficiency of a heat engine if in one cycle the work output is 3000 J and the heat input is 10000 J.
Solution :
Data : W = 3000 J, QH = 10000 J
The thermal efficiency of the engine,
η = \(\frac{W}{Q_{\mathrm{H}}}\) = \(\frac{3000 \mathrm{~J}}{10000 \mathrm{~J}}\) = 0.3 = 30%

Question 2.
The thermal efficiency of a heat engine is 25%. If in one cycle the heat absorbed from the hot reservoir is 50000 J, what is the heat rejected to the cold reservoir in one cycle ?
Solution :
Data : η = 25% = 0.25, QH = 50000 J W
η = \(\frac{W}{Q_{\mathrm{H}}}\)
∴ W = ηQH = (0.25)(50000)J = 12500J
Now, W = QH – |QC|
∴ |QC| = QH – W
= (50000 – 12500) J
= 37500J
This is the heat rejected to the cold reservoir in one cycle.
[Notes : QC = – 37500 J]

Question 49.
What is a refrigerator?
Answer:
A refrigerator is a device that uses work to transfer energy in the form of heat from a cold reservoir to a hot reservoir as it continuously repeats a thermodynamic cycle. Thus, it is a heat engine that runs in the backward direction.

Question 50.
With a neat labelled energy flow diagram, explain the working of a refrigerator.
Answer:
A refrigerator performs a cycle in a direction opposite to that of a heat engine, the net result being absorption of some energy as heat from a reservoir at low temperature, a net amount of work done on the system and the rejection of a larger amount
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 40
of energy as heat to a reservoir at a higher temperature. The working substance undergoing the refrigeration cycle is called a refrigerant. The refrigerant (such as ammonia or Freon) is a saturated liquid at a high pressure and at as low a temperature as can be obtained with air or water cooling.

The refrigeration cycle comprises the following processes :

  1. Throttling process : The saturated liquid refrigerant passes from the condenser through a narrow opening from a region of constant high pressure to a region of constant lower pressure almost adiabatically. It is a property of saturated liquids (not gases) that a throttling process produces cooling and partial vaporization.
  2. Isothermal, isobaric vaporization-with the heat of vaporization being supplied by the materials or the region to be cooled : Heat Qc is absorbed by the refrigerant at the low temperature TC, thereby cooling the materials of the cold reservoir.
  3. Adiabatic compression of the refrigerant by an electrical compressor, thereby raising its temperature above TH.
  4. Isobaric cooling and condensation in the condenser at TH : In the condenser, the vapour is cooled until it condenses and is completely liquefied, i. e., heat QH is rejected to the surroundings which is the hot reservoir.

Question 51.
Draw a neat labelled schematic diagram of transferring heat from a cold region to a hot region.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 41

Question 52.
What is refrigeration?
Answer:
Refrigeration is artificial cooling of a space or substance of a system and/or maintaining its temperature below the ambient temperature.

Question 53.
Draw a neat labelled diagram to illustrate schematics of a refrigerator.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 42

Question 54.
What are the steps through which a refrigerant goes in one complete cycle of refrigeration ?
Answer:
In one complete cycle of refrigeration, the refrigerant, a liquid such as fluorinated hydrocarbon, goes through the following steps :

  1. The refrigerant in the closed tube passes through the nozzle and expands, into a low-pressure area. This adiabatic expansion results in reduction in pressure and temperature of the fluid and the fluid turns into a gas.
  2. The cold gas is in thermal contact with the inner compartment of the fridge. Here it absorbs heat at constant pressure from the contents of the fridge.
  3. The gas passes to a compressor where it does work in adiabatic compression. This raises its temperature and converts it back into a liquid.
  4. The hot liquid passes through the coils on the outside of the refrigerator and releases heat to the air outside in an isobaric compression process.
    The compressor, driven by an external source of energy, does work on the refrigerant during each cycle.

Question 55.
Explain the energy flow in a refrigerator and define the coefficient of performance of a refrigerator.
Answer:
In a refrigerator, QC is the heat absorbed by the working substance (refrigerant) at a lower temperature TC, W is the work done on the working substance, and QH is the heat rejected at a higher temperature TH. The absorption of heat is from the contents of the refrigerator and rejection of heat is to the atmosphere. Here, QC is positive and W and QH are negative. In one cycle, the total change in the internal energy of the working substance is zero.
∴ QH + QC = W ∴ QH = W – QC
∴ -QH = QC – W
Now, QH < 0, W < 0 and QC > 0
∴ |QH| = |QC| + |W|
The coefficient of performance (CoP), K, or quality factor, or Q value of a refrigerator is defined as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 43
[Note: K does not have unit and dimensions or its dimensions are [M°L°T°.]

Question 56.
How does an air conditioner differ from a refrigerator? Define the coefficient of performance of an air conditioner and express it in terms of heat current.
Answer:
The working of an air conditioner is exactly similar to that of a refrigerator, but the volume of the chamber/room cooled by an air conditioner is far greater than that in a refrigerator. The evaporator coils of an air conditioner are inside the room, and the condenser outside the room. A fan inside the air conditioner circulates cool air in the room.

The coefficient of performance, K, of an air conditioner is defined as K = \(|\frac{Q_{\mathrm{C}}}{W}|\), where QC is the heat absorbed and W is the work done. The time rate of heat removed is the heat current, H = \(\frac{\left|Q_{C}\right|}{t}\), where t is the time in which heat |QC|, is removed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 44
where H = |QC|/t is the heat current and P( = |W|/t) is the time rate of doing work, i.e., power.

Question 57.
What is a heat pump ?
Answer:
A heat pump is a device used to heat a building by cooling the air outside it. It works like a refrigerator but cooling outside space and heating inside space. In this case, the evaporator coils are outside the building to absorb heat from the air. The condenser coils are inside the building to release the heat to warm the building.

Question 58.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
In a refrigerator, in one cycle, the external work done on the working substance is 20% of the energy extracted from the cold reservoir. Find the coefficient of performance of the refrigerator.
Solution :
Data: |W| = 0.2|QC|
The coefficient of performance of the refrigerator,
K = |\(\frac{Q_{C}}{W}\)| = \(\frac{\left|Q_{C}\right|}{0.2\left|Q_{C}\right|}\)
= 5

Question 2.
The coefficient of performance of a room air conditioner is 3. If the rate of doing work is 2kW, find the heat current.
Solution :
Data : K = 3, P = 2000 W
K = \(\frac{H}{P}\)
∴ Heat current, H = KP = (3) (2000) W
= 6000 W = 6kW

Question 59.
State and explain the limitations of the first law of thermodynamics.
Answer:

  1. The first law of thermodynamics is essentially the principle of conservation of energy as there is a close relation between work and energy. We find that there is a net transfer of energy (heat) from a body at higher temperature to a body at lower temperature. The net transfer of energy from a body at lower temperature to a body at higher temperature is not observed though consistent with the first law of thermodynamics.
  2. If two containers, one containing nitrogen and the other containing oxygen, are connected to allow diffusion, they mix readily. They never get separated into the respective containers though there is no violation of the first law of thermodynamics.
  3. It is not possible to design a heat engine with 100% efficiency, though there is no restriction imposed by the first law of thermodynamics.
  4. At room temperature, ice absorbs heat from the surrounding air and melts. The process in the opposite direction is not observed, though consistent with energy conservation. These examples suggest that there is some other law operative in nature that determines the direction of a process

Question 60.
State the two forms of the second law of thermodynamics.
Answer:
Second law of thermodynamics :

  1. It is impossible to extract an amount of heat QH from a hot reservoir and use it all to do work W. Some amount of heat QC must be exhausted (given out) to a cold reservoir. This prohibits the possibility of a perfect heat engine.
    This statement is called the first form or the engine law or the engine statement or the Kelvin-Planck statement of the second law of thermodynamics.
  2. It is not possible for heat to flow from a colder body to a warmer body without any work having been done to accomplish this. This prohibits the possibility of a perfect refrigerator.
    This statement is called the second form or the Clausius statement of the second law of thermodynamics.

Notes :

  1. Max Planck (Karl Ernst Ludwig) (1858-1947) German physicist, put forward quantum therory of radiation.
  2. Rudolf Clausius (1822-88) German theoretical physicist, made significant contribution to thermodynamics.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics

Question 61.
Draw neat labelled diagrams to illustrate
(i) energy flow diagram for engine statement.
(ii) energy flow diagram for a perfect refrigerator.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 45

Question 62.
State the difference between a reversible process and an irreversible process.
OR
Distinguish between a reversible process and an irreversible process.
Answer:
A reversible process is a bidirectional process, i.e., its path in P-V plane is the same in either direction. In contrast, an irreversible process is a undirectional process, i.e., it can take place only in one direction.

A reversible process consists of a very large number of infinitesimally small steps so that the system is all the time in thermodynamic equilibrium with its environment. In contrast an irreversible process may occur so rapidly that it is never in thermodynamic equilibrium with its environment.

Question 63.
Draw a neat labelled diagram of a Carnot cycle and describe the processes occurring in a Carnot engine. Write the expression for the efficiency of a Carnot engine.
Answer:
Basically, two processes occur in a Carnot engine :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 46
(1) Exchange of heat with the reservoirs : In isothermal expansion AB, the working substance takes in heat QH from a lot reservoir (source) at constant temperature TH. In isothermal compression CD, the working substance gives out heat QC to a cold reservoir (sink) at constant temperature TC.

(2) Doing work : In adiabatic expansion BC, the working substance does work on the environment and in adiabatic compression DA, work is done on the working substance by the environment.
All processes are reversible. It can be shown that \(\frac{\left|Q_{C}\right|}{Q_{\mathrm{H}}}\) = \(\frac{T_{\mathrm{C}}}{T_{\mathrm{H}}}\). Hence, the efficiency of a Carnot engine,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 47

Question 64.
What is a Carnot refrigerator? State the expressions for the coefficient of performance of a Carnot refrigerator.
Answer:
A Carnot refrigerator is a Carnot engine operated in the reverse direction. Here, heat QC is absorbed from a cold reservoir at temperature TC, work W is provided externally, and heat QH is given out to a hot reservoir at temperature TH.
The coefficient of performance of a Carnot refrigerator is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 48
[Note: K is large if TH-TC is small. It means a large quantity of heat can be removed from the body at lower temperature to the body at higher temperature by doing small amount of work. K is small if TH – TC is large.
It means a small quantity of heat can be removed from the body at lower temperature to the body at higher temperature even with large amount of work.]

Question 65.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
A Carnot engine receives 6 × 104 J from a reservoir at 600 K, does some work, and rejects some heat to a reservoir at 500 K. Find the
(i) the heat rejected by the engine
(ii) the work done by the engine
(iii) the efficiency of the engine.
Solution :
Data : QH = 6 × 104J, TH = 600K, TC = 500K
(i) The heat rejected by the engine
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 49

Question 2.
A Carnot engine operates between 27 °C and 87 °C. Find its efficiency.
Solution :
Data : TC = 27 °C = (273 + 27) K = 300 K,
TH = 87 °C = (273 + 87) = 360 K
The efficiency of the engine,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 50

Question 3.
The coefficient of performance of a Carnot refrigerator is 4. If the temperature of the hot reservoir is 47 °C, find the temperature of the cold reservoir.
Solution :
Data : K = 4, TH = 47°C = (273 + 47) K = 320
K = \(\frac{T_{\mathrm{c}}}{T_{\mathrm{H}}-T_{\mathrm{c}}}\) ∴ KTH – KTc = Tc
∴ KTH = (1 + K)Tc
∴ Tc = \(\frac{K T_{\mathrm{H}}}{1+K}\) = \(\frac{(4)(320)}{1+4}\)K = (0.8)(320)K
= 256K = (256 – 273)°C = – 17°C
This is the temperature of the cold reservoir.

[Note : A hot-air type engine consisting of two cylinders, was developed by Robert Stirling (1790 -1878), a Scottish engineer and clergyman. He developed the concept in 1816 and obtained a patent for his design in 1827. Some engines were made in 1844. He also used helium and hydrogen in some engines developed thereafter. Stirling engines are used in submarines and spacecrafts.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics

Question 66.
Draw a neat labelled diagram of a Sterling cycle and describe the various processes taking place in a Sterling engine.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 51
Answer:
The working substance can be air or helium or hydrogen or nitrogen. All processes are reversible.

  1. AB is isothermal expansion, at temperature TH, in which heat QH is absorbed from the source and useful work is done by the working substance.
  2. BC is isochoric process in which some heat is released by the gas (working substance) to the refrigerator and the gas cools to temperature Tc < TH.
  3. CD is isothermal compression, at temperature Tc, in which heat Qc is rejected to the coolant (sink).
  4. DA is isochoric process in which heat is taken in by the gas and its temperature rises to TH.

[Note : Stirling engine operated in reverse direction is used in the field of cryogenics to obtain extremely low – temperatures to liquefy air or other gases.]

Question 67.
Refer above figure and answer the following questions.
(i) What is the work done in process AB ?
(ii) What is the change in internal energy and heat released in process BC ?
Answer:
(i) In this case, the change in the internal energy is zero, as the temperature of the gas remains constant. Hence, the work done, W = heat absorbed, QH.

(ii) In this case, the change in the internal energy, ∆ U = nCV (TC – TH), where n = number of moles of the gas used in the Stirling engine and CV = molar specific heat of the gas. As W = 0 at constant volume, heat released’= ∆ U.

Question 68.
Choose the correct option :

Question 1.
According to the first law of thermodynamics, in the usual notation,
(A) Q = ∆U + W
(B) Q = ∆U – W
(C) Q = W – ∆U
(D) Q= -(∆ U + W).
Answer:
(A) Q = ∆U + W

Question 2.
In an isothermal process, in the usual notation,
(A) PV = constant
(B) V/T = constant
(C) P/T = constant
(D) Q = 0.
Answer:
(A) PV = constant

Question 3.
In an isothermal process, in the usual notation,
(A) W = nRT (Vf/Vi)
(B) W = ∆ U
(C) W = Q
(D) W = 0.
Answer:
(C) W = Q

Question 4.
In an adiabatic process, in the usual notation,
(A) TVγ = constant
(B) PTγ = constant
(C) W = 0
(D) PVγ = constant.
Answer:
(D) PVγ = constant.

Question 5.
In an isobaric process, in the usual notation,
(A) W = P (Vf – Vi)
(B) W = Q
(C) W = – ∆U
(D) ∆T = 0.
Answer:
(A) W = P (Vf – Vi)

Question 6.
In an adiabatic process, in the usual notation,
(A) ∆ P = 0
(B) ∆ V = 0
(C) Q = 0
(D) ∆U = 0.
Answer:
(C) Q = 0

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics

Question 7.
In an isothermal process, in the usual notation,
(A) W = P(Vf – Vi)
(B) W = 0
(C) W = V(Pf – Pi)
(D) W = nRT In(Vf/Vi).
Answer:
(D) W = nRT In(Vf/Vi).

Question 8.
In an isobaric process, in the usual notation,
(A) W = nCV (Tf – Ti)
(B) Q = nCP (Tf – Ti)
(C) ∆U = nR(Tf – Ti)
(D) W = 0.
Answer:
(B) Q = nCP (Tf – Ti)

Question 9.
In the usual notation, the isothermal work, W =
(A) P(Vf – Vi)
(B) nRT(Pi/ Pf)
(C) nRT ln(Pi/Pf)
(D) nRT(Pf/Pi).
Answer:
(C) nRT ln(Pi/Pf)

Question 10.
If Q and ∆u are expressed in cal and W is expressed in joule, then,
(A) \(\frac{Q}{J}\) = \(\frac{\Delta U}{J}\) + W
(B) Q = ∆U – (W/J)
(C) \(\frac{Q}{J}\) = \(\frac{\Delta U}{J}\) + W
(D) Q = ∆U + (W/J)
Answer:
(D) Q = ∆U + (W/J)

Question 11.
In an adiabatic process, in the usual notation, W =
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics 52
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{P_{\mathrm{i}} V_{\mathrm{i}}-P_{\mathrm{f}} V_{\mathrm{f}}}{\gamma-1}\)

Question 12.
In a cyclic process,
(A) ∆U = Q
(B) Q = 0
(C) W = 0
(D) W = Q
Answer:
(D) W = Q

Question 13.
The efficiency of a heat engine is given by η =
(A) QH/W
(B) W/Qc
(C) W/QH
(D) Qc/W.
Answer:
(C) W/QH

Question 14.
In a cyclic process, the area enclosed by the loop in the P – V plane corresponds to
(A) ∆U
(B) W
(C) Q – W
(D) W – Q.
Answer:
(B) W

Question 15.
The efficiency of a Carnot engine is given by K =
(A) Tc/(TH – Tc)
(B) (TH – Tc)/Tc
(C) TH/(TH – Tc)
(D) (TH – Tc)/TH
Answer:
(A) Tc/(TH – Tc)

Question 16.
The coefficient of performance of a Carnot refrigerator is given by K =
(A) Tc(TH-Tc)
(B) (TH-Tc)/Tc
(C) TH/(TH-Tc)
(D) (TH-Tc)/TH.
Answer:
(A) Tc(TH-Tc)

Question 17.
The efficiency of a Carnot engine working between TH = 400 K and Tc = 300 K is
(A) 75%
(B) 25%
(C) 1/3
(D) 4/7.
Answer:
(B) 25%

Question 18.
If a Carnot engine receives 5000 J from a hot reservoir and rejects 4000 J to a cold reservoir, the efficiency of the engine is
(A) 25%
(B) 10%
(C) 1/9
(D) 20%.
Answer:
(D) 20%.

Question 19.
If a Carnot refrigerator works between 250 K and 300 K, its coefficient of performance =
(A) 6
(B) 1.2
(C) 5
(D) 10.
Answer:
(C) 5

Question 20.
The coefficient of performance of a Carnot refrigerator is 4. If Tc = 250 K, then TH =
(A) 625 K
(B) 310 K
(C) 312.5 K
(D) 320 K.
Answer:
(C) 312.5 K

Question 21.
The coefficient of performance of a Carnot refrigerator working between TH and Tc is K and the efficiency of a Carnot engine working between the same TH and Tc is η. Then
(A) ηk = \(\frac{Q_{\mathrm{H}}}{Q_{\mathrm{c}}}\)
(B) η/k = Qc/QH
(C) η/k = QH/Qc
(D) ηk = \(\frac{Q_{c}}{Q_{H}}\)
Answer:
(D) ηk = \(\frac{Q_{c}}{Q_{H}}\)

Question 22.
The internal energy of one mole of organ is
(A) \(\frac{5}{2}\)RT
(B) RT
(C) \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT
(D) 3RT.
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Thermodynamics

Question 23.
The internal energy of one mole of oxygen is
(A) \(\frac{5}{2}\)RT
(B) 5RT
(C) \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT
(D) 3RT.
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{3}{2}\)RT

Question 24.
The internal energy of one mole of nitrogen at 300 K is about 6225 J. Its internal energy at 400 K will be about
(A) 8300J
(B) 4670J
(C) 8500J
(D) 8000J.
Answer:
(A) 8300J

Question 25.
The adiabatic constant γ for argan is
(A) 4/3
(B) 7/5
(C) 6/5
(D) 5/3.
Answer:
(D) 5/3.

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 8 Marketing

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 8 Marketing Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce OCM Important Questions Chapter 8 Marketing

Select the correct options and rewrite the sentence

Question 1.
In …………….. there are few sellers selling homogeneous products or differentiated products in the market.
(a) Monopoly
(b) Duopoly
(c) Oligopoly
Answer:
(c) Oligopoly

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 8 Marketing

Question 2.
The process of classification of products according to similar characteristics and/or quality is known as ………………
(a) Standardisation
(b) Grading
(c) Branding
Answer:
(b) Grading

Question 3.
The market which uses Information Technology for buying and selling of product or service is known as ………………….
(a) Exchange concept of market
(b) Digital concept of market
(c) Place concept of market
Answer:
(b) Digital concept of market

Question 4.
The market for semi-processed or semifinished goods is called ……………………
(a) Primary Market
(b) Secondary Market
(c) Terminal Market
Answer:
(b) Secondary Market

Question 5.
……………….. helps to avoid breakage, damage and destruction of product.
(a) Packaging
(b) Grading
(c) Branding
Answer:
(a) Packaging

Question 6.
……………… gives a special identity to the product.
(a) Grading
(b) Packaging
(c) Branding
Answer:
(c) Branding

Match the pairs

Question 1.

Group A Group B
(A) Regulated Market 1. Market of consumer goods
(B) Capital Market 2. Monopoly
(C) Tool of Marketing 3. Provides employment
(D) Marketing Mix 4. Stock Exchange
(E) Promotion 5. Market not controlled by regulation
6. Provides quality products
7. 4 Ps
8. Packaging and labelling
9. Process of informing customers about producer
10. Borrowing and lending long term capital

Answer:

Group A Group B
(A) Regulated Market 4. Stock Exchange
(B) Capital Market 10. Borrowing and lending long term capital
(C) Tool of Marketing 8. Packaging and labelling
(D) Marketing Mix 7. 4 Ps
(E) Promotion 9. Process of informing customers about producer

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 8 Marketing

Question 2.

Group A Group B
(A) Customer Support Service (1) Creates good design of product
(B) Label (2) To identity Need/ Want of Consumers
(C) Product Development (3) Provides Information
(D) Marketing Research (4) After Sales Services
(E) Trademark (5) Movement of finished goods
(6) Storage of goods
(7) Registered Brands
(8) King of Market
(9) Distribution Channel
(10) Decreases Distribution cost

Answer:

Group A Group B
(A) Customer Support Service (4) After Sales Services
(B) Label (3) Provides Information
(C) Product Development (1) Creates good design of product
(D) Marketing Research (2) To identity Need/ Want of Consumers
(E) Trademark (7) Registered Brands

Give one word/phrase/term for the following statements

Question 1.
The market for the commodities which are sold within geographical limits of a region.
Answer:
Local Market

Question 2.
The market for agricultural and forest products.
Answer:
Primary Market

Question 3.
Where there is single seller or producer who controls the market.
Answer:
Monopoly

Question 4.
Market situation where there is single buyer of a commodity or service.
Answer:
Monopsony

Question 5.
Market where lEirge number of buyers and sellers buy and sell their homogeneous products.
Answer:
Perfect Market.

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 8 Marketing

Question 6.
The process of identifying the needs Emd wants of consumers in the market.
Answer:
Marketing Research

Question 7.
The tool of market that helps to publicise the product to the consumer.
Answer:
Promotion

Question 8.
Putting the right product at the right time, at the right place, at the right price.
Answer:
MEirketing Mix

Question 9.
Slip attached to the product which provides all the information regEirding product and its producer.
Answer:
Labelling

Question 10.
Function of determining standards and ensuring uniformity in the product.
Answer:
Standardisation

Question 11.
The market for the commodities which are sold within country.
Answer:
National Market

Question 12.
The market for commodities which are produced in one country and sold in other countries.
Answer:
International Market

Question 13.
A type of market which has very short time existence.
Answer:
Very Short Period s Market

Question 14.
A market in which the activities of buying and selling is undertaken in large quantities at cheaper rate.
Answer:
Wholesale Market

Question 15.
A market where goods are sold to ultimate consumers.
Answer:
Terminal Market.

State whether following the statements are True or False

Question 1.
Monopsony refers to a market situation where there is a single seller of a commodity or service.
Answer:
False

Question 2.
Product development is one time process.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 8 Marketing

Question 3.
Marketing follows customer oriented approach.
Answer:
True

Question 4.
Commodity Exchanges, Stock Exchanges, Foreign ExchEmges are examples of unregulated or raw market.
Answer:
False

Question 5.
Effective utilisation of channel of distribution can help in reducing the cost price of product.
Answer:
True.

Find the odd one

Question 1.
Local market, International market, Terminal j market, National market
Answer:
Terminal market

Question 2.
Very short period market, Perfect market, Short period market, Long period market
Answer:
Perfect market

Question 3.
Monopoly, Monopsony, Oligopoly, Imperfect market
Answer:
Imperfect market.

Complete the sentences

Question 1.
…………….. is a part and parcel of modern day’s life.
Answer:
Marketing

Question 2.
…………….. is the king of the market.
Answer:
Customer

Question 3.
Market which uses Information Technology for buying and selling of goods or services is called ………………..
Answer:
Digital market

Question 4.
Market for goods, materials, consumer and industrial goods is called ………………….
Answer:
Commodity market

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 8 Marketing

Question 5.
………………. market refers to the markets regulated by statutory provisions of the country.
Answer:
Regulated

Question 6.
In …………………. there are two sellers, selling either a homogenous product or differentiated products.
Answer:
Duopoly

Question 7.
…………………. involves collecting raw materials from different sources and bringing them at one place for production.
Answer:
Assembling.

Correct the underlined word and rewrite the sentence

Question 1.
Transportation creates time utility.
Answer:
Perfect market refers to a market situation which is characterised by large number of buyers and sellers who buy and sell their homogeneous products.

Question 2.
Imperfect market refers to a market situation which is characterised by large number of buyers and sellers who buy and sell their homogeneous products.
Answer:
Warehousing creates time utility.

Question 3.
Producer is the king of the market.
Answer:
Consumer is the king of the market.

Question 4.
Retail market refers to the market of bulk purchase and sale of goods.
Answer:
Wholesale market refers to the market of bulk purchase- and sale of goods.

Question 5.
Determining the right price is the result of product development.
Answer:
Determining the right price is the result of marketing research.

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 8 Marketing

Arrange in proper order

Question 1.
Terminal market, Primary market, Secondary market.
Answer:
Primary market, Secondary market, Terminal market.

Distinguish between

Question 1.
Marketing and Selling
Answer:

Taiga Region Tundra Region
1. Meaning Marketing refers to a process in which needs are identified or created, products offered and delivered to the consumers. Selling refers to a process of processing orders from customers and delivering the products to them.
2. Concept As compared to selling, marketing is wider concept. It comprises of selling and other functions. As compared to marketing, selling is narrower concept. It is part and parcel of marketing concept.
3. Essential Fulfilling the needs and satisfaction of the consumers are the essence of the marketing concept. Transfer of title and possession of the products from one person to another are the essence of selling.
4. Orientation Marketing is consumer oriented. It stresses more on consumers and the maximisation of their satisfaction. Selling is product oriented. It stresses more on the product and its efficiency.
5. Views Marketing views (looks at) the customers as they are the centre of all activities of marketing. Selling views (looks at) the customers as a last link in the activities of selling.
6. Activity Marketing is an indirect activity. Selling is a direct activity.

 

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations

Question 1.
Define :
(1) periodic motion
(2) oscillatory motion. Give two examples.
Answer:
(1) Periodic motion : A motion that repeats itself at definite intervals of time is said to be a periodic motion.
Examples : The motion of the hands of a clock, the motion of the Earth around the Sun.

(2) Oscillatory motion : A periodic motion in which a body moves back and forth over the same path, straight or curved, between alternate extremes is said to be an oscillatory motion.
Examples : The motion of a taut string when plucked, the vibrations of the atoms in a molecule, the oscillations of a simple pendulum.
[Note : The oscillatory motion of a particle is also called a harmonic motion when its position, velocity and acceleration can be expressed in terms of a periodic, sinusoidal functions-sine or cosine, of time.

Question 2.
With a neat diagram, describe a spring-and-block oscillator.
Answer:
Consider a spring-and-block oscillator as shown in below figure in which the block slides on a frictionless horizontal surface. The spring has a relaxed length when the block is at rest at the position O.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 1
The block is then displaced to P by an amount x measured from the equilibrium position O. Upon releasing, the unbalanced force \(\vec{F}\) = –\(k \vec{x}\) toward left accelerates the block and its speed increases. As x gets smaller, |\(\vec{F}\)| and the acceleration decrease proportionately.

k is the elastic constant of the spring called the force constant or spring constant.

At the instant the block passes through the point O, | \(\vec{F}\) | = 0 because x = 0; although there is no acceleration, the speed is maximum.

As soon as the block passes O going to the left, the force on the block and its acceleration increases to the right, because the spring is now compressed. Eventually, the block is brought to rest momentarily at the point Question Then on, the subsequent motion is the same as the motion from P to Q, with all directions reversed.

The acceleration of the block is \(\vec{a}\) = \(\frac{\vec{F}}{m}\) = –\(\frac{k}{m} \vec{x}\) where m is the mass of the block. This shows that the acceleration is also proportional to the displacement and its direction is opposite to that of the displacement, i.e., the force and acceleration are both directed towards the mean or equilibrium position. The motion repeats causing the block to oscillate about equilibrium or mean position O. This oscillatory motion along a straight path is called linear simple harmonic motion (SHM).

The points P and Q are called the extreme positions or the turning points of the motion. One oscillation is a complete to-and-fro motion of the oscillating body (block, in this case) along its path (the motion from O to P, P to Q and Q to O), i.e., two consecutive passages of the body through the point O in the same direction.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations

Question 3.
In linear SHM, what can you say about the restoring force when the speed of the particle is

  1. zero
  2. maximum ?

Answer:
The restoring force is

  1. maximum
  2. zero.

Question 4.
Define period or periodic time, frequency, amplitude and path length of simple harmonic motion (SHM).
Answer:

  1. Period or periodic time of SHM : The time taken by a particle performing simple harmonic motion to complete one oscillation is called the period or periodic time of SHM.
  2. Frequency of SHM : The number of oscillations performed per unit time by a particle executing SHM is called the frequency of SHM.
  3. Amplitude of SHM : The magnitude of the maximum displacement of a particle performing SHM from its mean position is called the amplitude of SHM.
  4. Path length of SHM : The length of the path over which a particle performs SHM is twice the amplitude of the motion and is called the path length or range of the SHM.
    [Note : The frequency of SHM is equal to the reciprocal of the period of SHM.]

Question 5.
Obtain the differential equation of linear simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
When a particle performs linear SHM, the force acting on the particle is always directed towards the mean position. The magnitude of the force is directly proportional to the magnitude of the displacement of the particle from the mean position. Thus, if \(\vec{F}\) is the force acting on the particle when its displacement from the mean position is \(\vec{x}\), \(\vec{F}\) = -k\(\vec{x}\) … (1)
where the constant k, the force per unit displacement, is called the force constant. The minus sign indicates that the force and the displacement are oppositely directed.
The velocity of the particle is \(\frac{d \vec{x}}{d t}\) and its acceleration is \(\frac{d^{2} \vec{x}}{d t^{2}}\).
Let m be the mass of the particle.
Force = mass × acceleration
∴ \(\vec{F}\) = m\(\frac{d^{2} \vec{x}}{d t^{2}}\)
Hence, from Eq. (1),
m\(\frac{d^{2} \vec{x}}{d t^{2}}\) = -k\(\vec{x}\)
∴ \(\frac{d^{2} \vec{x}}{d t^{2}}\) + \(\frac{k}{m} \vec{x}\) = 0 … (2)
This is the differential equation of linear SHM.

Question 6.
Obtain the dimensions of force constant in SHM.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 2
[Note : The SI unit of force constant is the newton per metre (N/m) while the cgs unit is the dyne per centimetre (dyn/cm).]

Question 7.
State the differential equation of linear SHM. Hence, obtain the expressions for the acceleration, velocity and displacement of a particle performing linear SHM.
Answer:
The differential equation of linear SHM is
\(\frac{d^{2} \vec{x}}{d t^{2}}\) + \(\frac{k}{m} \vec{x}\) = 0
where m = mass of the particle performing SHM, \(\frac{d^{2} \vec{x}}{d t^{2}}\) = acceleration of the particle when its displacement from the mean position is \(\vec{x}\) and k = force constant. For linear motion, we can write the differential equation in scalar form :
\(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) + \(\frac{k}{m}\)x = 0
Let \(\frac{k}{m}\) = ω2, a constant
∴ \(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) + ω2x = 0
∴ Acceleration, a = \(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) = ω2
The minus sign shows that the acceleration and the displacement have opposite directions. Writing v = \(\frac{d x}{d t}\) as the velocity of the particle.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 3
Hence, EQ. (1) can be written as
v\(\frac{d v}{d x}\) = -ω2x dx
∴ vdv = -ω2x dx
Integrating this expression, we get,
\(\frac{v^{2}}{2}\) = –\(\frac{-\omega^{2} x^{2}}{2}\) + C
where the constant of integration C is found from a boundary condition.

At an extreme position (a turning point of the motion), the velocity of the particle is zero. Thus, v = 0 when x = ± A, where A is the amplitude.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 4
This equation gives the velocity of the particle in terms of the displacement, x. The velocity towards right is taken to be positive and that towards left as negative.
Since, v = dx/dt, we can write Eq. (2) as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 5
where the constant of integration, α, is found from the initial conditions, i.e., the displacement and the velocity of the particle at time t = 0.
From Eq. (3), we have
\(\frac{x}{A}\) = sin (ωt + α)
∴ Displacement as a function of time is,
x = A sin (ωt + α)

Question 8.
From the definition of linear SHM, derive an expression for the angular frequency of a body performing linear SHM.
Answer:
When a body of mass m performs linear SHM, the restoring force on it is always directed towards the mean position and its magnitude is directly proportional to the magnitude of the displacement of the body from the mean position. Thus, if \(\vec{F}\) is the force acting on the body when its displacement from the mean position is \(\vec{x}\),
\(\vec{F}\) = m\(\) = – k\(\vec{x}\)
where the constant k, the force per unit displacement, is the force constant.
Let \(\frac{k}{m}\) = ω2, a constant. m
∴ Acceleration, a = –\(\frac{k}{m}\)x = -ω2x
∴ The angular frequency
ω = \(\sqrt{\frac{k}{m}}\) = \(\sqrt{\left|\frac{a}{x}\right|}\)
= \(\sqrt{\text { acceleration per unit displacement }}\)

Question 9.
What is the displacement of a particle at any position, performing linear SHM ?
Answer:
The displacement of a particle performing linear SHM is a specified distance of the particle from the mean position in a specified direction along its path. The general expression for the displacement is x = A sin (ωt + α), where A and ω are respectively the amplitude or maximum displacement and the angular frequency of the motion, and α is the initial phase.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations

Question 10.
Assuming the general expression for displacement of a particle in SHM, obtain the expressions for the displacement when the particle starts from
(i) the mean position
(ii) an extreme position.
Answer:
The general expression for the displacement of a particle in SHM at time t is x = A sin (ωt + α) … (1) where A is the amplitude and re is a constant in a particular case.
∴ ωt + α = sin-1\(\frac{x}{A}\) …. (2)
(i) When the particle starts from the mean position, x = 0 at t = 0. Then, from Eq. (2),
α = sin-1 0 = 0 or π … (3)
Substituting for α into Eq. (1),
x = A sin ωt for α = 0 and x = – A sin ωt for α = π
∴ x = ±A sin ωt … (4)
where the plus sign is taken if the particle’s initial velocity is to the right, while the minus sign is taken when the initial velocity is to the left.

(ii) x = ±A at t = 0 when the particle starts from the right or left extreme position, respectively. Then, from Eq. (2),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 6
where the plus sign is taken when the particle starts from the positive extreme, while the minus sign is taken when the particle starts from the negative extreme.

Question 11.
At what position is the acceleration of a particle in SHM maximum? What is its magnitude? At what position is the acceleration minimum ? What is its magnitude ?
Answer:
The magnitude of the acceleration of a particle performing SHM is
a = ω2x … (1)
where ω is a constant related to the system.
From Eq. (1), the acceleration has a maximum value amax when displacement x is maximum, |x| = A, i.e., the particle is at the extreme positions.
∴ amax = ω2A
Also from EQ. (1), the acceleration has a minimum value when x is minimum, x = 0, i.e., the particle is at the mean position.
∴ amin = 0

Question 12.
At what position is the velocity of a particle in SHM maximum ? What is its magnitude ? At what position is the velocity minimum? What is its magnitude?
Answer:
The velocity of a particle in SHM is
v = ω\(\sqrt{A^{2}-x^{2}}\) … (1)
where ω is a constant related to the system and A is the amplitude of SHM.
From EQ. (1) it is clear that the velocity is maximum when A2 – x2 is maximum, that is when displacement x = 0, i.e., the particle is at the mean position.
∴ vmax = ωA
Also from Eq. (1), the velocity is minimum when A2 – x2 is minimum, equal to zero. This occurs when x is maximum, x = ± A, i.e., the particle is at the extreme positions.
∴ vmin = 0

Question 13.
For a particle performing linear SHM, show that its average speed over one oscillation is \(\frac{2 \omega A}{\pi}\), where A is the amplitude of SHM.
OR
Show that the average speed of a particle performing SHM in one oscillation is \(\frac{2}{\pi}\) × maximum speed.
Answer:
During one oscillation, a particle performing SHM covers a total distance equal to 4A, where A is the amplitude of SHM. The time taken to cover this distance is the period (T) of SHM.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 7

Question 14.
A body of mass 200 g performs linear SHM with period 2πs. What is the force constant ?
Answer:
Force constant, k = mω2 = m\(\left(\frac{2 \pi}{T}\right)^{2}\)
= 0.2kg × \(\left(\frac{2 \pi}{2 \pi \mathrm{s}}\right)^{2}\) = 0.2N/m.

Question 15.
Derive expressions for the period of SHM in terms of
(1) angular frequency
(2) force constant
(3) acceleration.
Answer:
The general expression for the displacement (x) of a particle performing SHM is x = A sin (ωt + α)
(1) Let T be the period of the SHM and x1 the displacement after a further time interval T. Then
x1 = A sin [ω(t + T) + α]
= A sin (ωt + ωT + α)
= A sin (ωt + α + ωT)
Since T ≠ 0, for x1 to be equal to x, we must have (ωT)min = 2π.
Hence, the period (T) of SHM is T = 2π/ω
This is the expression for the period in terms of the constant co, the angular frequency.

(2) If m is the mass of the particle and k is the force constant, ω = \(\sqrt{k / m}\).
∴T = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}\) = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\sqrt{k / m}}\) = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\)

(3) The acceleration of a particle performing SHM has a magnitude a = ω2x
∴ ω = \(\sqrt{a / x}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 8

Question 16.
A small uniform cylinder floats upright to a depth d in a liquid. If it is depressed slightly and released, find its period of oscillations.
Answer:
Consider a cylinder, of length L, area of cross section A and density ρ, floating in a liquid of density σ. If the cylinder floats up to depth d in the liquid, then by the law of floatation, the weight of the cylinder equals the weight of the liquid displaced, i.e.,
ALρg = Adσg
∴ L = dσ/p … (1)
Let the cylinder be pushed down by a distance y. Then, the weight of the liquid displaced by the cylinder of length y will exert a net upward force on the cylinder :
F = Ayσg,
which produces an acceleration,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 9

Question 17.
How does the frequency of an SHM vary with

  1. the force constant k
  2. the mass of the particle performing SHM ?

Answer:
The frequency of a particle of mass m performing
SHM is f = \(\frac{1}{T}\) = \(\frac{1}{2 \pi} \sqrt{\frac{k}{m}}\).

  1. ∴ f ∝\(\sqrt{k}\)
    Thus, the frequency of an SHM is directly proportional to the square root of the force constant of the motion.
  2. ∴ f ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{m}}\)
    Thus, the frequency of an SHM is inversely proportional to the square root of the mass of the particle performing SHM.

Question 18.
In linear SHM, at what position of the particle is the acceleration of the particle half the maximum acceleration?
Answer:
In linear SHM, | a | ∝ | x | ∴ a = \(\frac{a_{\max }}{2}\) when | x | = \(\frac{A}{2}\), where A is the amplitude of SHM.

Question 19.
If the displacement of a particle in SHM is given by x = 0.1 sin (6πrt) metre, what is the frequency of motion ?
Answer:
Comparison of the given equation with
x = A sin (2πft) gives 2πf = 6π rad/s.
∴ Frequency of motion,/= 3 Hz

Question 20.
If the displacement of a particle in SHM is given by x = 0.1 cos (100t) metre, what is the maximum speed of the particle ?
Answer:
Comparison of the given equation with
x = A cos (ωt) gives A = 0.1 m and ω = 100 rad/s.
∴ Maximum speed of the particle = ωA
= 1000 × 0.1 = 10 m/s

Question 21.
A body of mass m tied to a spring performs SHM with period 2 seconds. If the mass is increased by 3m, what will be the period of SHM ?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 10
∴ T2 = 2T1 = 2 × 2 = 4 seconds gives the required period of SHM.

Question 22.
A particle executing SHM has velocities v1 and v2 when at distances x1 and x2 respectively from the mean position. Show that its period is T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{x_{1}^{2}-x_{2}^{2}}{v_{2}^{2}-v_{1}^{2}}}\) and the amplitude of SHM is A = \(\sqrt{\frac{v_{2}^{2} x_{1}^{2}-v_{1}^{2} x_{2}^{2}}{v_{2}^{2}-v_{1}^{2}}}\)
Answer:
If A is the amplitude and co is the angular frequency, V1 = ω\(\sqrt{A^{2}-x_{1}^{2}}\) … (1)
and v2 = ω\(\sqrt{A^{2}-x_{2}^{2}}\) … (2)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 111

Question 23.
Explain
(i) a series combination
(ii) a parallel combination of springs. Obtain the spring constant in each case.
Answer:
(i) Series combination of springs : When two light springs obeying Hooke’s law are connected as shown in below figure and both the springs experience the same force applied to the free end of the combination, they are said to be connected in series.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 12
Consider two springs, 1 and 2, with respective spring constants k1 and k2 connected in series and supporting a load F = mg so that the springs are extended. Since the same force acts on each spring, by Hooke’s law,
F = k1x1 (for spring 1) and F = k2x2 (for spring 2) The system of two springs in series is equivalent to a single spring, of spring constant kS such that F = kSx, where the total extension x of the combination is the sum x1 + x2 of their elongations.
x = x1 + x2
∴ \(\frac{F}{k_{\mathrm{S}}}\) = \(\frac{F}{k_{1}}\) + \(\frac{F}{k_{2}}\) ∴ \(\frac{1}{k_{\mathrm{S}}}\) = \(\frac{1}{k_{1}}\) + \(\frac{1}{k_{2}}\)
For a series combination of N such springs, of spring constants, k1, k2, k3, … kN
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 13

(ii) Parallel combination of springs : When two light springs obeying Hooke’s law are connected via a thin vertical rod as shown, they are said to be connected in parallel. If a constant force \(\vec{F}\) is exerted on the rod such that the rod remains perpendicular to the direction of the force, the springs undergo the same extension.

Consider two springs, 1 and 2, with respective spring constants k1 and k2 connected in series and supporting a load F = mg so that the springs are extended. The two springs stretch by the same amount x but share the load.
F = F1 + F2
The system of two springs in parallel is equivalent to a single spring, of spring constant kF such that F = kPX,
∴ kPx = k1x + k2x ∴ kP = k1 + k2
For a parallel combination of N such springs, of spring constants k1, k2, k3, … kN
kP = k1 + k2 + k3 + … + kN = \(\Sigma_{i=1}^{N} k_{i}\)
Therefore, for a parallel combination of N identical light springs, each of spring constant k, kP = Nk

Question 24.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
A body of mass 1 kg is made to oscillate on a spring of force constant 16 N/m. Calculate
(i) the angular frequency
(ii) the frequency of oscillation.
Solution :
Data : m = 1 kg, k = 16 N/m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 14

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations

Question 2.
Calculate the time taken by a body performing SHM of period 2 seconds to cover half the amplitude starting from an extreme position.
Solution :
Data : T = 2 s, x0 = + A (initially at positive extremity), x = \(\frac{A}{2}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 15
∴ Starting from the positive extremity, the particle takes \(\frac{1}{3}\) s to cover a distance equal to half the amplitude.

Question 3.
A 3 kg block, attached to a spring, performs linear SHM with the displacement given by x = 2 cos (50t) m. Find the spring constant of the spring.
Solution :
Data : m = 3 kg, x = 2 cos (50t) m
Comparing the given equation with x = A cos ωt,
ω = 50 rad/s
ω2 = k/m
∴ The spring constant,
k = mω2 = (3)(50)2
= 3 × 2500 = 7500 N/m

Question 4.
A body oscillates in SHM according to the equation x = 5 cos (2πt + \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)), where x and t are
in SI units. Calculate the
(i) displacement and
(ii) speed of the body at t = 1.5 s.
Solution:
Data: x = cos \(\left(2 \pi t+\frac{\pi}{4}\right)\), t = 1.5 s
(i) The displacement at t = 1.5 s is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 16
= 5(1.414)(3.142) = 22.21 m/s

Question 5.
The equation of motion of a particle executing SHM is x = a sin \(\left(\frac{\pi}{6} t\right)\) + b cos \(\left(\frac{\pi}{6} t\right)\), where a = 3 cm and b = 4 cm. Express this equation in the form x = A sin \(\left(\frac{\pi}{6} t+\phi\right)\). Hence, find A and φ.
Solution:
Let a = A cos φ and b = A sin φ, so that
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 17

Question 6.
A particle performs SHM of amplitude 10 cm. Its maximum velocity during oscillations is 100 cm/s. What is its displacement, when the velocity is 60 cm/s?
Solution :
Data : A = 10 cm, vmax = 100 cm/s, v = 60 cm/s
vmax = ωA = 100 cm/s
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 18

Question 7.
A body of mass M attached to a spring oscillates with a period of 2 seconds. If the mass is increased by 2 kg, the period increases by 1 second. Find the initial mass, assuming that Hooke’s law is obeyed.
Answer:
Data : m1 = M, T1 = 2 s, m2 = M + 2 kg, T2 = 2s + 1 s = 3s
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 19

Question 8.
A load of 100 g increases the length of a light spring by 10 cm. Find the period of its linear SHM if it is allowed to oscillate freely in the vertical direction. What will be the period if the load is increased to 400 g? [g = 9.8 m/s2]
Solution :
Data :m = 100 g = 100 × 10-3 kg, x = 10 cm = 0.1 m g = 9.8 m/s2, m1 = 400 g = 400 × 10-3 kg
(1) Stretching force F = mg
Now F = kx (numerically), where k is the force constant.
∴ mg = kx
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 20

Question 9.
A particle in SHM has a period of 2 seconds and an amplitude of 10 cm. Calculate its acceleration when it is at 4 cm from its positive extreme position.
Solution :
Data : T = 2s, A = 10 cm, A – x = 4 cm
∴ x = 10 cm – 4 cm = 6 cm
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 21

Question 10.
A particle executes SHM with amplitude 5 cm and period 2 s. Find the speed of the particle at a point where its acceleration is half the maximum acceleration.
Solution :
Data: A = 5 cm = 5 × 10-2 m, T = 2s,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 22

Question 11.
The periodic time of a linear harmonic oscillator is 2π seconds, with maximum displacement of 1 cm. If the particle starts from an extreme position, find the displacement of the particle after π/3 seconds.
Solution :
Data : T = 2π s, A = 1 cm, t = π/3
ω = \(\frac{2 \pi}{T}\) = \(\frac{2 \pi}{2 \pi}\) = 1 rad/s
x = A cos ωt (∵ particle starts from extreme position)
= (1) cos\(\left(1 \times \frac{\pi}{3}\right)\) = cos \(\left(1 \times \frac{\pi}{3}\right)\) = cos \(\frac{\pi}{3}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) cm

Question 12.
A particle performs SHM of period 12 seconds and amplitude 8 cm. If initially the particle is at the positive extremity, how much time will it take to cover a distance of 6 cm from that position?
Solution :
Data : T = 12 s, A = 8 cm
∴ ω = 2π/T = π/6 rad/s
When the particle covers a distance of 6 cm from the positive extremity, its displacement measured from the mean position is x = 8 – 6 = 2 cm.
As the particle starts from the positive extreme position, its displacement is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 23

Question 13.
A particle executes SHM with amplitude 10 cm and period 10 s. Find the velocity and acceleration of the particle at a distance of 5 cm from the equilibrium position.
Solution :
Data : A = 10 cm = 0.1 m, T = 10 s, x = ± 5 cm = ± 0.05 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 24

Question 14.
A body performs SHM on a path 0.12 m long. Its velocity at the centre of the path is 0.12 m/s. Find the period of SHM. Also find the magnitude of the velocity of the body at \(\sqrt{3}\) × 10-2 m from the centre of the path.
Solution :
The path length of the SHM is the range 2 A, and the velocity at the centre of the path, i.e., at the equilibrium position, is the maximum velocity vmax.
Data : 2A = 0.12 m, vmax = 0.12 m/s,
x = ± \(\sqrt{3}\) × 10-2 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 25

Question 15.
A particle of mass 2 g executes SHM with a period of 12 s and amplitude 10 cm. Find the acceleration of the particle and the restoring force on the particle when it is 2 cm from its mean position. Also find the maximum velocity of the particle.
Solution :
Data : m = 2g = 2 × 10-3 kg, T = 12 s,
A = 10 cm = 0.1 m, x = ±2 cm = ±2 × 10-2 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 26
The acceleration of the particle, a = ω2 = (0.5237)2 (± 2 × 10-2)
= ± 0.2743 × 2 × 10-2 = ± 5.486 × 10-3 m/s2
The restoring force on the particle at that position, F = ma = ± (2 × 10-2) (5.486 × 10-3)
= ±1.097 × 10-5 N
The maximum velocity of the particle, vmax = ωA = 0.5237 × 0.1 5.237 × 10-2 m/s

Question 16.
The maximum velocity of a particle performing linear SHM is 0.16 m/s. If its maximum acceleration is 0.64 m/s2, calculate its period.
Solution :
Data : vmax = 0.16 m/s, amax = 0.64 m/s2
vmax = ωA and amax = ω2A
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 27

Question 17.
A particle performing linear SHM has maximum velocity of 25 cm/s and maximum acceleration of 100 cm/s2. Find the amplitude and period of oscillation, [π = 3.142]
Solution :
Data : vmax = 25 cm/s, amax = 100 cm/s2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 28

Question 18.
A particle performing linear SHM has a period of 6.28 seconds and path length of 20 cm. What is the velocity when its displacement is 6 cm from the mean position?
Solution :
Data : T = 6.28 s, 2A = 20 cm ∴ A = 10 cm, x = 6 cm
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 29

Question 19.
A uniform wooden rod floats vertically in water with 14 cm of its length immersed in the water. If it is depressed slightly and released, find its period of oscillations.
Solution :
Data : d = 14 cm = 0.14 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 30

Question 20.
A particle performs UCM. The diameter of the circle is 4 cm. What is the amplitude of linear SHM that is the projection of the UCM on a diameter?
Answer:
Amplitude of linear SHM = radius of the circle = 2 cm.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations

Question 21.
A particle performs UCM with period 2n seconds along a circle of diameter 10 cm. What is the maximum speed of its shadow on a diameter of the circle ?
Answer:
Maximum speed, vmax = ωA = \(\frac{2 \pi}{T}\)A
= \(\frac{2 \pi}{2 \pi}\) × 5 × 10-2 = 5 × 10-2 m/s.

Question 22.
See Question 20 above. What is the maximum acceleration of the shadow ?
Answer:
Maximum acceleration, amax = ω2A = \(\left(\frac{2 \pi}{T}\right)^{2}\) A
= \(\left(\frac{2 \pi}{2 \pi}\right)^{2}\) × 5 × 10-2 = 5 × 10-2 m/s2.

Question 23.
What do you understand by the phase and epoch of an SHM ?
Answer:
(1) Phase of simple harmonic motion (SHM) represents the state of oscillation of the particle performing SHM, i.e., it gives the displacement of the particle, its direction of motion from its equilibrium position and the number of oscillations completed.

The displacement of a particle in SHM is given by x = A sin (ωt + α). The angle (ωt + α) is called the phase angle or simply the phase of SHM. The SI unit of phase angle is the radian (symbol, rad).

(2) Epoch of simple harmonic motion (SHM) represents the initial phase of the particle performing SHM, i.e., it gives the displacement of the particle and its direction of motion at time t = 0.

If x0 is the initial position of the particle, i.e., the position at time t = 0, x0 = A sin α or α = sin-1 (x0/A). The angle α, therefore, determines the initial state of the particle. Hence, the angle α is the epoch or initial phase or phase constant of SHM.
[Note : The symbol for the unit radian is rad, not superscripted c.]

Question 25.
Solve the following.

Question 1.
The differential equation for a particle performing linear SHM is \(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) = – 4x. If the amplitude is 0.5 m and the initial phase is π/6 radian, obtain the expression for the displacement and find the velocity of the particle at x = 0.3 m.
Solution:
Data : A = 0.5 m, α = π/6 rad
(1) \(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) = -4x
Comparing this equation with the general equation \(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) = – ω2x, we get,
ω2 = 4 or ω = 2 rad/s
Now, x = A sin (ωt + α)
Substituting the values of A, ω and α, the expression for the displacement for the given SHM is
x = 0.5 sin (2t + π/6) m

(2) The velocity of the particle at x = 0.3 m is v = ± ω \(\sqrt{A^{2}-x^{2}}\)
= ± 2 \(\sqrt{(0.5)^{2}-(0.3)^{2}}\) = ± 0.8 m/s

Question 2.
The displacement of a particle performing linear SHM is given by x = 6 sin (3πt + \(\frac{5 \pi}{6}\)) metre. Find
the amplitude, frequency and the phase constant of the motion.
Solution :
Data : x = 6 sin (3πt + \(\frac{5 \pi}{6}\)) metre
Comparing this equation with x = A sin (ωt + α), we get:

  1. Amplitude, A = 6 m
  2. ω = 3π rad / s
    ∴ Frequency, f = \(\frac{\omega}{2 \pi}\) = \(\frac{3 \pi}{2 \pi}\) = 1.5 Hz 5%
  3. Phase constant, α = \(\frac{5 \pi}{6}\) rad

Question 3.
The equation of linear SHM is a: = 10 sin (4πt + \(\frac{1}{24}\)) cm. Find the amplitude, period and phase constant of the motion. Also, find the phase angle \(\frac{1}{24}\) second after the start.
Solution:
Data : x = 10 sin\(\left(4 \pi t+\frac{\pi}{6}\right)\) + cm, f = \(\frac{1}{24}\) s

(1) Comparing the given equation with x = A sin (ωt +α), we get,
A = 10 cm, ω = 4π rad/s, α = \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) rad

  1. Amplitude, A = 10 cm
  2. Period, T = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}\) = \(\frac{2 \pi}{4 \pi}\) = 0.5 s
  3. Phase constant, α = \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) rad

(2) Phase angle = (ωt + α) = 4πt + \(\frac{\pi}{6}\)
The phase angle \(\frac{1}{24}\) second after the start is obtained by substituting t = \(\frac{1}{24}\) in the above expression.
∴ Phase angle = 4πt + \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) = (4π × \(\frac{1}{24}\)) + \(\frac{\pi}{6}\)
= \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) + \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) = \(\frac{\pi}{3}\) rad

Question 4.
Describe the state of oscillation of a particle if the phase angle of SHM is rad.
Solution :
Data : θ = \(\frac{25 \pi}{4}\) rad
θ = \(\frac{25 \pi}{4}\) = 6π + \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) = 3(2π) rad + \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) rad
The first term indicates that the particle has completed 3 oscillations. The second term indicates that the displacement of the particle in the 4th oscillation is A sin \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) = + \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)A, where A is the amplitude of the SHM, and moving towards the positive extreme.

Question 5.
A particle in linear SHM is in its 5th oscillation. If its displacement at that instant is –\(\frac{1}{2}\) A and
is moving toward the mean position, determine its phase at that instant.
Solution :
Data : x = –\(\frac{1}{2}\) A, 5th oscillation
A sin θ1 = –\(\frac{1}{2}\)A ∴ θ1 = sin-1\(\left(-\frac{1}{2}\right)\) = π – \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) rad
As the particle is in its 5th oscillation, its phase is
θ = 2 × 2π + θ1 = 4π + (π – \(\frac{\pi}{6}\)) = 5π – \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) = \(\frac{29 \pi}{6}\) rad

Question 6.
The amplitude and periodic time of SHM are 5 cm and 6 s, respectively. What is the phase at a distance of 2.5 cm from the mean position?
Solution :
Data : A = 5 cm, T = 6 s, x = 2.5 cm
Since the particle starts from the mean position, its epoch, α = 0.
∴ The equation of motion is x = A sin ωt
∴ The required phase of the particle,
ω = sin-1\(\frac{x}{A}\)
= sin-1\(\frac{2.5}{5}\) = sin-1 \(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) rad

Question 26.
State the expressions for the displacement, velocity and acceleration of a particle performing linear SHM, starting from the mean position towards the positive extreme position. Hence, draw their graphs with respect to time. Draw your conclusions from the graphs.
OR
Represents graphically the displacement, velocity and acceleration against time for a particle performing linear SHM when it starts from the mean position.
Answer:
Consider a particle performing SHM, with amplitude A and period T = 2π/ω starting from the mean position towards the positive extreme position where co is the angular frequency. Its displacement from the mean position (x), velocity (v) and acceleration (a) at any instant are
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 31
as the initial phase α = 0

Using these expressions, the values of x, v and a at the end of every quarter of a period, starting from t = 0, are tabulated below.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 32
Using the values in the table we can plot graphs of displacement, velocity and acceleration with time.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 33
Conclusions :

  1. The displacement, velocity and acceleration of a particle performing linear SHM are periodic (harmonic) functions of time. For a particle starting at the mean position, the x-t and a-t graph are sine curves. The v-t graph is a cosine curve.
  2. There is a phase difference of \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) radians between x and v, and between v and a.
  3. There is a phase difference of n radians between x and a.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 34

Question 27.
State the expressions for the displacement, velocity and acceleration of a particle performing linear SHM, starting from the positive extreme position. Hence, draw their graphs with respect to time. Draw your conclusions from the graphs.
OR
A particle performs linear SHM starting from the positive extreme position. Plot the graphs of its displacement, velocity and acceleration against time.
Answer:
Consider a particle performing linear SHM with amplitude A and period T = 2π/ω, starting from the positive extreme position, where ω is the angular frequency. Its displacement from the mean position (x), velocity (v) and acceleration (a) at any instant (t) are
x = A cos ωt = A cos\(\left(\frac{2 \pi}{T} t\right)\) (∵ ω = \(\frac{2 \pi}{T}\))
v = – ωA sin ωt = -ωA sin \(\left(\frac{2 \pi}{T} t\right)\)
a = – ω2A sin ωt = -ω2A cos \(\left(\frac{2 \pi}{T} t\right)\)

Using these expressions, the values of x, v and a at the end of every quarter of a period, starting from t = 0, are tabulated below.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 35
Using these values, we can plot graphs showing the variation of displacement, velocity and acceleration with time.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 36
Conclusions :

  1. The displacement, velocity and acceleration of a particle performing linear SHM are periodic (harmonic) functions of time. For a particle starting from an extreme position, the x-t and a-t graphs are cosine curves; the v-t graph is a sine curve.
  2. There is a phase difference of \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) radians between x and v, and between v and a.
  3. There is a phase difference of π radians between x and a.

Explanations :
(1) v-t graph : It is a sine curve, i.e., the velocity is a periodic (harmonic) function of time which repeats after a phase of 2π rad. There is a phase difference of π/2 rad between a and v.

v is minimum (equal to zero) at the extreme positions (i.e., at x = ± A) and v is maximum ( = ± ωA) at the mean position (x = 0).

(2) a-t graph : It is a cosine curve, i.e., the acceleration is a periodic (harmonic) function of time which repeats after a phase of 2π rad. There is a phase difference of π rad between v and a. a is minimum (equal to zero) at the mean position (x = 0) and a is maximum ( = \(\mp\)ω2A) at the extreme positions (x = ± A).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 37

Question 28.
Discuss analytically the composition of two SHMs of the same period and parallel to each other (along the same path). Find the resultant amplitude when the phase difference is
(1) zero
(2) \(\frac{\pi}{3}\) rad
(3) \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) rad
(4) π rad.
Answer:
Let a particle be subjected to two parallel linear SHMs of the same period along the same path and the same mean position, represented by
x1 = A1 sin (ωt + α) and x2 = A2 sin (ωt + β),
where A1 and A2 are the amplitudes, and α and β are the initial phases of the two SHMs.

According to the principle of superposition, the displacement of the particle at any instant t is the algebraic sum x = x1 + x2.
∴ x = A1 sin (ωt + α) + A2 sin (ωt + β)
= A1 sin ωt cos α + A1 cos ωt sin α + A2 cos ωt sin β
= (A1 cos α + A2 cos β) sin ωt + (A1 sin α + A2sin β) cos ωt
Let A1 cos α + A2 cos β = R cos δ …. (1)
and A1 sin α + A2 sin β = R sin δ …. (2)
∴ x = R cos δ sin ωt + R sin δ cos ωt
∴ x = R cos(ωt + δ) ….. (3)

Equation (3), which gives the displacement of the particle, shows that the resultant motion is also simple harmonic, along the same path as the SHMs superposed, with the same mean position, and amplitude R and initial phase δ but having the same period as the individual SHMs.

Amplitude R of the resultant motion : The resultant amplitude R is found by squaring and adding Eqs. (1) and (2).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 38
Initial phase S of the resultant motion : The initial phase of the resultant motion is found by dividing Eq. (2) by Eq. (1).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 39

Notes :

  1. Since the displacements due to the super-posed linear SHMs are along the same path, their vector sum can be replaced by the algebraic sum.
  2. To determine δ uniquely, we need to know both sin δ and cos δ.

Question 29.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
Two parallel SHMs are given by x1 = 20 sin (8πt) cm and x2 = 10 sin (8πt + π/2) cm. Find the amplitude and the epoch of the resultant SHM.
Solution :
Data : x1 = 20 sin (8πt) cm = A1 sin (ωt + α), x2 = 10 sin (8πt + π/2) cm = A2 sin (ωt + β)
∴ A1 = 20 cm, A2 = 10 cm, α = 0, β = π/2
(1) Resultant amplitude,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 40

(2) Initial phase of resultant SHM,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 41

Question 2.
The displacement of a particle performing SHM is given by x = [5 sin πt + 12 sin \(\left(\pi t+\frac{\pi}{2}\right)\) cm. Determine the amplitude, period and initial phase of the motion.
Solution :
Data : x = [5 sin πt + 12 sin \(\left(\pi t+\frac{\pi}{2}\right)\)] cm
The given expression for displacement may be written as the superposition of two parallel SHMs of the same period as x = x1 + x2, where x1 = 5 sin πt cm = A1 sin (ωt + α) and
x2 = 12 sin \(\left(\pi t+\frac{\pi}{2}\right)\) cm = A2 sin (ωt + β)
∴ A1 = 5 cm, A2 = 12 cm, ω = π rad/s, α = 0, β = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) rad.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 42

Question 3.
An SHM is given by the equation x = [8 sin (4πt) + 6 cos (4πt)] cm. Find its
(1) amplitude
(2) initial phase
(3) period
(4) frequency.
Solution:
Data : x = [8 sin (4πt) + 6 cos (4πt)] cm
x = 8 sin (4πt) + 6 cos (4πt)
= 8 sin (4πt) + 6 sin \(\left(4 \pi t+\frac{\pi}{2}\right)\)
Thus, x is the superposition of two parallel SHMs of the same period : x = x1 + x2, where
x1 = 8 sin (4πt) cm = A1 sin (ωt + α) and
x2 = 6 sin \(\left(4 \pi t+\frac{\pi}{2}\right)\) = A2 sin (ωt + β)
∴ A1 = 8 cm, A2 = 6cm, ω = 4π rad/s, α = 0,
β = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) rad
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 43

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations

Question 30.
Show that the total energy of a particle performing linear SHM is directly proportional to
(1) the square of the amplitude
(2) the square of the frequency.
Answer:
For a particle of mass m executing SHM with angular frequency ω and amplitude A, its kinetic and potential energies are respectively,
KE = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω2(A2 – x2) … (1)
and PE = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω2x2 … (2)
Then, the total energy,
E = PE + KE
= \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω2x2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω2(A2 – x2)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω2A2 …. (3)
Therefore, total energy of the particle is

  1. directly proportional to the mass (E ∝ m),
  2. directly proportional to the square of the amplitude (E ∝ A2)
  3. proportional to the square of the frequency
    (E ∝f2), as f = ω/2π

Question 31.
State the expression for the total energy of SHM in terms of acceleration.
Answer:
The total energy of a particle of mass m performing SHM with angular frequency ω, E = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω2A2
The maximum acceleration of the particle, amax = ω2A2
E = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mAamax is the required expression.

Question 32.
State the expressions for the kinetic energy and potential energy of a particle performing SHM. Find their values at
(i) an extreme position
(ii) the mean position.
Using the expressions for the kinetic energy and potential energy of a particle in simple harmonic motion at any position, show that
(i) at the mean position, total energy = kinetic energy
(ii) at an extreme position, total energy = potential energy.
Answer:
For a particle of mass m executing SHM with force constant k, amplitude A and angular frequency ω = \(\sqrt{k / m}\), its kinetic and potential energies are respectively,
KE = \(\frac{1}{2}\)k(A2 – x2) and
PE = \(\frac{1}{2}\)kx2
and total energy, E = \(\frac{1}{2}\)kA2
(i) At the mean position, x = 0,
KE = \(\frac{1}{2}\)kA2 = E and PE = 0

(ii) At an extreme position, x = ±A, KE = 0 and PE = \(\frac{1}{2}\)kA2 = E

That is, the energy transfers back and forth between kinetic energy and potential energy, while the total mechanical energy of the oscillating particle remains constant. The total energy is entirely kinetic energy at the mean position and entirely potential energy at the extremes.

Question 33.
State the expressions for the kinetic energy (KE) and potential energy (PE) at a displacement x for a particle performing linear SHM. Find
(i) the displacement at which KE is equal to PE
(ii) the KE and PE when the particle is halfway to a extreme position.
Answer:
For a particle of mass m executing SHM with force constant k, amplitude A and angular frequency ω = \(\sqrt{k / m}\), its kinetic and potential energies are respectively,
KE = \(\frac{1}{2}\)E (A2 – x2) and
PE = \(\frac{1}{2}\)kx2
and total energy, E = \(\frac{1}{2}\)kA2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 44
∴ At x = ±\(\frac{A}{2}\), the energy is 25% potential energy and 75% kinetic energy.

Question 34.
The maximum potential energy (PE) of a particle in SHM is 2 × 10-4 J. What will be the PE of the particle when its displacement from the mean position is half the amplitude of SHM ?
Answer:
(PE)max = \(\frac{1}{2}\)kA2, PE = \(\frac{1}{2}\)kx2
∴ PE = (PE)max \(\left(\frac{x}{A}\right)^{2}\) = 2 × 10-4J × \(\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^{2}\)
= 5 × 10-5 J is the required answer.

Question 35.
A particle performs linear SHM of amplitude 10 cm. At what displacement of the particle from its mean position will the potential energy (PE) of the particle be 1 % of the maximum PE ?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 45

Question 36.
Represent graphically the variations of KE, PE and TE of a particle performing linear SHM with respect to its displacement.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 46

Question 37.
Represent graphically the variation of potential energy, kinetic energy and total energy of a particle performing SHM with time.
Answer:
Consider a particle performing SHM, with amplitude A and period T = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}\) starting from the mean position towards the positive extreme position; ω = \(\sqrt{\frac{k}{m}}\) is the appropriate constant related to the system. The total energy of the particle is E = \(\frac{1}{2}\)kA2. Its displacement (x), potential energy (PE) and kinetic energy (KE) at any instant are given by
x = A sin ωt
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 47
Using the values in the table, we can plot graphs of PE, KE and total energy with times as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 48

Question 38.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
A particle of mass 10 g is performing SHM. Its kinetic energies are 4.7 J and 4.6 J when the displacements are 4 cm and 6 cm, respectively. Compute the period of oscillation.
Answer:
Data : m = 0.01 kg, KE1 = 4.7 J, x1 = 4 × 10-2 m, KE2 = 4.6 J, x2 = 6 × 10-2 m
Since the total energy of a particle in SHM is constant,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 49

Question 2.
The total energy of a particle of mass 100 grams performing SHM is 0.2 J. Find its maximum velocity and period if the amplitude is 2\(\sqrt{2}\) cm.
Solution :
Data : m = 100 g = 0.1 kg, E = 0.2 J,
A = 2\(\sqrt{2}\) cm = 2\(\sqrt{2}\) × 10-2 m
(i) The total energy,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 50

Question 3.
An object of mass 0.5 kg performs SHM with force constant 10 N/m and amplitude 3 cm.
(i) What is the total energy of the object?
(ii) What is its maximum speed ?
(iii) What is its speed at x = 2 cm?
(iv) What are its kinetic and potential energies at x = 2 cm ?
Solution :
Data : m = 0.5 kg, A: = 10 N/m,
A = 3 cm = 3 × 10-2m, x = 2 cm = 2 × 10-2m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 51

Question 4.
When the displacement in SHM is one-third of the amplitude, what fraction of the total energy is potential and what fraction is kinetic?
Solution :
Data : x = A/3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 52
Therefore, \(\frac{1}{9}\) th of the total energy is potential and \(\frac{8}{9}\)th of the total energy is kinetic.

Question 5.
A particle executes SHM with a period of 8 s. Find the time in which half the total energy is potential.
Solution :
Data : T = 8 s, PE = \(\frac{1}{2}\)E
ω = \(\frac{2 \pi}{T}\) = \(\frac{2 \pi}{8}\) = \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) rad/s
The total energy, E = \(\frac{1}{2}\)kA2 and the potential
energy = \(\frac{1}{2}\)kx2
Therefore, from the data,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 53
Assuming that the particle starts from the mean position, the equation of motion is
x = A sin ωt
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 54
Therefore, in one oscillation, the particle’s potential energy is half the total energy 1 s, 3 s, 5 s and 7 s after passing through the mean position.

Question 39.
Define practical simple pendulum.
Answer:
Practical simple pendulum is defined as a small heavy sphere, called the bob, suspended by a light and inextensible string from a rigid support.

Question 40.
Under what conditions can we consider the oscillations of a simple pendulum to be linear simple harmonic?
Answer:
The oscillations of a simple pendulum are approximately linear simple harmonic only if

  1. the amplitude of oscillation is very small compared to its length
  2. the oscillations are in a single vertical plane.

Question 41.
What is the effect of mass and amplitude on the period of a simple pendulum ?
Answer:
The period of a simple pendulum does not depend on the mass or material of the bob of the pendulum. This is the law of mass.
The period of a simple pendulum does not depend on the amplitude of oscillations, provided that the amplitude is small. This is the law of isochronism. If the amplitude is large, the motion is periodic but not simple harmonic.

Question 42.
From the definition of linear SHM, derive an expression for the angular frequency of a body performing linear SHM.
Answer:
When a body of mass m performs linear SHM, the restoring force on it is always directed towards the mean position and its magnitude is directly proportional to the magnitude of the displacement of the body from the mean position. Thus, if \(\vec{F}\) is the force acting on the body when its displacement from the mean position is \(\vec{x}\),
\(\vec{F}\) = m\(\vec{a}\) = – kx\(\vec{x}\)
where the constant k, the force per unit displacement, is called the force constant.
Let \(\frac{k}{m}\) = ω2, a constant.
∴ Acceleration, a = –\(\frac{k}{m}\) = – ω2x
∴ The angular frequency,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 55

Question 43.
A simple pendulum is set into oscillations in a uniformly travelling car along a horizontal road. What happens to its period if the car takes a sudden turn towards the left ?
Answer:
The equilibrium position of the string makes an angle θ = tan-1(ac/g) with the vertical due to the centrifugal force to the right.
The centripetal acceleration, ac, is horizontal and towards the left. The acceleration due to gravity is vertically downward.
∴ geff = \(\sqrt{g^{2}+a_{\mathrm{c}}^{2}}\)
so that the period of oscillation T = \(2 \pi \sqrt{L / g_{\text {eff }}}\)
∴ As the car takes a sudden left turn, the period of oscillation decreases.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations

Question 44.
Define a seconds pendulum. Find an expression for its length at a given place. Show that the length of a seconds pendulum has a fixed value at a given place.
Answer:
(1) Seconds pendulum: A simple pendulum of period two seconds is called a seconds pendulum.

(2) The period of a simple pendulum is
T = \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{L}{g}}\)
For a seconds pendulum, T = 2s.
∴ 2 = \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{L}{g}}\) ∴ L = \(\frac{g}{\pi^{2}}\)
This expression gives the length of the seconds pendulum at a place where acceleration due to gravity is g.

(3) At a given place, the value of g is constant.
∴ L = g/π2 = a fixed value, at a given place.

[Note : Because the effective gravitational acceleration varies from place to place, the length of a seconds pendulum should be changed in direct proportion. Since the effective gravitational acceleration increases from the equator to the poles, so should the length of a seconds pendulum be increased.]

Question 45.
Two simple pendulums have lengths in the ratio 1 : 9. What is the ratio of their periods at a given place ?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 56

Question 46.
If the length of a seconds pendulum is doubled, what will be the new period?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 57

Question 47.
Distinguish between a simple pendulum and a conical pendulum.
Answer:

Simple pendulum Conical pendulum
1. The oscillations of the bob are in a vertical plane. 1. The bob performs UCM in a horizontal plane and the string traces out a cone of constant semivertical angle.
2. The energy of the bob transfers back and forth between kinetic energy and potential energy, while its total mech­anical energy remains con­stant. 2. The gravitational PE of the bob being constant may be taken to be zero. The total mechanical energy remains constant and is entirely kin­etic.
3. The period depends on the 3. length of the string and the acceleration due to gravity.
T =2π\(\sqrt{L / g}\)
3. The period depends on the length of the string, the ac­celeration due to gravity and cosine of the semiverti­cal angle.
T =2π\(\sqrt{L \cos \theta / g}\)

Question 48.
Solve the following.

Question 1.
A simple pendulum of length 1 m has a bob of mass 10 g and oscillates freely with an amplitude of 2 cm. Find its potential energy at the extreme position. [g = 9.8 m/s2]
Solution :
Data : L = 1 m, m = 10 g = 10 × 10-3 kg = 10-2 kg, g = 9.8 m/s2, A = 2 cm = 0.02 m
Period of a simple pendulum, T = \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{L}{g}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 58

Question 2.
The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum increases by 20% when the length of the pendulum is increased by 44 cm. Find its
(i) initial length
(ii) initial period of oscillation at a place where g is 9.8 m/s2.
Solution:
Let T and L be the initial period and length of the pendulum. Let T1 and L1 be the final period and length.
Data : T1 = T + 0.2 T = 1.2 T, L1 = L + 0.44 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 59
Squaring and cross-multiplying, we get,
L + 0.44 = 1.44 L
∴ 0. 44 L = 0.44
∴ L = \(\frac{0.44}{0.44}\) = 1 m
∴ T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{L}{g}}\) = 2 × 3.142 × \(\sqrt{\frac{1}{9.8}}\)
= 2.007 s

Question 3.
Calculate the length of a seconds pendulum at a place where g = 9.81 m/s2.
Answer:
Data : T = 2 s, g = 9.81 m/s2
Period of a simple pendulum, T = \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{L}{g}}\)
For a seconds pendulum, 2 = \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{L}{g}}\)
∴ The length of the seconds pendulum,
L = \(\frac{g}{\pi^{2}}\) = \(\frac{9.81}{(3.142)^{2}}\) = 0.9937

Question 4.
A clock regulated by a seconds pendulum keeps correct time. During summer the length of the pendulum increases to 1.01 m. How much will the clock gain or lose in one day ? [g = 9.8 m/s2]
Solution:
Data: L = 1.01 m, g = 9.8 m/s2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 60
The period of a seconds pendulum is 2 seconds. Hence, the given pendulum clock will lose 0.017 s in 2.017 s during summer.
∴ Time lost in 24 hours
= \(\frac{24 \times 3600 \times 0.017}{2.017}\)s = 728.1 s
The given pendulum clock will lose 728.1 seconds per day during summer.

Question 5.
A small drop of mercury oscillates simple harmonically inside a watch glass whose radius of curvature is 2.5 m. Find the period of the motion. [g = 9.8m/s2]
Solution :
Data : R = 2.5 m, g = 9.8 m/s2
Consider a small drop of mercury on a watch glass of radius of curvature R.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 61
Away from its equilibrium position O, its weight \(m \vec{g}\) is resolved into two perpendicular components : mg cos θ normal to the concave surface and mg sin θ tangential to the surface, mg cos θ is balanced by the normal reaction (\(\vec{N}\)) of the surface while mg sin θ constitutes the restoring force that brings the drop back to O. If θ is small and in radian,
restoring force, F = ma = – mg sin θ
= – mg θ
= -mg\(\frac{x}{R}\)
∴ The acceleration per unit displacement, |\(\frac{a}{x}\)| = \(\frac{g}{R}\)
∴ The period of the motion, T = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\sqrt{|a / x|}}\) = \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{R}{g}}\)
Data : R = 2.5 m, g = 9.8 m/s2
∴ The period of oscillation is
T = 2 × 3.142\(\sqrt{\frac{2.5}{9.8}}\) = 6.284 × 0.5051 = 3.174 s.

Question 49.
Explain angular or torsional oscillations.
Hence obtain the differential equation of the motion.
Answer:
Suppose a disc is suspended from its centre by a wire or a twistless thread such that the disc remains horizontal, as shown in below figure. The rest position of
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 62
the disc is marked by a reference line. When the disc is rotated in the horizontal plane by a small angular displacement 0 = 0m from its rest position (θ = θm), the suspension wire is twisted. When the disc is released, it oscillates about the rest position in angular or torsional oscillation with angular amplitude θm.

The device is called a torsional pendulum and the springiness or elasticity of the motion is associated with the twisting of the suspension wire. The twist in either direction stores potential energy in the wire and provides an alternating restoring torque, opposite in direction to the angular displacement. The motion is governed by this torque.

If the magnitude of the restoring torque (τ) is proportional to the angular displacement (θ), τ ∝ (-θ) or τ = – cθ … (1)
where the constant of proportionality c is called the torsion constant, that depends on the length, diameter and material of the suspension wire. In this case, the oscillations will be simple harmonic.

Let I be the moment of inertia (MI) of the oscillating disc.
Torque = MI × angular acceleration
τ = Iα = I\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\)
Hence, from EQ. (1),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 63
This is the differential equation of angular SHM.
[Note : Angular displacement being a dimensionless quantity, the SI unit of torsion constant is the same as that of torque = the newton-metre (N-m)]

Question 50.
Define angular SHM. State the differential equation of angular SHM. Hence derive an expression for the period of angular SHM in terms of
(i) the torsion constant
(ii) the angular acceleration.
Answer:
Definition : Angular SHM is defined as the oscillatory motion of a body in which the restoring torque responsible for angular acceleration is directly proportional to the angular displacement and its direction is opposite to that of angular displacement.
The differential equation of angular SHM is
I\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) + c θ = 0 … (1)
where I = moment of inertia of the
where I = moment of inertia of the oscillating body,
\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) = angular acceleration of the body when its angular displacement is θ, and c = torsion constant of the suspension wire,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 64

Question 51.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
A bar magnet of moment 10 A.m2 is suspended such that it can rotate freely in a horizontal plane. The horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field at the place is 39 μT. Calculate the magnitude of the torque when its angular displacement with respect to the direction of the field is 10°.
Solution :
Data : μ = 10 A.m2, Bh = 3.9 × 10-5 T, θ = 10°
The magnitude of the torque is τ = – μBh sin θ = (10)(3.9 × 10-5) sin 10°
= (3.9 × 10-4)(0.1736) = 6.770 × 10-5 N.m

Question 2.
A disc, of radius 12 cm and mass 250 g, is suspended horizontally by a long wire at its centre. Its period T1 of angular SHM is measured to be 8.43 s. An irregularly shaped object X is then hung from the same wire and its period T2 is found to be 4.76 s. What is the rotational inertia of object X about its suspension axis ?
Solution:
Data : R = 0.12 m, M = 0.25 kg, T, = 8.43 s, T2 = 4.76 s
The MI of the disc about the rotation axis (perpendicular through its centre) is = \(\frac{1}{2}\) MR2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 65

Question 52.
What is meant by damped oscillations ? Draw a neat, labelled diagram of a damped spring-and-block oscillator.
Answer:
Oscillations of gradually decreasing amplitude are called damped oscillations. Oscillations of a system in the presence of dissipative frictional forces are damped.

The dissipative damping force removes energy from the system which requires external periodic force to continue.

Below Figure shows a spring-and-block oscillator attached with a light vane that moves in a fluid with viscosity. When the system is set into oscillation, the amplitude decreases for each oscillation due to the viscous drag on the vane.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 66

Question 53.
Write the differential equation of motion for an oscillator in the presence of a damping force directly proportional to the velocity. Under what condition is the motion oscillatory? Hence, discuss the frequency, amplitude and energy of the damped oscillations.
OR
Oscillations in the presence of a force proportional to the velocity are periodic but not simple harmonic. Explain.
OR
The presence of a damping force changes the character of a simple harmonic motion. Explain this qualitatively.
Answer:
Consider the oscillations of a body in the presence of a dissipative frictional force such as viscous drag or fluid friction. Such a force is proportional to the velocity of the body and is in a direction opposite to that of the velocity. If the fluid flow past the body is streamline, then by Stokes’ law, the resistive force is
f = -βv = -β\(\frac{d x}{d t}\)… (1)
where v = \(\frac{d x}{d t}\) is the velocity and β is a positive constant of proportionality called the damping constant.
The linear restoring force on the oscillator is F = -kx … (2)
where k is the force constant. If m is the mass of the oscillator and its acceleration is \(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 67
where ω2 = \(\frac{k}{m}\). Equation (3) is the differential equation of the oscillator in presence of a resistive force directly proportional to the velocity.
The solution of the above differential equation obtained using standard mathematical technique is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 68
where constants A and φ can be determined in the usual way from the initial conditions. In writing this solution, it is assumed β is less than 2mω, i.e., the resistive term is relatively small.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 69
In Eq. (4),
(1) the harmonic term, cos \(\left[\sqrt{\omega^{2}-\frac{\beta^{2}}{2 m}} t+\phi\right]\), that the motion is oscillatory with angular frequency ω’ = \(\sqrt{\omega^{2}-\frac{\beta^{2}}{4 m^{2}}}\) if β is less than 2mω. The harmonic term can also be written in terms of a sine function with the same ω’.
(2) A’ = Ae-(β/2m)t is the amplitude of the oscillation. The exponential factor e-(β/2m)t steadily decreases the amplitude of the motion, making it approach zero for large t. Hence, the motion is said to be damped oscillation or damped harmonic motion.
(3) the total energy, \(\frac{1}{2}\)m(ω’)2, decays exponentially with time as the amplitude decreases. The energy is dissipated in the form of heat by the damping force.
(4) the period of the damped oscillations is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 70
∴ T is greater than 2π/ω.
Thus, the motion is periodic but not simple harmonic because the amplitude steadily decreases.

Notes :

  1. The energy decreases faster than the amplitude.
  2. For β < 2mω, the larger the value of β, the faster the amplitude decreases. The condition is called underdamping.
  3. When β = 2mω = \(2 \sqrt{k m}\) km, ω’ = 0, i.e., the system no longer oscillates. When displaced and released, it returns to its equilibrium position without oscillation. The condition is called critical damping.
  4. If β > 2mω, the system is said to overdamped or dead beat. Again, the system does not oscillate but returns to equilibrium position more slowly than for critical damping.
  5. All practical cases of so called free oscillations, such as that of a simple pendulum or a tuning fork, are damped. We also encounter damped oscillations in electrical circuits containing inductance, capacitance and resistance due to resistive losses. While in many cases it is desirable to minimize damping, in ammeters and voltmeters the oscillations of the pointer are designed to be dead beat.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations

Question 54.
Solve the following.

Question 1.
For a damped spring-and-block oscillator, the mass of the block is 0.2 kg, the spring constant is 90 N/m and the damping constant is 0.06 kg/s. Calculate
(i) the period of oscillation
(ii) the time taken for its amplitude to become half its initial value.
Solution :
Data : m = 0.2 kg, k = 90 N/m, β = 0.06 kg/s
(i) The period of the damped oscillation is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 71
(ii) The amplitude of the damped oscillation is
A’ = Ae-(β/2m)t
If the amplitude becomes half the initial amplitude A at time f,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 72

Question 2.
A steel sphere of mass 0.02 kg attains a terminal speed vi = 0.5 m/s when dropped into a tall cylinder of oil. The same sphere is then attached to the free end of an ideal vertical spring of spring constant 8 N/m. The sphere is immersed in the same oil and set into vertical oscillation. Find
(i) the damping constant
(ii) the angular frequency of the damped SHM.
(iii) Hence, write the equation for displacement of the damped SHM as a function of time, assuming that the initial amplitude is 10 cm. [g = 10 m/s2]
Solution :
Data : m = 0.02 kg, vt = 0.5 m/s, k = 8 N/m,
A = 10 cm = 0.1 m, g = 10 m/s2
When the sphere falls with terminal velocity in oil, the resultant force on it is zero. Therefore, the
The equation of motion of the damped oscillation is resistive force and its weight are equal in magnitude and opposite in direction.
∴ |Fr| = βvt = mg
where β is the damping constant.
∴ β = \(\frac{m g}{v_{\mathrm{t}}}\) = \(\frac{0.02 \times 10}{0.5}\) = 0.4 kg/s
The angular frequency of the damped oscillation in oil,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 73
The equation of motion of the damped oscillation is
x = Ae(β/2m)t cos(w’t + φ)
∴ x = (0.1 m)e-(0.4/004)t cos (17.32t + φ)
x = (0.1 m) e-10t cos(17.32t + φ)

Question 55.
Explain
(1) free vibrations
(2) forced vibrations.
Answer:
(1) Free vibrations : A body capable of vibrations is said to perform free vibrations when it is disturbed from its equilibrium position and left to itself.

In the absence of dissipative forces such as friction due to surrounding air and internal forces, the total energy and hence the amplitude of vibrations of the body remains constant. The frequencies of the free vibrations of a body are called its natural frequencies and depend on the body itself.

In the absence of a maintaining force, in practice, the total energy and hence the amplitude decreases due to dissipative forces and the vibration is said to be damped. The frequency of damped vibrations is less than the natural frequency.

(2) Forced vibrations : The vibrations of a body in response to an external periodic force are called forced vibrations.

The external force supplies the necessary energy to make up for the dissipative losses. The frequency of the forced vibrations is equal to the frequency of the external periodic force.

The amplitude of the forced vibrations depends upon the mass of the vibrating body, the amplitude of the external force, the difference between the natural frequency and the frequency of the periodic force, and the extent of damping.

Question 56.
Distinguish between free vibrations and forced vibrations.
Answer:

Free vibrations Forced vibrations
1. Free vibrations are pro­duced when a body is disturbed from its equilibrium position and released.
Ex. Simple pendulum.
1. Forced vibrations are pro­duced by an external periodic force.
Ex. Musical instrument having a sounding board.
2. The frequency of free vibra­tions depends on the body and is called its natural frequency. 2. The frequency of forced vi­brations is equal to that of the external periodic force.
3. The energy of the body remains constant only in the absence of friction, air resis­tance, etc. 3. The energy of the body is maintained constant by the external periodic force.

Question 57.
Explain resonance.
Answer:
Resonance : If a body is made to vibrate by an external periodic force, whose frequency is equal to the natural frequency (or nearly so) of the body, the body vibrates with maximum amplitude. This phenomenon is called resonance.

The corresponding frequency is called the resonant frequency.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 74
For low damping, the amplitude of vibrations has a sharp maximum at resonance, as shown. The flatter curve without a pronounced maximum is for high damping.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 75
Suppose several pendulums-A, B, C, D and E are coupled to a heavier pendulum Z, by suspending them from a stretched cord, and that only the length of C is the same as that of Z. When Z is set into oscillation perpendicular to the cord PQ, the others are also set into forced oscillations in parallel vertical planes. Their amplitudes vary but those of A, B, D and E never become very large because the frequency of Z is not the same as the natural frequency of any of them. On the other hand, C will be in resonant oscillation and its amplitude will be large.

Question 58.
The differential equation of SHM for a seconds pendulum is
(A) \(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) + x = 0
(B) \(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) + πx = 0
(C) \(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) + 4πx = 0
(D) \(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) + π2x = 0.
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) + π2x = 0.

Question 59.
The phase change of a particle performing SHM between successive passages through the mean position is
(A) 2π rad
(B) π rad
(C) \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) rad
(D) \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) rad.
Answer:
(B) π rad

Question 60.
If the equation of motion of a particle performing SHM is x = 0.028 cos (2.8πt + π) (all quantities in SI units), the frequency of the motion is
(A) 0.7 Hz
(B) 1.4 Hz
(C) 2.8 Hz
(D) 14 Hz.
Answer:
(B) 1.4 Hz

Question 61.
A spring-and-block system constitutes a simple harmonic oscillator. To double the frequency of oscillation, the mass of the block must be ….. the initial mass.
(A) \(\frac{1}{4}\) times
(B) half
(C) double
(D) 4 times
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{1}{4}\) times

Question 62.
A horizontal spring-and-block system consists of a block of mass 1 kg, resting on a frictionless surface, and an ideal spring. A force of 10 N is required to compress the spring by 10 cm. The spring constant of the spring is
(A) 100 N.m-1
(B) 10N.m-1
(C) N.m-1
(D) 0.1 N.m-1.
Answer:
(C) N.m-1

Question 63.
A vertical spring-and-block system has a block of mass 10 g and oscillates with a period 1 s. The period of SHM of a block of mass 90 g, suspended from the same spring, is
(A) \(\frac{1}{9}\)s
(B) \(\frac{1}{3}\)s
(C) 3 s
(D) 9 s.
Answer:
(C) 3 s

Question 64.
A simple harmonic oscillator has an amplitude A and period T. The time required by the oscillator to cover the distance from x = A to x = \(\frac{A}{2}\) is
(A) \(\frac{T}{2}\)
(B) \(\frac{T}{3}\)
(C) \(\frac{T}{4}\)
(D) \(\frac{T}{6}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{T}{6}\)

Question 65.
The period of SHM of a particle with maximum velocity 50 cm/s and maximum acceleration 10 cm/s2 is
(A) 31.42 s
(B) 6.284 s
(C) 3.142 s
(D) 0.3142 s.
Answer:
(C) 3.142 s

Question 66.
A particle executing SHM of amplitude 5 cm has an acceleration of 27 cm/s2 when it is 3 cm from the mean position. Its maximum velocity is
(A) 15 cm/s
(B) 30 cm/s
(C) 45 cm/s
(D) 60 cm/s.
Answer:
(A) 15 cm/s

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations

Question 67.
A particle performs linear SHM with a period of 6 s, starting from the positive extremity. At time t = 7 s, its displacement is 3 cm. The amplitude of the motion is
(A) 4 cm
(B) 6 cm
(C) 8 cm
(D) 12 cm.
Answer:
(B) 6 cm

Question 68.
A spring-and-block oscillator with an ideal spring of force constant 180 N/m oscillates with a frequency of 6 Hz. The mass of the block is, approximately,
(A) \(\frac{1}{8}\) kg
(B) \(\frac{1}{4}\) kg
(C) 4 kg
(D) 8 kg.
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{1}{8}\) kg

Question 69.
A particle executing linear SHM has velocities v1 and v2 at distances x1 and x2, respectively, from the mean position. The angular velocity of the particle is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 76
Answer:
(B) \(\sqrt{\frac{v_{2}^{2}-v_{1}^{2}}{x_{1}^{2}-x_{2}^{2}}}\)

Question 70.
A particle executes linear SHM with period 12 s. To traverse a distance equal to half its amplitude from the equilibrium position, it takes
(A) 6s
(B) 4s
(C) 2s
(D) 1s.
Answer:
(D) 1s

Question 71.
The minimum time taken by a particle in SHM with period T to go from an extreme position to a point half way to the equilibrium position is
A. \(\frac{T}{12}\)
B. \(\frac{T}{8}\)
C. \(\frac{T}{6}\)
D. \(\frac{T}{4}\)
Answer:
C. \(\frac{T}{6}\)

Question 72.
In simple harmonic motion, the acceleration of a particle is zero when its
(A) velocity is zero
(B) displacement is zero
(C) both velocity and displacement are zero
(D) both velocity and displacement are maximum.
Answer:
(B) displacement is zero

Question 73.
The acceleration of a particle performing SHM is 3m/s2 at a distance of 3 cm from the mean position.
The periodic time of the motion is
(A) 0.02 π s
(B) 0.04 π s
(C) 0.2 π s
(D) 2 π s.
Answer:
(C) 0.2 π s

Question 74.
A particle performing linear SHM with a frequency n is confined within limits x = ±A. Midway between an extremity and the equilibrium position, its speed is
(A) \(\sqrt{6}\)nA
(B) \(\sqrt{3}\)πnA
(C) \(\sqrt{6}\)πnA
(D) \(\sqrt{12}\)πnA
Answer:
(B) \(\sqrt{3}\)πnA

Question 75.
The total energy of a particle executing SHM is proportional to
(A) the frequency of oscillation
(B) the square of the amplitude of motion
(C) the velocity at the equilibrium position
(D) the displacement from the equilibrium position.
Answer:
(B) the square of the amplitude of motion

Question 76.
Two spring-and-block oscillators oscillate harmonically with the same amplitude and a constant phase difference of 90°. Their maximum velocities are v and v + x. The value of x is
(A) 0
(B) \(\frac{v}{3}\)
(C) 2
(D) \(\frac{v}{\sqrt{2}}\).
Answer:
(A) 0

Question 77.
If the length of a simple pendulum is increased to 4 times its initial length, its frequency of oscillation will
(A) reduce to half its initial frequency
(B) increase to twice its initial frequency
(C) reduce to \(\frac{1}{4}\) th its initial frequency
(D) increase to 4 times its initial frequency.
Answer:
(A) reduce to half its initial frequency

Question 78.
If the length of a simple pendulum is doubled keeping its amplitude constant, its energy will be
(A) unchanged
(B) doubled
(C) halved
(D) increased to four times the initial energy.
Answer:
(C) halved

Question 79.
The amplitude of oscillations of a simple pendulum of period T and length L is increased by 5%. The new period of the pendulum will be
(A) T/8
(B) T/4
(C) T/2
(D) T.
Answer:
(D) T.

Question 80.
In 20 s, two simple pendulums, P and Q, complete 9 and 7 oscillations, respectively, on the Earth. On the
Moon, where the acceleration due to gravity is \(\frac{1}{6}\)th that on the Earth, their periods are in the ratio (A) 8 : 1
(B) 9 : 7
(C) 7 : 9
(D) 3 : 14.
Answer:
(C) 7 : 9

Question 81.
If T is the time period of a simple pendulum in an elevator at rest, its time period in a freely falling elevator will be
(A) \(\frac{T}{\sqrt{2}}\)
(B) \(\sqrt{2}\)T
(C) 2T
(D) infinite.
Answer:
(D) infinite.

Question 82.
A seconds pendulum is suspended in an elevator moving with a constant speed in the downward direction. The periodic time (T) of that pendulum is
(A) less than two seconds
(B) equal to two seconds
(C) greater than two seconds
(D) very much greater than two seconds.
Answer:
(B) equal to two seconds

Question 83.
The total work done by a restoring force in simple harmonic motion of amplitude A and angular frequency ω, in one oscillation is
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\)mA2ω2
(B) zero
(C) mA2ω2
(D) \(\frac{1}{2}\)mAω.
Answer:
(B) zero

Question 84.
Two particles perform linear simple harmonic motion along the same path of length 2A and period T as shown in the graph below. The phase difference between them is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Oscillations Important Questions 77
(A) zero rad
(B) \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) rad
(C) \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) rad
(D) \(\frac{3 \pi}{4}\) rad
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) rad

Question 85.
The average displacement over a period of SHM is
(A = amplitude of SHM)
(A) 0
(B) A
(C) 2A
(D) 4A.
Answer:
(A) 0

Question 86.
Two springs of force constants k1 and k2(k1 > k2) are stretched by the same force. If W1 and W2 be the work done in stretching the springs, then
(A) W1 = W2
(B) W1 < W2
(C) W1 > W2
(D) W1 = W2 = 0.
Answer:
(B) W1 < W2

Question 87.
Two bar magnets of identical size have magnetic moments MA and MB. If the magnet A oscillates at twice the frequency of magnet B, then
(A) MA = 2MB
(B) MA = 8MB
(C) MA = 4MB
(D) MB = 8MA.
Answer:
(C) MA = 4MB

Question 88.
A magnet is suspended to oscillate in the horizontal plane. It makes 20 oscillations per minute at a place where the dip angle is 30° and 15 oscillations per minute where the dip angle is 60°. The ratio of the Earth’s total magnetic field at the two places is
(A) 3\(\sqrt{3}\) : 16
(B) 16 : 9\(\sqrt{3}\)
(C) 4 : 9\(\sqrt{3}\)
(D) 9 : 16\(\sqrt{3}\).
Answer:
(B) 16 : 9\(\sqrt{3}\)

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce OCM Important Questions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Select the correct options and rewrite the sentence

Question 1.
Any person who does not agree with the decision of the State Commission can appeal to the ……………….
(a) Supreme Court
(b) High Court
(c) National Commission
Answer:
(c) National Commission

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Question 2.
Right to ………………… restricts monopolistic tendencies in the market.
(a) Information
(b) Choose
(c) Safety
Answer:
(b) Choose

Question 3.
………………. is referred to as ‘People’s Court.’
(a) Lok Adalat
(b) Public Interest Litigation
(c) Consumer Welfare Fund
Answer:
(a) Lok Adalat

Question 4.
State Consumer Dispute Redressal Commission is popularly known as ……………….
(a) National Commission
(b) State Commission
(c) District Forum
Answer:
(b) State Commission

Question 5.
……………… is the President of State Commission.
(a) District Court Judge
(b) Supreme Court Judge
(c) High Court Judge
Answer:
(c) High Court Judge

Question 6.
……………… is celebrated as ‘National Consumer Day’.
(a) 15th March
(b) 24th December
(c) 26th January
Answer:
(b) 24th December

Question 7.
National Commission entertains complaints where the values of goods or services paid as consideration exceeds Rs ………………..
(a) 50 lakh
(b) 1 crore
(c) 10 crore
Answer:
(c) 10 crore

Match the pairs

Question 1.

Group A Group B
(A) District Judge (1) 2019
(B) Right to Redressal (2) Duty of seller
(C) Consumer Protection Act (3) President of District Commission
(D) Creating Consumer Awareness (4) Supreme Court
(E) Lok Adalat (5) Seek legal remedy in the court
(6) Use of media
(7) Settlement of disputes by mutual compromise
(8) 2010
(9) President of National Commission
(10) Selecting best quality product

Answer:

Group A Group B
(A) District Judge (3) President of District Commission
(B) Right to Redressal (5) Seek legal remedy in the court
(C) Consumer Protection Act (1) 2019
(D) Creating Consumer Awareness (6) Use of media
(E) Lok Adalat (7) Settlement of disputes by mutual compromise

Give one word/phrase/term for the following statement

Question 1.
The right of a consumer which allows him to express his views.
Answer:
Right to be Heard

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Question 2.
The right of a consumer which creates an awareness in him about his rights.
Answer:
Right to Consumer Education

Question 3.
Non-profit and non-political independent groups working for a definite cause.
Answer:
Non-Government Organisations (NGOs)

Question 4.
The right which demands that inferior quality goods or defective products are not brought in the market at all.
Answer:
Right to Safety

Question 5.
The court established by Government to settle consumer disputes by mutual compromise.
Answer:
Lok Adalat/People’s Court.

State whether the following statements are True or False

Question 1.
The Consumer Protection Act was passed in the interest of the sellers.
Answer:
False

Question 2.
Order issued by District Forum on a complaint is final.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
24th December is observed as International Consumer Rights Day every year.
Answer:
False.

Find the odd one

Question 1.
Right to Safety, Right to Travel, Right to Information, Right to Choose.
Answer:
Right to Travel

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Question 2.
Right to be Heard, Right to Represent, Right to Redress, Right to Adult Education.
Answer:
Right to Adult Education.

Complete the sentences

Question 1.
The primary objective of consumer movement is to protect ………………. rights.
Answer:
consumers

Question 2.
An appeal against the order of State Commission may be made to the National Commission within ………………. days.
Answer:
30

Question 3.
A District Commission shall be established by ………………..
Answer:
State Government.

Select the correct option and complete the following table

(High Court Judge, Four, Consumer Organisations, does not exceeds Rs one crore, 2019, created by the Department of Consumer Affairs, 15th March, Lok Adalat, Public Interest Litigation, 24th December)

Group A Group B
1 Janahit Yachika —————-
2. Consumer Welfare Fund ——————-

Answer:

Group A Group B
1 Janahit Yachika Public Interest Litigation
2. Consumer Welfare Fund Created by the department of consumer Affairs.

Justify the following statements

Question 1.
Order issued by the District Commission on a complaint is final.
Answer:
(1) The main objective of the Consumer Protection Act, 1986 is expeditious and inexpensive settlement of consumer disputes. In order to achieve this objective, the Act provides the three tier quasi-judicial consumer disputes redressal machinery at district, state and national level.

(2) A consumer redressal agency established by the state government in each district to give relief or settle the disputes of consumers who complain against manufacturers or traders is called a ‘District Commission’. It consists of a president and two other members to be appointed by the state government.

(3) The District Commission has a jurisdiction over a particular district. As per amendments made to the Consumer Protection Act, 1986, it has the jurisdiction to entertain complaints where the value of goods or services, including compensation, if any, does not exceed Rs one crore.

(4) The justice or order given by the District Commission is binding on both the parties. However, if any person is not satisfied with the order of District Commission he can appeal against such order to the State Commission within 45 days of the order. Thus, order issued by the District Commission on a complaint is not final.

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Question 2.
Lok Adalat can rightly be described as ‘People’s Court’.
Answer:
(1) Lok Adalat, i.e. People’s Court is established by the government to settle the disputes by compromise. It is a mock court held by the State authority, District authority, Supreme Court Legal Service Committee, High Court Legal Service Committee or Taluka Legal Service Committee.

(2) Lok Adalat accepts the cases pending in regular courts to settle them by compromise. For this, both the parties to the case should agree to transfer the case to Lok Adalat from regular court. Even on the application of one of the parties, the court transfers the case to Lok Adalat, if the court feels that there are chances for a compromise.

(3) In Lok Adalat, if a matter cannot be settled through a compromise, then it is returned to regular court. The order passed or resolution of disputes by Lok Adalat is given statutory recognition.

(4) Lok Adalat is one of the several ways to resolve the consumers’ problems or grievances. Some organisations such as Railways, MSEDCL, MSRTC, Telephone Exchanges, Insurance Companies in public sector regularly hold Lok Adalat to resolve consumers’ problems through compromise.